Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutH-3 UB Staff Report - Approve Azusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project construction specification and solicitation of bidsAzusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project April 20, 2020 Page 2 CONSENT ITEM H-3 TO: HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE CITY COUNCIL VIA: SERGIO GONZALEZ, CITY MANAGER FROM: MANNY ROBLEDO, DIRECTOR OF UTILITIES DATE: APRIL 20, 2020 SUBJECT: APPROVE THE SPECIFICATIONS AND AUTHORIZE THE SOLICITATION OF BIDS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE CIRCUIT BREAKER EXPANSION AT THE AZUSA SUBSTATION BACKGROUND The Azusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project (“Project”) consists of multiple phases, including Engineering, Procurement, Construction, and Commissioning. On March 23, 2020, the Utility Board approved the procurement of the project equipment, which is underway, and the recommended action will approve the construction specifications for the Project and authorize the solicitation of bids for the construction of the Project. RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends the Utility Board take the following action: 1) Approve the LD2020 construction specifications for the construction of the Azusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project; and 2)Authorize the advertisement and solicitation of bids for the construction of LD2020 the Azusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project. ANALYSIS: In September 2019, Azusa Light and Water retained Electric Power Systems (EPS) to engineer, inspect, and commission for the circuit breaker expansion at the Azusa Substation. On March 23, 2020, the Utility Board approved the procurement of the major equipment for the Project, which is underway. The proposed LD2020 construction specification were prepared by EPS, under the direction of Azusa Light & Water staff. Staff has reviewed said specifications, determined that they are accurate and complete, and recommends their approval and the solicitation of bids for the construction of the Project. APPROVED CITY COUNCIL 4/20/2020 Azusa Substation Circuit Breaker Expansion Project April 20, 2020 Page 2 The construction and commission phases of the project will commence during the off-peak electrical season, which starts in November of 2020. Therefore, it is imperative that construction bids be solicited in a timely manner to maintain the construction schedule. FISCAL IMPACT: Funding for this project is budgeted for under the Utility’s Capital Improvement Budget Acct # 33- 80-000-730-7120. Prepared by: Reviewed and Approved: Hien K. Vuong Manny Robledo Assistant Director of Utilities Director of Utilities Electric Operations Reviewed and Approved: Sergio Gonzalez City Manager Attachment: 1) LD2020 Construction Specifications City of Azusa Light and Water Department Azusa Substation 2-Breaker Rack Addition Construction Specification No. CS-0001 Revision/Approval History This Document contains proprietary and confidential information that shall not be used, disclosed, or duplicated– in whole or in part – for any purpose other than to evaluate and/or respond to this Request for Proposal. The recipient of this document agrees to – limit the disclosure to those who have a need to know the confidential information contained in this document for purposes of this Request for Proposal, and who are bound in writing by confidentiality terms, policies or procedures no less restrictive. Date REV # Description Prepared by: Initials 1st Approver: Initials & Date 2nd Approver: Initials & Date 02/13/2020 0A Initial Submittal for review RSB JAB 02/26/20 SDE 03/11/20 03/11/2020 0 Issued For Bid DPP SDE 03/11/20 Attachment 1 City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 2 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) Table of Contents 1. General 3  1.1. Purpose ............................................................................................................................. 3  1.2. General Project Description ............................................................................................. 3  1.3. Detailed Project Description ............................................................................................ 3  1.4. Project Location ............................................................................................................... 7  1.5. Project Correspondence ................................................................................................... 7  1.6. Specifications, Drawings or Other Documents ................................................................ 7  1.7. Inspection of Plans and Site ............................................................................................. 8  1.8. Codes and Standards ........................................................................................................ 8  1.9. Interpretation of Documents After Contract Award ........................................................ 9  2. Scope of Work 10  2.1. General ........................................................................................................................... 10  2.2. Contractor Submittals .................................................................................................... 11  2.3. Coordination, Construction Schedule, and Reports ....................................................... 12  2.4. Safety ............................................................................................................................. 15  2.5. Materials ........................................................................................................................ 15  2.6. Existing Conditions ........................................................................................................ 17  2.7. Surveys and Layout of Work ......................................................................................... 17  2.8. For Record Surveys and Drawings ................................................................................ 17  3. Below Grade Scope of Work 18  3.1. General ........................................................................................................................... 18  3.2. Site Design and Construction......................................................................................... 19  3.3. Materials ........................................................................................................................ 19  3.4. Site Survey and Measurements As Required ................................................................. 22  3.5. Temporary Site Drainage and Dewatering .................................................................... 22  3.6. Excavation and backfilling ............................................................................................ 22  3.7. Site Construction ............................................................................................................ 26  3.8. Quality Assurance .......................................................................................................... 28  3.9. Substation Grounding System........................................................................................ 29  3.10. Underground Control and Power Conduits .................................................................... 30  3.11. Testing, Inspection and Final Acceptance Requirements .............................................. 31  4. Above Grade Scope of Work 34  4.1. Erection of Structures .................................................................................................... 34  4.2. Grounding ...................................................................................................................... 36  4.3. Conduits ......................................................................................................................... 38  4.4. Bolted and Compression Electrical Connections ........................................................... 39  4.5. Strain Bus ....................................................................................................................... 40  4.6. Tubing Bus ..................................................................................................................... 40  4.7. Support Assemblies (Insulators and Associated Hardware) .......................................... 41  4.8. Power and Control Cable ............................................................................................... 42  4.9. Communication Cable ................................................................................................... 43  4.10. Outdoor Panels, Cabinets, Junction Boxes, Lighting and Outlets ................................. 43  4.11. Installation of Major Equipment .................................................................................... 44  4.12. Testing, Inspection and Final Acceptance Requirements .............................................. 45  Exhibit A – Project Drawings A1  Exhibit B – Site Photographs B1  City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 3 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1. General 1.1. Purpose 1.1.1 This Document along with its attachments establishes the requirements for material supply and construction of a new two-bay distribution switchrack with one breaker and associated relaying. This Document along with its attachments also establishes requirements related to material supply and construction for accommodations for a future distribution breaker. The work is more fully described in the Specifications and on the Documents listed in Exhibit A. 1.1.2 Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, transportation, tools, construction equipment, and supervision required to perform all work in accordance with the construction Drawings and Specifications. If there is any discrepancy between the RFP documents the Contractor shall obtain written clarification from the Owner as to the scope and intent of the contract. 1.2. General Project Description 1.2.1 The work covered by this specification and its associated documents includes, but is not be limited to, providing the site preparation materials, equipment, shipping and services necessary for new substation improvements consisting of a new two-bay distribution switchrack adjacent to the existing, City of Azusa (Owner) six-bay switchrack structure, including all required interface connections to the existing buswork. 1.2.2 Supply and install of foundations for switchrack structure and breaker. 1.2.3 Install equipment provided by City of Azusa including switchrack structure, breaker, disconnect switches, and surge arresters. 1.2.4 Remove un-used equipment from protective control relay panel. Supply and install controls and metering for new tie breaker. 1.2.5 Replace existing outdoor DC panelboard. 1.2.6 Supply and install associated buswork, conduit, grounding, cabling, and wiring additions. 1.3. Detailed Project Description 1.3.1 Perform all required site work as depicted on the Drawings to form breaker foundation pads and switchrack foundations. 1.3.1.1. Supply and install foundations as shown on Foundation Plan. 1.3.1.2. The Contractor shall supply and construct two (2) breaker foundations as shown on the Breaker Foundation Details drawing. 1.3.1.3. The Contractor shall supply and construct nine (9) switchrack foundations as shown on the Switchrack Foundation Details drawing. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 4 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1.3.1.4. The Contractor shall take care to avoid damage or disruption to existing foundation during the construction of foundations as part of the Work. 1.3.1.5. The Contractor shall correlate all dimensions between the Drawings before construction and notify the Engineer or Owner’s representative of any discrepancies or inconsistencies prior to proceeding with the Work. 1.3.1.6. Rock depth has not been identified; no geotechnical investigation has been performed as part of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for excavation and removal of any rock discovered during construction, at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.3.1.7. The Contractor shall investigate existing adjacent below grade extents of foundations prior to construction and inform Engineer or Owner’s representative of any conflicts or interferences. Drawings and/or records of existing foundations are not available or included as part of the Drawings, and as such are to be verified by the Contractor. 1.3.1.8. Supply and install anchorage as shown on Foundation drawings regarding the breaker and switchrack structure. 1.3.2 Install equipment provided by City of Azusa as shown per the Drawings and these Specifications. 1.3.2.1. On hold for verification with equipment specifications: Equipment vendor responsible for shipping FOB. Contractor shall be responsible for site coordination to allow for delivery. 1.3.2.2. Equipment listed: 1.3.2.2.1. One (1) two-bay steel switchrack structure addition assembled per vendor instruction 1.3.2.2.2. One (1) 15kV, 3000A vacuum breaker. Note: No breaker to be installed in future position. 1.3.2.2.3. Six (6) 15kV single pole 3000A hookstick switches 1.3.2.2.4. Three (3) 15kV single pole 1200A hookstick switches 1.3.2.2.5. Three (3) 15kV single pole 1200A hookstick tandem transfer switches 1.3.2.2.6. Three (3) station class surge arrestors 1.3.3 Remove equipment from protective control relay panel. Supply and install controls and metering for new tie breaker as shown per the Drawings and these Specifications. 1.3.3.1. Remove HMI and keyboard 1.3.3.2. Remove HMI associated wiring from protective control relay panel to the nearest terminal block. 1.3.3.3. Remove HMI communication cables. 1.3.3.4. Install cover plate over removed HMI. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 5 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1.3.3.5. Supply and install controls for new tie breaker on protective control relay panel including SEL-351A protective relay, test switches, manual control switch, breaker status indication lights, settings selector switch, ground cutoff switch, and reclose cutoff switch. 1.3.3.6. Supply and install metering for new tie breaker including meter and test switch. 1.3.3.7. Provide and install equipment nameplates per nameplate schedule. 1.3.3.8. Modify panel for new equipment. Match layout of existing north tie breaker protective equipment. 1.3.3.9. Supply and install terminal blocks and fuses. Include provisions for mounting. 1.3.3.10. Relocate communication equipment (SEL-2401 and SEL-9321) mounted on back of relay panel to below SEL-2030-2 relay test switches. Replace wiring as required to accommodate new position. 1.3.4 Replace existing outdoor DC panelboard. 1.3.4.1. Supply and install new outdoor DC panelboard directly adjacent to existing. 1.3.4.2. Install mounting for DC panelboard including concrete footing, steel channel, and Unistrut to match equipment mounting holes. 1.3.4.3. Bond DC panelboard to mounting frame and nearest ground electrode. 1.3.4.4. Existing DC cables are to be re-used. 1.3.4.5. In the event an existing breaker supply circuit does not reach new breaker location, contractor to install new dc cable to that breaker. 1.3.4.6. In the event the feeder supply does not reach new DC panelboard, contractor to use underground splice to supply sufficient length. 1.3.5 Install all pipe bus, weldments, insulators, conductors, supports, hardware, and all other components per the Drawings and these Specifications 1.3.6 Supply and install site conduit system additions as shown per the Drawings and these Specifications. 1.3.6.1. Conduit beyond fence to be capped and installed with a rope to surface; the rope will be used for future locates of the capped end. 1.3.6.2. Conduit shall be routed from the existing cable control trench at the existing south switchrack structure to the two (2) new breaker foundations. 1.3.6.3. Conduit at the breaker foundations shall penetrate the breaker foundations as shown on the Drawings. 1.3.6.4. Conduit ends extending above new tie breaker foundation shall connect to tie breaker with flexible steel conduit with jacketing per the Drawings. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 6 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1.3.6.5. Conduit ends extending above future distribution breaker foundation shall be capped for future use. 1.3.6.6. New conduit for grounding at breaker foundation shall extend 6” minimum above finished top of concrete. Foam shall be installed after installation of grounding system to seal the conduit from moisture. 1.3.7 Supply and install site grounding system additions as shown on Below Ground Grounding Plan. 1.3.7.1. Contractor to locate existing grounding grid conductor. The existing grounding grid conductor may need to be repaired and routed around two-bay switchrack structure addition and foundations. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to evaluate the existing grounding grid system components at the location and within 5 feet of the location of the site improvements related to the switchrack addition. 1.3.7.2. The Contractor shall provide all materials and labor associated with rerouting and/or modifications to allow for the placement of the Work described within these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. 1.3.7.3. The Contractor shall provide and install ground tails. All ground tails shall extend 3 feet minimum above the tops of foundations during installation. 1.3.7.4. The ground tails for the switchrack structure do not penetrate the foundations, per the Drawings. These ground tails shall be installed to prevent damage when above grade and not pose a tripping hazard for personnel. 1.3.7.5. The ground tails for the breakers are to be routed through conduit per the Drawings. Contractor shall install 1” diameter PVC through foundation to accommodate breaker grounding per the Drawings. 1.3.7.6. The Contractor shall bury the grounding system a minimum of 18 inches below subgrade. 1.3.8 Supply and install cabling 1.3.8.1. Supply cable from outdoor AC panelboard to new tie breaker. 1.3.8.2. Supply cable from outdoor DC panelboard to new tie breaker. 1.3.8.3. Supply ethernet cable from new tie breaker relay to existing SCADA ethernet switch. 1.3.8.4. Cable runs must be intact from start to finish. Splicing cable is not acceptable. 1.3.8.5. Supply cables from tie breaker to designated relay panel in control shelter. 1.3.8.6. Cable trench at south distribution switchrack and cable trench at relay house are connected via subgrade raceway. Specific routing is unknown; contractor to verify route and length prior to ordering and installing cable. 1.3.9 Supply and install wiring for new devices. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 7 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1.3.9.1. Supply insulated ring terminals for all low voltage wiring. 1.3.9.2. Supply cable and wire management for neat and tidy wiring installation. 1.3.10 All work shall be performed and completed in a thoroughly workmanlike manner in accordance with best professional practice for construction of substations, regardless of any omissions from these Specifications and Drawings. 1.4. Project Location Azusa Substation City of Azusa 809 Angeleno Azusa, CA 91702 1.5. Project Correspondence 1.5.1 All Correspondence shall be sent directly to: Owner’s Engineer Landon Quick EPS Engineering & Design, Inc. 1338 E. Kingsley St., Suite B Springfield, MO 65804 Phone: 417-886-4840 Email: l.quick@eps-ed.com Owner Hien K Vuong, PE Assistant Director of Utilities City of Azusa, Light & Water 729 N. Azusa Avenue Azusa, CA 91702 Phone: 626-812-5172 Email: hvuong@azusaca.gov 1.6. Specifications, Drawings or Other Documents 1.6.1 All Drawings, both general and detail, referred to in the Contract are a part hereof, and the Specifications and Drawings and the other documents shall be considered together, so that any Work shown or described in the Contract Document, or vice versa, shall be completed by Contractor as a part of this Contract, as well as any Work which, in the opinion of Owner, may be fairly inferred from the Specifications or Drawings, or other contract documents. 1.6.2 Any detail drawings shall govern and be controlling over general Drawings for the same part of the Work. In the event of any discrepancy between the Specifications and Drawings, the Specifications shall govern and be controlling. 1.6.3 Any specifications or drawings heretofore or hereafter prepared by Contractor in connection with the Work shall be deemed to be supplementary to the Specifications and Drawings. In case of a discrepancy between the two, the Contract shall govern. 1.6.4 Approval by Owner of drawings shall constitute approval as to general arrangement only and shall not relieve Contractor of any responsibility for the correctness of design, details or dimensions, or for the completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Document. Any Work performed in City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 8 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) advance of the receipt of approval drawings shall be performed entirely at Contractor's risk. 1.6.5 The Drawings in general are to scale, however, figured dimensions shall always be followed and Drawings shall not be scaled. In case of error or discrepancies, Owner shall be consulted for the adjustment of all complications arising therefrom and its decision shall be final. 1.6.6 Where work is shown diagrammatically on the Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible for the proper locations of its work so as not to interfere with the work of other contractors. In case of disagreement or dispute regarding the most suitable methods of avoiding interference’s, Owner shall be consulted, and their decision shall be final for the proper coordination of the different portions of the work. 1.6.7 Contractor shall keep on file in its office a complete set of Drawings and Specifications, which have been issued. Owner and/or the Engineer shall give Contractor all desired assistance in interpreting the Drawings and Specifications, but such assistance shall not relieve Contractor from complete responsibility for its work. 1.7. Inspection of Plans and Site 1.7.1 Contractor must carefully examine the Drawings and the Specifications and be fully informed as to all existing conditions and limitations, including all laws, ordinances and regulations affecting the Work, and has included all items implied or required therein to attain the completed conditions called for by the Contract Document. Contractor must not visit the area unless accompanied by an Owner Representative. 1.7.2 Contractor must satisfy itself as to existing construction, working space, storage space, access facilities, and all other conditions at the site affecting the conduct of its operations, by inspection of the site, and no claim for additional compensation shall be allowed which is based upon lack of knowledge of such conditions. 1.8. Codes and Standards 1.8.1 Any material, method, or procedure specified by reference to a specific standard or specification, such as a commercial standard, American Concrete Institute Standard, federal or state specification, industry or government code, trade association code or standard, or other similar standard, shall comply with the requirements in the latest revision thereof and any amendments or supplements thereto in effect on the date of these contract documents. In the event of conflicting requirements between a referenced specification, standard, or code and these specifications, the Contractor shall request a written clarification from Owner. 1.8.2 The code, specification, or standard referred to, except as modified in these specifications, shall have full force and effect as though printed in these specifications. Such specifications and standards are not furnished to City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 9 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) bidders, since manufacturers and trades involved are assumed to be familiar with their requirements. The Engineer shall furnish, upon request, information as to how copies of the specifications and standards referred to may be obtained. 1.8.3 Whenever an abbreviation is specified, it shall be understood to mean the full name of the respective organization (and referenced specification, code, practice, rule, etc.) as listed below. 1.8.4 All materials and equipment shall be new and shall comply with the applicable standard in every case where such a standard has been established for the particular type of material in question, the following standards shall be considered as minimum standards for this project:  AA - The Aluminum Association  ACI - American Concrete Institute  AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction  AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute  ANSI - American National Standards Institute  ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers  ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers  ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials  AWS - American Welding Society Structural Welding Code  CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute  IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers  IBC - International Building Code  ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials  ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association  NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association  NEC - National Electrical Code  NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association  NESC - National Electrical Safety Code  NETA - National Electrical Testing Association  NFPA - National Fire Protection Association  OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act  PCA - Portland Cement Association  REA - Rural Electrification Administration (U.S.D.A.)  SSPC - Society for Protective Coatings  UL - Underwriters’ Laboratories  UBC - Uniform Building Code  WCRSI - Western Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 1.8.5 Where the Work required by Drawings and/or Specifications is above the minimum standards as set by the above referenced codes and ordinances, Contractor shall perform the Work as specified. 1.9. Interpretation of Documents After Contract Award City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 10 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 1.9.1 Contractor shall report any errors or ambiguities in the Specifications and/or Drawings to the Owner as soon as detected. The Owner shall interpret the intended meaning of the Specifications and give his recommendations, this interpretation shall be final. 1.9.2 If any construction problem arises that is not covered by these Specifications, the Owner shall be consulted immediately and shall render a decision on the problem. Failure to notify the Owner in a timely manner shall preclude any change to the Contract Time or Price. 2. Scope of Work 2.1. General 2.1.1 Contractor shall furnish all labor, material, transportation, tools and other apparatus, and supervision required to produce a complete substation switchrack addition in conformity with this Agreement. Contractor shall perform all incidental work necessary to carry out the intent of the Specification and Drawings. 2.1.2 Contractor shall perform complete work regardless of possible omissions in the Drawings, construction units, vendor drawings, Owner-furnished material lists, and these Specifications. Miscellaneous material items that are missing shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner to produce a complete working system in conformity with the intent of the work. The Owner shall have final authority in determining the Contractor's responsibility to complete all work in conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. The Owner shall have the final authority to direct the Contractor to correct work that has been improperly performed, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.1.3 Contractor shall provide all necessary construction staking and surveying. 2.1.4 Contractor shall provide all labor and equipment necessary to install material in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.1.5 Contractor shall provide all material, labor and equipment necessary to install Owner furnished material in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor to furnish and install all materials not specifically listed as Owner Furnished. 2.1.6 Contractor shall provide material, labor and equipment necessary to test the installation to the standards and scope of this document, to perform final cleanup and demobilization of the Contractor’s material and equipment. 2.1.7 Work shall be performed by construction workers skilled and experienced in the work involved. All work on this Project shall be performed in accordance with the best practices of the various trades involved and in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. 2.1.8 All work shall be erected and installed plumb, level, square, and true, or true to the indicated angle, unless otherwise specified. All finished work shall be City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 11 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) free from defects and damage. Quality workmanship is of primary importance on this Project. 2.1.9 Owner reserves the right to reject any materials and work which are not considered to be up to the highest standards of the various trades involved. Such inferior material or work quality shall be repaired or replaced as directed, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.1.10 Cleanup During Construction 2.1.10.1. The station and staging area(s) shall be kept in a neat and orderly condition. The Owner may at any time during construction order a general cleanup of the site as a part of the work under this section. Such cleanup shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 2.1.10.2. Contractor shall dispose of all waste, trash, and debris in a manner acceptable to the Owner. 2.1.10.3. Contractor is responsible for disposal of their own generated hazardous wastes in a manner acceptable to the Owner. 2.1.11 Final Cleanup of Facilities 2.1.11.1. Prior to final inspection by the Owner and after all construction work is essentially complete; the Contractor shall thoroughly clean up all facilities. Items to be cleaned include but are not limited to all work staging areas, material storage areas, structures, access areas, and all other sites and facilities within and incidental to the construction. 2.1.12 The Contractor’s scope of work is more fully set forth in this Construction Specification and Drawings. 2.2. Contractor Submittals 2.2.1 General 2.2.1.1. To facilitate Owner’s technical review and submittal of technical documentation in accordance with the terms of this Contract, the Contractor shall meet the following submission requirements. All transmittals are to clearly indicate the following:  Owner’s name (City of Azusa)  Project Name (Azusa Substation)  Owner project numbers  Contractor’s project number  How submittal is being transmitted.  Reason for submittal  Date of transmittal. 2.2.1.2. The transmittal should include a clear, concise description of all documents enclosed. Documentation by drawing number, revision number, and date should be indicated, if applicable. Distributions to other parties are to be shown on the face of the transmittal City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 12 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.2.1.3. All drawings, documents and manufacturer information shall indicate Owner as the final owner. The Contractor shall ensure Owner is listed as the owner of record with all Subcontractors and Manufacturers providing material or equipment for the project. 2.2.2 Design and Drafting 2.2.2.1. The measurement system used for this project shall be the U.S. Customary System. All drawings and dimensions shall be to scale. Non- scale dimensions (NTS) on drawings shall not be permitted on scalable drawings. A scale bar shall be included on scaled drawings to permit use following photo-reduction. 2.2.2.2. The Contractor shall make reasonable efforts to secure electronically formatted drawings and documents from all Subcontractors and Manufacturers. Owner shall be notified in writing when the Contractor is unable to obtain electronically formatted drawings from a Manufacturer and Owner shall work with the Contractor to obtain the electronically formatted drawings. When electronic formatting s not obtainable due to supplier policies and/or procedures then the Contractor shall have such material scanned and submitted in “.tif” or “.pdf” format. Manufacturer drawings in “.dxf” or AutoCAD format shall be accepted. 2.2.2.3. Construction shall not start until after the Owner has supplied the PE stamped documents and drawings. This requirement applies to revision zero (Rev. 0) and any revision created to support construction. This requirement cannot be waived for revision zero (Rev. 0) but can be waived for a single identified revision created to support construction upon written confirmation from Owner. 2.2.2.4. Electronic files associated with revision zero (Rev. 0) and any revision created to support construction shall be provided to Contractor on CD. The drawings shall be used by the Contractor to support construction and For Records. 2.2.3 Drawings and Installation Data Furnished by the Owner 2.2.3.1. The Owner has supplied a complete design for bidding purposes. This information is expected to be the final design supplied for construction. 2.2.3.2. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Owner shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer; and they shall not reuse any of them on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer. 2.3. Coordination, Construction Schedule, and Reports 2.3.1 Coordination City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 13 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.3.1.1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain overall coordination of the project. Based on the construction schedule prepared in accordance with the Specifications, the Contractor shall obtain from each of his subcontractors a similar schedule and shall be responsible for all parties maintaining these schedules or for coordinating changes necessitated by unforeseen difficulties. 2.3.1.2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for advance notification to all necessary entities as required throughout these specifications. 2.3.1.3. Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination with local, state, and federal authorities, or with any other groups who have rights to intervene in the Project. They shall also coordinate activities of all subcontractors, suppliers, and other involved entities, with the Owner's consent. 2.3.1.4. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting all affected utility companies prior to starting any underground work to determine the location of any buried equipment. The Contractor shall repair any damaged underground equipment without any additional cost to the Owner. 2.3.1.5. Owner and the Contractor shall prepare an outage plan with input from Owner for all scheduled interruptions of electrical power at substation. Prior to requesting signatures all materials required for the scheduled outage shall be at the site. 2.3.1.6. Contractor shall be required to attend a pre-construction conference with the Owner and any other party involved with the Project. The Contractor's superintendent (field man-in-charge) shall attend the conference. If the Contractor's superintendent is not present, the conference shall be rescheduled at the Contractor's expense. At the conference the Contractor shall present a construction plan including but not limited to the following: 2.3.1.6.1. Construction sequence, methods, and equipment to be used in all phases of construction. 2.3.1.6.2. Location(s) of staging area(s). 2.3.1.6.3. Construction schedule showing all activities for the entire Project. The activities shall correspond to the construction units in the Bid Schedule. 2.3.1.7. Contractor's superintendent shall attend all meetings necessary to ensure timely completion of the Project. 2.3.1.8. Contractor and subcontractors shall have weekly project meetings. 2.3.1.9. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the site One (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show all changes made during construction. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 14 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.3.1.10. A log shall be maintained by the Contractor indicating any changes, redlines or revisions. The log shall be provided on a weekly basis to the Owner’s Inspector and/or Owner’s Representative. 2.3.1.11. Coordination and cooperation with Owner contractors and subcontractors performing additional work at the site is expected and is included in the price of this contract. 2.3.1.12. Contractor shall provide all submittals as required in specifications and allow for a Ten (10) working day review period. Contractor shall make corrections indicated on the submittals prior to proceeding with work. 2.3.2 Construction Schedule 2.3.2.1. Contractor shall produce an overall construction schedule that incorporates Project milestone dates and update that schedule including percent complete designators on affected activities on a weekly basis. Activities shall all be resource loaded to show planned manpower at the site though the construction duration. Contractor shall supply Owner with one (1) copy of the scheduling model in Microsoft Project format every time the schedule is updated. 2.3.2.2. The Construction Schedule shall be updated and redrawn on the first working day of each month or upon issuance of any Change Order which substantially affects the scheduling. Schedule slippage shall be accompanied by a recovery plan, subject to the Owner’s acceptance, showing how the Project will be brought back on schedule. Schedule recovery, including overtime, shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. Failure to promptly provide revised schedules may result in delayed progress payments 2.3.2.3. Time is of the essence in the completion of this Contract. The Contractor shall utilize the resources necessary to keep construction on schedule. 2.3.3 Reports 2.3.3.1. Weekly progress reports shall be prepared by the Contractor. These reports shall be signed by the Contractor. Delinquency in signing daily and weekly reports may result in delayed progress payments. 2.3.3.2. Monthly report shall be generated by the Contractor and submitted with the project invoicing. These reports will coincide with the issuance of the monthly schedule. At a minimum the monthly reports will include the following 2.3.3.2.1. Most recent copy of monthly schedule 2.3.3.2.2. Description of work completed coordinated with percent complete information in schedule 2.3.3.2.3. Work planned in the coming month 2.3.3.2.4. Description of procurement progress with listing of equipment ordered and delivery dates City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 15 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.4. Safety 2.4.1 Contractor agrees to comply with all safety provisions for the project concerning health and safety on construction projects. 2.5. Materials 2.5.1 Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the accuracy of quantities, the care and protection of the material and the cost of replacing any shortage and/or damaged materials supplied by Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for their protection from loss and damage of any nature, until they are permanently erected, and the Work is accepted by Owner. Should Contractor damage or lose materials, Contractor shall at the option of Owner, either repair or replace these materials at their own expense. 2.5.2 Contractor shall furnish for approval all samples of materials or finish as directed. When approved in writing by Owner's Representative, the Work shall be executed in accordance with the approved samples. 2.5.3 Contractor-Furnished Material 2.5.3.1. All material and equipment (as specified on the Drawings) furnished by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the approved Bill of Material, Drawings and these Specifications. 2.5.3.2. Contractor shall purchase all materials and equipment outright and not subject to any conditional sales agreement, bailment, lease, or other agreement reserving unto the seller any right, title, or interest therein. All such materials and equipment shall become the property of the Owner when erected in place. 2.5.3.3. The identification, purchasing, and delivery of all materials are the responsibility of the Contractor. Contract extension days will not be considered for project delays caused by late delivery of Contractor- furnished materials. 2.5.3.4. All manufactured materials, products; processes, equipment, or the like shall be installed or applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, directions, or specifications. Said installation or application shall be in accordance with printed instructions furnished by the manufacturer of the material or equipment for use under conditions similar to those at the job site. 2.5.3.5. Any deviation from the manufacturer's printed recommendations shall be explained and acknowledged in writing by the manufacturer involved as correct for the circumstances. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any installation contrary to the manufacturer's recommendations. If any item of material or equipment is found to be installed out of accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, the Contractor shall make all changes necessary to achieve such compliance at no cost to the Owner. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 16 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.5.4 Material Storage 2.5.4.1. All work of shipping, receiving, loading, delivery, unloading, checking, handling, storing, and caring for all materials as required to transport all such items shall be performed by Contractor and the costs shall be included in their quotation. Materials received need to be witnessed by Owner before payment for listed item is released. 2.5.4.2. It is anticipated that no additional material storage areas will be required away from the site. Contractor is responsible for planning and maintaining the material storage areas around the site with respect to site safety, security and work efficiency. 2.5.4.3. Contractor shall maintain accurate records and shall take such security measures as are required to protect these materials against loss, theft, or destruction. Contractor shall furnish to Owner, whenever requested, duplicates of their material records. 2.5.4.4. All arrangements for material storage area(s) outside the station shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Any costs related to the storage area(s) shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.5.4.5. All construction material and equipment shall be stored in a way it is protected from detrimental effects of the elements. If outdoor storage is used, the material and equipment shall be stacked on supports well above the ground line and protected from the elements as appropriate, with due regard to safety. 2.5.5 Substitutions 2.5.5.1. Contractor shall submit to the Owner a complete list of all proposed materials and equipment which differ in any respect from materials and equipment included in these Specifications or on the Drawings. Included in this list shall be all non-conforming materials proposed by subcontractors and materials which are not specifically mentioned in the Specifications. 2.5.5.2. If the Contractor is forced to use any other brand or manufacture of equal quality, appearance, and utility to the product specified due to delivery or availability, they shall request substitution as provided herein. The Owner shall accept as satisfactory or reject the request for substitution, and his decision shall be final. 2.5.5.3. Requests for substitutions will be considered only when offered by the Contractor as follows: 2.5.5.3.1. Submit complete technical data, including drawings and complete performance specifications. 2.5.5.3.2. Requests for substitutions shall contain not less than the following information in the heading or subject of the transmittal letter: 2.5.5.3.2.1. Project title and number City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 17 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.5.5.3.2.2. Subject (unit or division of work) 2.5.5.3.2.3. Drawing and Specification references: Drawing number and detail; Specification section, article, paragraph, subparagraph. Catalog cuts of both the original item and the proposed substitution 2.5.5.3.3. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor will furnish a written warranty, with adequate safeguards to the Owner, assuring satisfactory performance of a proposed substitute item or system for the applicable warranty period. 2.5.5.3.4. Contractor shall be responsible for the execution of any changes in other parts of his own work or the work of subcontractors or other contractors caused by substitution, at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.5.5.3.5. Contractor shall not proceed with any substitution until the Owner has accepted the substitution, in writing, as satisfactory. Such acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 2.5.5.3.6. If the Contractor proceeds with a substitution prior to approval, the substitution is subject to replacement by the original material at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.5.6 Title to Materials Found on The Site 2.5.6.1. The title and the right to use of all stone, sand, gravel, minerals, timber, and all other materials developed or obtained in the work, and the right to dispose of the same are hereby expressly reserved by Owner. 2.5.6.2. Neither Contractor, subcontractors nor their employees shall have the right, title or interest in or to any part hereof. Contractor shall be permitted to use in the Work, with proper allowance, any such materials, which meet the requirements of the Agreement, subject to prior written approval of Owner. 2.6. Existing Conditions 2.6.1 Contractor shall locate all affected underground utilities that may affect their Work and take precautionary measures to protect the said utilities. Any damage caused by the Contractor's operation shall be repaired or replaced, at Owner's option, by the Contractor at Contractor's own expense. 2.7. Surveys and Layout of Work 2.7.1 A survey may be provided by the contractor to aid in the dimensional construction of the Work. 2.7.2 Survey stakes may be established and preserved by the Contractor. 2.8. For Record Surveys and Drawings City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 18 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 2.8.1 The Contractor shall at all times maintain two complete and accurate sets of Construction “For Record” Drawings. The “For Record” Drawings shall be kept current at all times and shall be available for review by Owner. A copy of the “For Record” Drawings shall be submitted to Owner after the acceptable completion of all work activities covered by this specification. The “For Record” drawings shall clearly mark all “For Record” construction activities or installations that differ from those specified in the issued Approved Construction Drawings. For Record additions shall be identified in RED on the drawings and “For Record” deletions/removals shall be identified in GREEN on the drawings. “For Record” drawings shall be updated daily at a minimum. 2.8.2 All changes must be made on all affected drawings; for example, a change on a plan view drawing must also be recorded on the applicable elevation drawing. For Record all substitutions, additions and deletions and changes in quantities on the Bill of Materials. 2.8.3 All work shall not be considered complete until the completed record drawings, including “For Record” changes have been received and approved by Owner. Approval of the “For Record” drawings is a requirement for authorization of final payment of any retained funds. 3. Below Grade Scope of Work 3.1. General 3.1.1 Owner shall have access at all times to suppliers furnishing materials and the mixing plant manufacturing concrete under the Specifications. 3.1.2 All below grade materials and labor shall be supplied by the Contractor. 3.1.3 General Construction Services: 3.1.3.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for final site installation including any grading modifications for the substation switchrack addition including drainage measures. 3.1.3.2. All concrete work required and shown on the Drawings shall be placed, finished, and cured in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and recommendations of ACI 304. No concrete is to be placed before approval by the Owner’s Site Representative. 3.1.3.3. All layout work, Surveying and Staking. 3.1.3.4. Two (2) full size sets of record drawings marked to show any and all deviations from the construction drawings as outlined in these specifications. 3.1.3.5. Submittal of shop fabrication or vendor equivalent drawings for material furnished by Contractor, to the Owner’s Representative for approval. Contractor shall be responsible for providing equipment information within a timeframe that supports the design schedule. 3.1.3.6. Miscellaneous Services: City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 19 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020)  Traffic Control, as required.  Maintenance of the existing finish grade elevations of the substation area. 3.2. Site Design and Construction 3.2.1 Substation Yard 3.2.1.1. This Work shall consist of switchrack addition as shown on the Drawings and all excavating, backfilling, and compacting of all of the foundations, cable trenches, conduits, and all other work as required on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. 3.3. Materials 3.3.1 Contractor will furnish all equipment and materials required to complete the Below Grade Work. 3.3.2 Cement 3.3.2.1. Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C150. Type II cement shall be used unless otherwise called for on the Drawings or as approved by Owner. One brand of cement shall be utilized throughout the Work. 3.3.3 Aggregates 3.3.3.1. Coarse and fine aggregate, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to ASTM C33. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, washed, natural, or crushed sand of uniform gradation. Coarse aggregate shall consist of washed gravel or washed crushed rock having hard, strong, durable pieces, free from adherent coatings or other weak deleterious substances. 3.3.4 Fly Ash: shall conform to ASTM C-618 Class C or Class F. 3.3.5 Mixing Water: shall be potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other deleterious substances. 3.3.6 Reinforcing Steel: bars shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM A615 Grade 60 or low alloy steel conforming to ASTM A706. Mill test reports on all reinforcing steel shall be provided. Test reports shall show chemical composition, yield point, tensile strength, and elongation. All bars, including spiral or circular ties, shall be deformed. 3.3.7 Tie-Wires: shall be minimum 16 gage conforming to ASTM A82, double annealed. 3.3.8 Reinforcing Bar Supports and Dowel Bar Supports: reinforcing bar supports and other reinforcement accessories shall conform to the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. All reinforcing steel used in concrete slabs on grade shall be supported on plastic chairs or concrete blocks. 3.3.9 If used, Curing Membrane shall be non-staining paper meeting the requirements of ASTM C171 or 6 mil polyethylene film. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 20 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.3.9.1. Curing Compound shall be non-film forming type, clear, water-based solution meeting the requirements of ASTM C156. 3.3.9.2. Pipe Sleeves: through concrete walls and footings shall be schedule 40 PVC sleeves, unless noted otherwise, with not less than 1” space all around between pipe and sleeve. 3.3.9.3. Plastic Curing and Vapor Barrier Sheets, as required: 3.3.9.3.1. Curing sheets and vapor barrier under building slabs shall be 0.010- inch (10 mils) white polyethylene sheets. 3.3.9.3.2. All joints of sheets shall be lapped a minimum of 12 inches. 3.3.10 Design Mix 3.3.10.1. Drilled Pier Foundations: Unless higher strengths are required by design, Contractor shall furnish normal weight concrete which has the following properties:  Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days = 2400 psi.  Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days = 4000 psi.  Minimum Fly Ash Content = 100 lbs. per c.y.  Slump shall not exceed:  5” – 7” (for Non-Tremie Placement)  7” – 9” (for Tremie Placement)  Water-Cement Ratio (by weight) = 0.5 max.  Maximum Size of Aggregate = 1”.  Allowable admixtures = High range water reducer in accordance with ASTM C-494, Type F. 3.3.10.2. Mat Foundations, Floating Slabs, Pad and Pier Foundations, and miscellaneous concrete: Unless higher strengths are required by design, Contractor shall furnish normal weight concrete which has the following properties:  Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 days = 4000 psi.  Slump shall not exceed = 3” - 5”.  Water-Cement Ratio (by weight) = 0.5 max.  Maximum Size of Aggregate = 1”.  Maximum Fly Ash Content = 15% of total cementitious content by weight. 3.3.10.3. Approval of Mix Design 3.3.10.3.1. Ready-mix concrete shall be utilized and it shall meet the requirements of ASTM C94. 3.3.10.3.2. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner for approval the concrete mix designs and certified test reports before supplying concrete. 3.3.10.3.3. The mix design shall be performed by a laboratory certified in concrete mix design and testing, and shall be signed by a Civil Engineer registered in the State of California. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 21 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.3.10.3.4. The cost of the mix design and certified tests shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.3.10.3.5. The Contractor shall obtain the Owner’s approval, in writing, to use concrete from various ready-mix suppliers or to change supplier’s materials. 3.3.10.3.6. A minimum 15 calendar days shall be allowed for the Owner Site Representative to approve mix designs, ready mix suppliers or material suppliers, before use of any concrete. 3.3.10.3.7. Acceptance of the concrete design mix shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of providing concrete meeting the requirements as specified herein or in the Drawings. 3.3.11 Ready-Mixed Concrete 3.3.11.1. Ready-mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94 may be furnished to the job site, contained in a truck mixer of the revolving drum type, watertight, and so constructed that the concrete can be mixed to ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. 3.3.11.2. In accordance with ASTM C94, truck tickets shall state cement content and quantity of water added at the plant and in the field, and list any admixtures with quantities. 3.3.11.3. Water added at the plant and in the field shall be limited to that amount specified in writing by the concrete supplier. 3.3.11.4. A copy of each truck ticket shall be furnished to Owner. 3.3.11.5. Concrete not meeting the above requirements shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. 3.3.12 Admixtures 3.3.12.1. Chemical admixtures may be utilized in concrete to improve its characteristics in one or more respects including economy, strength and durability, workability, water tightness, drying shrinkage behavior, and increased resistance to damage from weather conditions. No calcium chloride shall be used in the mix. 3.3.12.2. The selection of the admixture(s) shall be based on an evaluation of its effects, showing the specific admixture is appropriate for use in the particular concrete and under conditions of intended use. Unless otherwise specified, use shall be limited to the types generally recognized as:  Water Reducing.  Set Controlling.  Air entraining, or combinations of these functional types.  Accelerating admixtures shall not be used. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 22 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.3.12.3. Water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494. 3.4. Site Survey and Measurements As Required 3.4.1 As determined to complete the Work, Contractor may employ a Civil Engineer or Surveyor registered in the State of California to place and protect all required bench marks, survey corners monuments and existing concrete foundation top of concrete elevations. Should any staking of markers become displaced, covered or destroyed, Contractor may employ the same Civil Engineer or Surveyor registered in the State of California to reset those points. Permanently reset corners at grade or a maximum of 3" below preliminary grade. 3.4.2 All layout costs pertaining to the Work shall be borne by Contractor. 3.5. Temporary Site Drainage and Dewatering 3.5.1 Contractor shall provide temporary construction site drainage as required to maintain a drained site for the execution of the Work. Dewatering shall be performed as required to maintain all trench excavations sufficiently dry so that work and inspection shall not be hindered. Dewatering shall be continuous and shall not stop until all work has been completed or until permission to stop has been authorized by Owner's Representative. 3.5.2 Contractor shall fully satisfy them-self of the site needs for dewatering and include the price for any dewatering in the quotation. 3.6. Excavation and backfilling 3.6.1 Subsurface Soil Data 3.6.1.1. A geotechnical investigation has not been performed as part of the design of the Drawings and these Specifications. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the Work is constructed on competent soil or solid rock. 3.6.2 Excavation 3.6.2.1. Excavation shall include the removal and offsite disposal of all materials taken during site development and the installation of foundations and conduits. 3.6.3 Disposal of Excavated Material 3.6.3.1. Excavated earth in excess of that required for backfill or unsuitable for use as backfill, shall be hauled away and disposed of at an Owner approved disposal site. 3.6.3.1.1. The removal of excavation materials shall be in a way as to reduce the cost associated with disposal of excavation materials. 3.6.3.1.2. Removal shall be in the most efficient use of resources, such as full truck loads as opposed half loads. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 23 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.6.3.1.3. Excavation material shall be taken to the nearest and economically sound Owner approved disposal site. 3.6.3.1.4. Excavated materials deemed suitable for fill or backfill shall be stockpiled in an area designated by Owner’s Site Representative. 3.6.4 Drilled Piers 3.6.4.1. Auguring or Drilling: 3.6.4.1.1. Pier foundations shall be excavated by auguring or drilling into the earth with the proper diameter auger or bit. 3.6.4.2. Auguring Tolerance: 3.6.4.2.1. Holes shall not be out of plumb by more than 1-1/2 inches in 10 feet. The depth of holes shall be accurately controlled to the elevations shown on the Drawings. Holes augured deeper than required, shall be filled to the correct depth with concrete. 3.6.4.3. Protection of Open Holes: 3.6.4.3.1. All open holes shall be protected from rain, and from sloughing due to dry or wet surface and subsurface conditions. Augured holes shall be kept covered until the foundation concrete is placed. Unless approved otherwise, holes for drilled piers shall not be left open more than 24 hours after completion. Placement of concrete shall commence as soon as possible after obtaining inspection and approval from Owner’s Site Representative. 3.6.4.4. Dewatering Requirements: 3.6.4.4.1. Contractor shall provide pumping required to keep excavations clear of water accumulation during construction and placing concrete. All water discharges shall be in conformance with applicable local and federal regulations. 3.6.5 Backfilling 3.6.5.1. General. 3.6.5.1.1. Backfilling shall consist of placing and compacting earth around the foundations, cable trenches, hand holes, conduits, and other areas that may require backfill. Backfilling shall be performed in accordance with these Specifications and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. 3.6.5.2. Suitability of Backfill Material. 3.6.5.2.1. The suitability of backfill material shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Materials for compacted fill shall consist of any soil imported or excavated from the cut areas that are approved by the Engineer. The soil shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 3 inches in maximum dimension and shall contain at least 40% of material smaller than ¼ inch in size. Material of perishable, spongy, or City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 24 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) otherwise improper nature shall not be utilized in fills, and shall be properly disposed of offsite. 3.6.5.2.2. Material placed within 36 inches of rough grade shall be select fill material that conforms to the requirements above and that has an Expansion Index of 30 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4829. Material placed within the top 18 inches of finish grade shall be Class 2 – Base Material. 3.6.5.2.3. Representative samples of materials to be utilized for fill shall be tested to the satisfaction of Owner’s site representative in order to determine at least the maximum density, optimum moisture content, classification of the soil and expansion index as required. 3.6.5.3. Backfilling and Compaction Procedures. 3.6.5.3.1. Strength of Concrete - Backfill shall not be placed around formed concrete surfaces until the concrete has reached the full 28-day strength specified. 3.6.5.3.2. Placement and Compaction for General Excavation: 3.6.5.3.3. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not greater than six (6) inches loose thickness and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557. Water shall be added to the soil or the soil dried out as necessary to bring the moisture content to that required for optimum compaction. 3.6.5.3.4. An alternate method of trench backfilling above conduit encasement, around hand holes and foundations is the use of two (2)-sack sand and cement slurry. 3.6.5.3.5. Base Material placed in the top 12 inches shall be compacted to 95% as determined by ASTM D-1557. 3.6.6 Trenching 3.6.6.1. Bracing and Shoring. 3.6.6.1.1. Contractor shall provide and install all bracing, shoring and sheathing needed to retain the sides of excavations and protect against settlement, as required for safety, or to conform to all governing laws and codes. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the strength and adequacy of such shoring and bracing, and their subsequent removal. 3.6.6.1.2. Shoring Requirements - Excavate trenches for underground conduits and other facilities to the required lines, grades and elevations indicated on the Drawings and as specified. Provide shoring in trenches over 5 ft. in depth and where unstable soil conditions are encountered as determined by Owner’s Site Representative. All work shall comply with OSHA requirements. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 25 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.6.6.1.3. Backfilling - The remaining trench depth above conduit encasement shall be backfilled with select backfill material at optimum moisture content, placed in six (6) inch layers and compacted to a minimum of ninety percent (90%) of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-1557. Compaction shall be attained by any method (other than water jetting) that shall obtain the minimum specified relative densities, without damaging the buried lines. An alternate method of trench backfilling above conduit encasement is the use of two (2)-sack sand and cement slurry. 3.6.6.1.4. Select Backfill Material - Select backfill material shall be any non- expansive soil excavated from the utility trench or site cut areas or from off-site borrows fill material, which in the opinion of Owner is suitable for backfilling. Backfill within 36” depth from the finish grade shall be select fill. Backfill within 12” depth from the finish grade shall be Class 2 Base Material and compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum dry density. 3.6.6.1.5. Measures Against Displacement - Care shall be taken not to displace the structure or conduits being backfilled. The possibility of inducing excessive lateral pressure during backfill operations shall be prevented by symmetrically and simultaneously backfilling along all sides of pipe or structures. 3.6.6.2. Select Bedding Sand. 3.6.6.2.1. Select bedding sand shall be imported cohesionless material, shall be free from organic substances and other deleterious matter, shall be subject to the approval of the Owner, and shall conform to the following grading requirements: 1. Passing #4 Sieve 100% 2. Passing #200 Sieve 3% maximum 3.6.6.3. Testing and Inspection 3.6.6.3.1. Testing of backfill for compaction and inspection of excavations and backfill shall be performed as indicated on the Drawings and to the satisfaction of Owner’s site representative. 3.6.6.3.2. Costs of all testing and inspection, except as specifically modified hereinafter, shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.6.6.3.3. In the event, any test or inspection indicates material, product, or structure fails to meet requirements of this agreement; re-testing and re-inspection shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.6.6.3.4. Additional tests and inspection not herein specified may be requested by Owner’s Site Representative if in Owner’s Site Representative’s judgment such additional tests are necessary. All costs for this testing shall be borne by the Contractor. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 26 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.7. Site Construction 3.7.1 Foundation Design and Construction 3.7.1.1. Design 3.7.1.1.1. Concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi shall be specified for construction. 3.7.1.1.2. Foundations shall be founded on adequate soils or competent rock. 3.7.1.1.3. Soil densities and resultant soil pressures shall be considered during construction. 3.7.2 Formwork 3.7.2.1. All formwork shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301 and recommendations of ACI 347. 3.7.2.2. Earth forms are permitted with the following requirements: 3.7.2.2.1. Pad Foundations: − Not permitted at conduit riser and/or ground wire locations. 3.7.2.2.2. Pier Foundations: − Not permitted within one (1) foot below finish grade. 3.7.2.2.3. Maximum over excavation shall be limited to six (6) inches beyond the form edge unless approved by the Owner. 3.7.2.2.4. Side forms may be removed as soon as that portion of the structure has attained adequate strength to support safely its own weight. No construction load exceeding the structural design loads shall be supported upon any un-shored portion of the structure under construction. No construction load shall be supported upon, nor any shoring removed from, any part of the structure under construction, until that portion of the structure has reached the full 28-day strength specified. 3.7.2.2.5. All keyways to be formed with the proper size board before, placing of concrete. No stamping of keyway shall be permitted. 3.7.3 Installation of Miscellaneous Embedded Steel 3.7.3.1. Embedded steel shall be firmly and accurately positioned to dimension shown on the Drawings. 3.7.3.2. Embedded steel shall be clean, free of any substances that would prevent or adversely affect the bonding of the concrete. 3.7.4 Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints 3.7.4.1. Construction, expansion, and contraction joints shall be made and treated in accordance with ACI 301 and as shown on the Drawings. 3.7.5 Placement of Reinforcing Steel City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 27 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.7.5.1. Reinforcement and accessories shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and 315, and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. All reinforcing steel utilized in concrete slabs-on-grade shall be supported on plastic chairs or concrete blocks. 3.7.5.2. Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for assembly or reinforcement unless reviewed and released by Owner’s Site Representative. 3.7.5.3. Welding of reinforcing steel is allowed only on ASTM A706 reinforcing steel. 3.7.5.4. Main reinforcement shall have a minimum clear protective cover to the face of concrete as shown on the Drawings. 3.7.5.5. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, vertical reinforcing steel shall not be spliced. Contractor’s submittal for approval of splices shall comply with the latest edition of ACI 318 and shall be for splices only in the lower one-third of the vertical reinforcement steel length. 3.7.6 Placement of Concrete 3.7.6.1. The conveying, placement, and vibration of concrete shall conform to ACI 301. When the placing of concrete has started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the pier, slab, or section is completed. Concrete shall not be placed in, against, or under water. 3.7.6.2. Concrete shall be in a thoroughly mixed, workable, uniform state when being placed. Concrete shall be placed within 1-1/2 hours after the introduction of water into the mix. During hot weather or under conditions contributing to quick setting of the concrete, a time limit of less than 1-1/2 hours may be required by Owner. No concrete shall be placed which has taken its initial set or if the concrete temperature is 90º F or higher, regardless of whether the specified 1-1/2 hour period has elapsed or not. 3.7.6.3. Each batch of concrete delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket. The ticket shall include all information specified in ASTM C94, including the allowable water that can be added at the work site without exceeding the design water/cement ratio. One legible copy of all delivery tickets shall be provided to the Owner. 3.7.7 Finishing of Concrete 3.7.7.1. All voids shall be filled and all form ridges and other projections removed. Exposed concrete shall present a good appearance. Surfaces shall be pitched to drains as required. The dusting of finished surfaces with dry materials other than for abrasive finish shall not be permitted. Surfaces indicated to have a steel trowel finish shall comply with ACI 301. 3.7.7.2. Surfaces to receive grout or dry-pack shall be roughened by steel brush before concrete has set to expose ¼ inch of the aggregate. Surface shall be thoroughly cleaned, with all laitance, loosened particles of the aggregate, and damaged concrete removed. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 28 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.7.7.3. Finishing work must be completed and curing begun as soon as practicable to prevent thermal shrinkage and cracking. 3.7.8 Hot Weather Concreting 3.7.8.1. Hot Weather Concreting (Air Temperature Above 70°F): Hot weather Concreting shall conform to ACI 301 and the recommendations of ACI 305 and the following: 3.7.8.1.1. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete members 1-1/2 feet or more in thickness shall have a placing temperature of the concrete of not more than 75°F, and all other concrete shall have a maximum placing temperature of 90°F. 3.7.8.1.2. In the event contractor is unable to meet the hot weather concreting criteria, contractor shall initiate a pre-placement meeting with Owner and engineer. 3.7.9 Consolidation 3.7.9.1. Concrete shall be consolidated using mechanical vibrators in accordance with ACI 301. 3.8. Quality Assurance 3.8.1 Tolerances 3.8.1.1. Concrete piers and slabs shall be set carefully and maintained at the lines and elevations shown on the Drawings with the following maximum tolerances: 3.8.1.1.1. Horizontal distances between center to center of adjacent piers ± 1/4 inch. 3.8.1.1.2. Elevation of piers to be within ± 1/4 inch of elevations shown on the Drawings. 3.8.1.1.3. Elevation of piers within a group of piers, for an individual structure, to be within ± 1/8 inch of each other. 3.8.1.1.4. Center of pier or slab shall be within ± 1” of locations shown on the Drawings. 3.8.1.1.5. Other slabs shall be true planes within 1/4 inch of 10 ft. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 29 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.9. Substation Grounding System 3.9.1 General 3.9.1.1. This Section covers the material and installation for the below grade substation electrical grounding system. 3.9.1.2. Contractor shall furnish and install the materials for the grounding system defined within the scope of work as shown on the Drawings, bill of materials, and specified herein. Contractor shall be responsible for supplying sufficient material for a complete installation. 3.9.1.3. The substation grounding system consists of a main grid and a fence perimeter ground that is interconnected with driven ground rods and pigtails. 3.9.1.4. Contractor shall furnish all materials and tools, including conductors, connectors, exothermic Z-molds, and cartridges. 3.9.1.5. The numbers of ground tails, etc., shall be shown on the Drawings. 3.9.2 Installation Requirements 3.9.2.1. Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the buried ground system. The ground cable shall be installed a minimum of Eighteen (18) inches below finish grade and with a minimum number of joints. 3.9.2.2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all hard-drawn copper tails of sufficient length to enable the termination of the ground grid to substation equipment. Termination of the ground cables on the steel structures and all substation equipment is covered in the above grade section of this specification. The tails shall be installed so that they are adjacent to and plumb with equipment foundations after backfilling of the ground grid system. 3.9.2.3. Contractor shall furnish all materials and tools (exothermic molds and cartridges) required for making grounding connections below grade. All taps, splices and connections below grade shall be made using the “Cadweld”, “Thermoweld, process materials that shall be manufactured by the Erico Products Co. or Burndy Co. respectively. Contractor shall replace molds at manufacturer suggested intervals required to produce good weld. 3.9.2.4. Precautions shall be taken to insure that “Cadweld” or “Thermoweld” molds are dry and that cable openings have not been worn excessively before making the welds. If puffy or porous welds are made, they shall be cut out and the connections remade. Welds shall be tested by visual inspection and sharp hammer blows. Defective welds will not be accepted. 3.9.2.5. Contractor shall not damage the below grade installation during the construction of ground grid. Any buried facility with damage shall be removed and replaced by Contractor at their expense. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 30 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.9.2.6. Conductors shall be wiped clean of dust or mud where exposed until covered with backfill. Conductor trench all handholes shall be kept clean of trash, dirt, water, etc at all times. 3.10. Underground Control and Power Conduits 3.10.1 General 3.10.1.1. This section covers all underground control and power conduits. Contractor shall furnish and install all conduits, reinforcing steel, concrete, and other related materials required to complete the installation as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for supplying sufficient material to result in a complete installation. 3.10.2 Materials and Installation 3.10.2.1. Conduits 3.10.2.1.1. Contractor shall furnish and install all conduit, bends, fittings, etc., to produce a complete conduit system as specified on the Drawings. 3.10.2.1.2. Method of joining conduit shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Only Manufacturer approved solvent cement shall be furnished and used by Contractor. Solvent cement with a past expiration date indicated on the container shall be discarded. All foreign material shall be wiped from both the conduit and fittings. Excess solvent cement shall be removed from the fitting at the inside shoulder of the conduit. 3.10.2.1.3. Conduit trenches shall be excavated to depth as specified on the Drawings. The width shall exceed the width of the conduit package by 3” on each side. All trenches sixty (60) inches or deeper shall be shored by Contractor. 3.10.2.1.4. Any joint included in a section of conduit to be bent in a ditch should be firmly staked for the desired radius to ensure that the joint is not disturbed or damaged before or after backfill or encasement is completed. In cases where a plastic connection is made with the joints under stress due to misalignment or other factors, the plastic joint must be held rigid after insertion until completely cured. Where stakes are located at the center of a bend or sweep, care must be exercised to prevent deformation of duct due to movement by contraction and expansion. Stakes to be removed after initial backfill is placed. 3.10.2.1.5. If required, Carlon high impact conduit spacers shall be used to support the conduit in the trench. The conduit spacers shall be spaced no more than six (6) feet apart. 3.10.2.1.6. Elbows and risers with sufficient projection above ground shall be installed where conduit termination is to be above grade. 3.10.2.1.7. Installation of all pull tape in the underground power system and mandrelling shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Roundness of the City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 31 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) conduit must be maintained at all times. Contractor shall mandrel all power conduits installed to check the insider diameter and provide a path free of obstructions. If the mandrel will not pass an obstruction, the conduit shall be replaced or repaired at that point by Contractor. 3.10.2.1.8. Contractor shall furnish and install a Muletape or engineer approved equivalent pulling tape, in each conduit. The pulling tape shall have a minimum average tensile strength of 2500-lbs. Pulling tape tails of 24 inches shall be secured at each end of the conduit. 3.10.2.1.9. Conduits shall be rodded and swabbed by Contractor if deemed necessary by Owner. Conduits shall be closed with plugs or caps as shown on the Drawings immediately after installation to prevent ingress of foreign material. 3.10.2.1.10. All conduit stubs shall be marked with Contractor furnished plastic marker stubs. Red marker stubs shall be used for all power conduit stubs. Green marker stubs shall be used for all control conduit stubs. The plastic marker shall be installed a maximum of twelve (12) inches inward from the end of the stub. 3.10.2.1.11. Conduit trenches shall have electrical marking tape installed 12” above all conduit runs. Trenches over 24” wide shall have electrical marking tapes installed on 24” centers for the width of the trench. 3.11. Testing, Inspection and Final Acceptance Requirements 3.11.1 General 3.11.1.1. Owner reserves the right to inspect and perform quality control work during fabrication, unloading, and construction of the materials specified herein. Contractor shall give proper notice and cooperate with the inspectors permitting full access to all places where work is being performed. Such inspections shall not be construed as a substitute for Contractor’s own quality control work nor shall it relieve Contractor from any liability under the contract. 3.11.2 Testing and Inspection 3.11.2.1. Testing of backfill for compaction and inspection of excavations and backfill shall be performed as indicated in the testing and inspection plan and to the satisfaction of Owner. 3.11.2.2. Costs of all testing and inspection, except as specifically modified hereinafter, shall be paid for by Contractor. 3.11.2.3. In the event, any test or inspection indicates material, product, or structure fails to meet requirements of this agreement; re-testing and re- inspection shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.11.2.4. Additional tests and inspection not herein specified may be requested by Owner if in Owner’s Site Representative’s judgment such additional tests are necessary. All costs for this testing shall be borne by the Contractor. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 32 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.11.2.5. Testing Laboratory 3.11.2.5.1. An independent testing laboratory hired by Contractor shall perform tests for compressive strength, temperature, and slump, all conducted in accordance with standard ASTM testing methods. 3.11.2.5.2. The Engineer of Record (EoR) shall certify the foundation was installed per the letter and intent of the design and per all Owner requirements 3.11.2.6. Cooperation by the Contractor 3.11.2.6.1. Contractor shall assist the testing personnel in obtaining the concrete samples. 3.11.2.7. Frequency of Cylinder Specimens 3.11.2.7.1. The following detailed list is a minimum for field sampling. Exact number of sets required for each individual case shall be determined at the discretion of Owner. 3.11.2.7.2. Each set of cylinders shall consist of five specimens. One (1) set per 50 cubic yards of concrete. At least one set shall be obtained for each structure or foundation except when placing a number of items each smaller than 15 cubic yards; one set per 15 cubic yards shall suffice. 3.11.2.7.3. A minimum of one (1) set shall be taken at the beginning of each day’s concreting work for each mix design or concrete supplier. 3.11.2.8. Curing of Specimens 3.11.2.8.1. All specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions after one day of field moist curing. Samples shall be protected from drying and temperature extremes while in the field. 3.11.2.9. Testing of Specimens 3.11.2.9.1. Specimens shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C-39, two at 7 days and two at 28 days and one held in reserve. If any test shows failure of material and/or concrete to meet the requirements of these Specifications, the Work shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense. 3.11.2.10. Slump Test and Temperature 3.11.2.10.1. Concrete slump tests and concrete temperature shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C143 . 3.11.2.11. Testing and Inspection by the Contractor: 3.11.2.11.1. Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments, equipment of personnel to provide tests, inspections and certifications as required and specified within his scope of work. 3.11.2.11.2. An independent testing laboratory retained by Contractor shall perform field-testing, inspection and certification required for excavation, compaction control, concrete, masonry, and field welding. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 33 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 3.11.3 Acceptance of Complete Work Packages or Systems 3.11.3.1. All major items shall be released in writing to Owner following their completion. Contractor shall submit typed copies of his release form describing the work including all pertinent factors affecting the release of such item. The final acceptance forms shall be signed by Contractor and submitted to Owner for their approval and signature. 3.11.4 Major Items for Final Acceptance 3.11.4.1. The list of major items for acceptance include, but is not limited to, the following:  Foundations  Grounding System  Underground Conduit Installation  Backfilling  Restoration of Site Grade 3.11.5 Schedule of Drawings to be Submitted by Contractor 3.11.5.1. Contractor shall submit the following drawings/data for review and written approval of Owner as described in this document. Before the construction of the subject items. Ten (10) working days will be required for review and approval. Any work performed by Contractor before receiving Owner’s written approval shall be at Contractor’s risk. 3.11.5.1.1. Concrete Mix Design including material certifications 3.11.5.1.2. Waterproofing for Approval (Below Grade Walls) 3.11.5.1.3. Conduit and conduit fittings 3.11.5.1.4. Encasement Mix Design and 2-sack/sand cement backfill mix design 3.11.5.1.5. Conductors 3.11.5.1.6. Exothermic welds and grounding connections 3.11.5.1.7. Refer to individual specifications for other submittal requirements not listed. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 34 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4. Above Grade Scope of Work 4.1. Erection of Structures 4.1.1 General 4.1.1.1. Contractor shall assemble and erect structures in accordance with the erection diagrams, material lists, drawings and instructions furnished by engineer or manufacturer. Structural steel shall not be stored in direct contact with unprotected ground. 4.1.2 Erection 4.1.2.1. Structure erection shall be performed in accordance with the following: 4.1.2.1.1. AISC specifications and standards. 4.1.2.1.2. Steel column bases and bearing plates, Section 7.6 of AISC Code of Standard Practice. 4.1.2.1.3. Steel erection tolerances, Section 7.13 of AISC Code of Standard Practice. 4.1.2.1.4. Method of Steel Erection, Section 7.1 of AISC Code of Standard Practices. 4.1.2.1.5. Inspection of field assembly of high strength bolted connections per Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) Section 8. 4.1.2.2. Contractor shall provide all shoring, guying necessary to limit the loads to design values. All lay-down arrangements are subject to review by Owner's Representative. 4.1.2.3. Structural steel shall not be set on concrete foundations until the strength requirement of 2000 psi has been obtained. The test data and documentation which provide the basis for establishing the concrete strength required before steel erection shall be provided to Owner’s Representative for approval. The method of assembly and erecting structures shall be in accordance with the erection diagrams and subject to the review of Owner's Representative. 4.1.2.4. Erection procedures shall be such that during erection no member shall be subjected to any stress which may permanently deform or damage the member or weld. Misalignment or misfit of adjacent sections or members attributable to the method of erection shall be corrected by adjusting erection methods as necessary to eliminate the trouble. 4.1.2.5. All galvanized members shall be clean and roughened at the contact surfaces of the joints when bolted. All structures assembled on the ground shall be blocked off the ground so as to be free of dirt, mud and other foreign materials that tend to adhere to the structural steel. 4.1.2.6. The use of any tool that may deform the nut, cut, or flake the metal or galvanizing shall not be permitted. A reasonable amount of drifting will be allowed in assembly, but punching, reaming or drilling for correction of City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 35 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) mismatched holes due to shop errors shall not be permitted without the approval of Owner's Representative. If any shop errors are encountered in the field, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative who shall notify the steel fabricator for an approved course of correction or replacement. Torch cutting shall not be allowed. 4.1.2.7. High strength connection bolts shall be tightened in accordance with the requirements of the RCSC Section 8. Job inspection torqued values must be determined or turn-of-nut tightening method shall be utilized. Standard torqued values determined from table or formulas are not valid. The anchor bolts shall not be torqued to their specified loads until the concrete foundation has obtained the strength requirement of 3000 psi. 4.1.2.8. Painted or galvanized surfaces, which are scratched or damaged by Contractor during handling or installation, shall be restored to original condition. Painted surfaces shall be restored with an approved paint or prime touch-up having the same quality and color as the original utilized. Galvanized surfaces, which are scratched or damaged by Contractor during installation, shall be given one (1) coat of Galvanox paint (or an approved equal). 4.1.2.9. Field welding, if required, shall conform to the recommended practice of American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code D.l.l-current edition. 4.1.2.10. Each individual structure or group of structures that are erected using double nut anchor bolts shall have all the bottom nuts set at the same level. The space between the bottom of the bottom nut and top of the concrete shall not exceed 1/2-inch. 4.1.2.11. Furnish and install temporary supports and internal braces necessary to support structural steel during erection. Temporary supports and braces shall be adequate for anticipated wind, seismic, equipment and erection loads. Remove temporary shoring after the steel erection is complete. 4.1.2.12. Furnish and install temporary supports and internal braces necessary to support structural steel during erection. Temporary supports and braces shall be adequate for anticipated wind, seismic, equipment and erection loads. Remove temporary shoring after the steel erection is complete. 4.1.2.13. During erection beams and vertical bracing are to be secured with at least two bolts prior to releasing the hoisting cable. 4.1.2.14. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of the Owner. 4.1.2.15. Where members cannot be properly assembled due to misfabrication or deformation due to handling or transportation, the condition shall be reported to the Owner with a proposed method of correction for approval. Erect steel to the lines and grades on the Drawings and in accordance with the Drawings. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 36 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.2. Grounding 4.2.1 General 4.2.1.1. Contractor shall furnish (unless otherwise specified) and install the materials for the grounding system defined within the scope of work as shown on the Drawings, and Bill of Material. Quantities shown on Drawings and Bill of Materials are approximate. Contractor shall be responsible for supplying sufficient material to result in a complete installation. 4.2.1.2. The substation grounding system improvements for the Work shall consist of a buried grid that is connected to the existing buried main grid, and pigtails. The scope of grounding system for the above-grade work is to include the final grounding of all above grade substation steel structures, dc panelboard, and breaker. Contractor shall also be responsible for grounding all electrical equipment as shown on the Drawings and any other equipment in the Scope of Work. Contractor shall furnish all tools, new exothermic molds and cartridges, and miscellaneous hardware required. 4.2.1.3. The main grid and pigtails were covered in the below grade section of these specifications. 4.2.1.4. All ground lugs in the substation area are to be of the bolted type. 4.2.2 Codes and Standards 4.2.2.1. The grounding system shall be furnished and installed in conformance with the following codes and standards:  American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C5.1 – National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 78 Lightning Protection Code.  Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) No. 80 – Safety in AC Substation Grounding.  Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) No. 175 – Installation Code.  National Electrical Code (NEC), as last revised, Article 250 – Grounding. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 37 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.2.3 Material Requirements 4.2.3.1. The main ground grid shall consist of 4/0 AWG, 7 strand, bare, soft drawn copper cable buried below finish grade and shall be installed as shown on the Drawings. All structure and equipment grounding pigtails shall consist of 2/0 or 4/0 AWG hard drawn copper cable. 4.2.4 Installation Requirements 4.2.4.1. Contractor shall be responsible for the termination of the ground cables on the steel structures and all substation equipment. Compression lugs are not to be used, only bolted connectors shall be used. All 2/0 and 4/0 grounding tails shall be AWG 7 bare stranded hard drawn copper cable. The tails shall be installed so that they are adjacent to and plumb with equipment foundations after backfilling of the ground grid system. 4.2.4.2. Connections will only be made after contact surfaces are thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oxidation, paint and polished to brightness. 4.2.4.3. The number of ground rod electrodes, grid spacing, tails, etc., are shown on the Drawings. 4.2.4.4. Contractor shall furnish all materials and tools (new exothermic molds and cartridges) required for making grounding connections to below grad main grid. All taps, splices and connections below grade shall be made using the “Cadweld” or “Thermoweld” process materials for which shall be manufactured by the Erico Products Co. or Burndy Co. Contractor shall replace molds at intervals required to produce good welds. 4.2.4.5. Precautions shall be taken to insure that “Cadweld” or “Thermoweld” molds are dry and that cable openings have not been worn excessively before making the welds. If puffy or porous welds are made, they shall be cut out and the connections remade. Welds shall be tested by visual inspection and sharp hammer blows. Defective welds will not be accepted. 4.2.4.6. Contractor shall not damage the below grade installation during the installation of connections to the main grid. Any buried facility with damage shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. 4.2.4.7. Grounds in boxes shall all be tied directly to the ground bus. Using can or devices as part of ground is not acceptable. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 38 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.3. Conduits 4.3.1 This section covers all outdoor conduits installed above grade. Contractor shall furnish material and install all conduits as shown and described in these specifications. 4.3.2 Contractor shall install all conduit, bends, accessories, fittings, junction boxes, mounting hardware, etc., to produce a complete system. Seal washers are to be used on all side & top entries. 4.3.3 Conduit supports shall be spaced to provide a neat and orderly appearance. Conduits will be supported at a minimum of no more than 10’ distances between supports. All field-drilled holes for the conduit clamp support shall be coated with Contractor furnished Galvanox or Subox paint. 4.3.4 Joining method shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Only manufacturer approved solvent cement will be furnished and used by contractor. Solvent cement with a past expiration date indicated on the container shall be discarded. All foreign material shall be wiped from both the conduit and fittings. Excess solvent cement shall be prevented from being forced into the fitting at the inside shoulder of the conduit. 4.3.5 Standard factory bends shall be used on all rigid conduit 2" or larger. Conduit bends formed in the field shall be round with clean threads and show no crimping or other irregularity and shall comply with the National Electrical Code. 4.3.6 No conduit runs shall have more than (3) 90-degree bends between junction box or accessible fitting. All conduits shall be installed and securely fastened to its supporting structures before any wires are drawn through the conduit. 4.3.7 Damage to the galvanizing shall be repaired by painting with Galvanox or Subox paint. Extensively damaged galvanized steel conduit shall be replaced. 4.3.8 A minimum of five (5) threads of the conduits shall connect to the various fittings. The conduit ends shall be reamed after cutting and threading to remove all burrs, sharp edges, etc. Field cut conduit threads shall be thoroughly painted with Galvanox or Subox paint. 4.3.9 Conduit shall terminate with coupling and chase nipple for installation and protection of cables during pulling. 4.3.10 Junction boxes, pull boxes, and panels supplied without conduit holes and with covers. Field cutting of conduit holes shall be made with hole saws or Greenlee Punches. Seal washers are to be used on all sides or top of any outdoor junction boxes to minimize water entry. 4.3.11 Contractor shall install concrete encased below-grade PVC conduit as required. All conduit elbows shall be Schedule 40, 18" minimum radius. Concrete encasement shall be a minimum three and one-half (3 1/2) sack City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 39 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) mix with a six (6) inch slump and 3/8" maximum size aggregate. The concrete envelope around the conduit shall be a minimum of three (3) inches on the top, two-(2) inches minimum on each side and two-(2) inches minimum between the bottom of the conduit and the bottom of the trench. Red dye shall be placed on top of the concrete encasement of all power conduit installations. 4.3.12 Conduits shall be rodded and swabbed by Contractor if deemed necessary by Owner's Representative. Plugs shall be installed at all conduit openings to prevent foreign material entrance prior to cable pulling. 4.3.13 Conduit plugs and threaded caps shall remain in unused conduits. 4.4. Bolted and Compression Electrical Connections 4.4.1 Bolted Connections 4.4.1.1. Bolted current carrying parts shall be bolted together with Contractor supplied hex head bolts with hexagon nuts, two flat washers and a lock washer. Bolts shall be threaded with National Coarse Series threads. Bolt and nut materials shall be stainless steel. 4.4.1.2. All connections shall have the contact area dry, clean, and polished to brightness. 4.4.1.3. Electrical joint compounds, such as Penetrox, 2EJC or AFC shall be furnished by Contractor and used as recommended by the connector manufacturers. 4.4.1.4. Bolted connection aluminum to copper. An acceptable joint compound shall be applied to all contact surfaces of aluminum connections. Immediately after polishing (with wire brushes, sand paper, etc.), the aluminum contact surfaces shall be liberally coated on the entire contact surfaces with the joint compound. Just prior to making the connection, the surfaces with joint compound shall be lightly brushed with a wire brush. Care shall be taken not to remove the joint compound from the surfaces. After preparation of contact surfaces, liberally apply joint compound to all contact surfaces and bolt the two terminals and bimetallic pad together. Aluminum shall be on top of copper terminals with a bimetallic pad between. Hot dip galvanized, National Coarse Series thread bolts shall be used with a flat washer under the head and a flat washer and lock washer under the nut. 4.4.1.5. Aluminum to aluminum connections. An acceptable joint compound shall be applied to all contact surfaces of aluminum connections. Immediately after polishing (with wire brushes, sand paper, etc.), the aluminum contact surfaces shall be liberally coated on the entire contact surfaces with the joint compound. Just prior to making the connection, the surfaces with joint compound shall be lightly brushed with a wire brush. Care shall be taken not to remove the joint compound from the surfaces. Bolted connections should be pre-cleaned then should have the contact City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 40 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) surfaces liberally coated with electrical joint compound and then thoroughly wire-brushed through the paste to remove the aluminum oxide. The connection shall be made without removing the paste. Hot dip galvanized, National Coarse Series thread bolts shall be used with a flat washer under the head and a flat washer and lock washer under the nut. 4.4.1.6. Bolted connections copper to copper. After preparation of contact surfaces, bolt the two terminals together with silicone bronze, National Coarse Series thread bolts with a flat washer under the bolt head and a flat washer and lock washer under the nut. If bolts are supplied with the fittings, they shall be used and torqued to values as recommended by the manufacturer. 4.4.1.7. All 5/8 aluminum bolted connections shall have nuts and bolts torqued to 40 foot pounds. All nuts and bolts supplied with the electrical connectors shall be torqued to the connector manufacturer's specifications. Aluminum ½ bolts on lugs should be torqued to 25 foot pounds. 4.4.1.8. Bolt lengths shall limit the protrusion of threads above the nut to a minimum of 1/4-inch to a maximum of 1/2-inch. 4.4.2 Compression Connections 4.4.2.1. Compression connections shall be completed as per manufacturer's recommendations using the proper tool, die compression force and number of indentures. 4.4.2.2. Slight bends in compression fittings shall be removed by the use of a hydraulic press and straightening blocks. Hammering on compression flutings is not acceptable. 4.4.2.3. Compression connections will have the contact surfaces liberally coated with electrical joint compound and then thoroughly wire-brushed through the paste to remove the aluminum oxide. The connection shall be made without removing the paste. 4.5. Strain Bus 4.5.1 General 4.5.1.1. Conductor and support assembly (insulators) installation shall be completed in strict accordance with Drawings, sag charts, instructions and Specifications provided. Any conflicts shall be resolved by Owner's Representative. 4.6. Tubing Bus 4.6.1 Contractor to install tubing bus with jumpers and connections as shown on Drawings or as required to install the cables per these Specifications and manufacturer recommendations. 4.6.2 Prestressing of conductor is not required. Overstressed conductor shall not be installed. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 41 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.6.3 Installation tension shall be maintained on conductors sufficient to avoid other obstructions. Installation tension shall be limited by methods or equipment to prevent overstressing of conductors, support assemblies or steel structures. 4.6.4 All installation equipment and methods will be such that neither the equipment nor method causes any damage to the conductor. 4.6.5 Conductor shall be visually inspected during and after installation for nicks, deformations or cuts. Any nicks, deformations or cuts discovered shall be remedied in the manner as determined by Owner's Representative whether it be installation of repair sleeves or replacement. Repair of conductor in this manner is considered incidental to installation and no extra or special compensation shall be allowed for it. 4.6.6 Jumper loops shall present a smooth, uniformly curving surface free of kinks, corkscrew curves, bird caging or other deformations. All jumper loops shall be similarly shaped to give a uniform appearance in the substation. All loops shall maintain more than minimum clearance to structure at the minimum and maximum expected temperatures. 4.6.7 Conductors of a bundled bus shall be sagged simultaneously. 4.6.8 No splices shall be installed in any bus span between tension supports. 4.6.9 Splices in other locations, shall be made with splice kits. Splice kits shall be manufacturer approved and installed as per manufacturer's recommendations using the proper tools, dies and compounds. Splice kits will be supported by an external structure and not supported by the cable tension force and number of indentures. 4.7. Support Assemblies (Insulators and Associated Hardware) 4.7.1 All hardware required to make a support assembly shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installation. 4.7.2 Cotter pins shall not be hammered into place. Open ends of preformed cotter pins shall not be spread. The cotter pin open end shall, when installed, face towards the structure or downward if possible. 4.7.3 All nuts shall be installed and tightened to torque’s listed in the manufacturer instructions. 4.7.4 Insulators shall be installed clean. Insulators shall be cleaned just prior to installation by wiping porcelain with clean rags and the metal parts with steel wool. Insulators shall be handled in such a manner to keep them clean. Just prior to energization insulators shall be wiped with clean rags to remove any contaminants. 4.7.5 Insulators with damaged, chipped, cracked porcelain or corroded metal parts shall not be installed. Insulators shall be handled in such a manner to prevent damage. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 42 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.7.6 All connections shall have the conductor very clean, dry and polished to bright finish. 4.7.7 An acceptable joint compound shall be applied to all contact surfaces of aluminum connections. Immediately after polishing (with wire brushes, sand paper, etc.), the aluminum contact surfaces shall be liberally coated on the entire contact surfaces with the joint compound. Just prior to making the connection, the surfaces with joint compound shall be lightly brushed with a wire brush. Care shall be taken not to remove the joint compound from the surfaces. 4.7.8 Slight bends in the compression fitting shall be removed by hydraulic press and straightening bars. Hammering on compression fittings is not acceptable. 4.7.9 All completed splices and connections shall have all conductor strands inserted the proper depth into the fitting, all strands snugly seated, and all wrapping, binding, excess grease and compound removed. 4.8. Power and Control Cable 4.8.1 All control and power cable shall be installed in accordance with these Specifications and Drawings. 4.8.2 Cables and wires shall be visually inspected for possible damage when received and before installation. Damaged cables and wires shall not be installed. Contractor shall "megger" all power and control cables on the reels prior to installation. 4.8.3 The utmost of care shall be used in order to protect the cables and wires against damage in handling, during installation and after the cables and wires are installed. Minimum bending radius of cables and wires shall be six (6) times the outside diameter. The pulling of cables shall be done in such a manner that a minimum of twist is applied to the installed cables. The installed cables and wires shall be relieved of the tensions received during the installation and a reasonable slack shall be provided at termination points, in pull boxes, handholes and in the corners of the trenches. Cables and wires in cable trenches and trays shall be laid and not pulled. 4.8.4 Contractor shall "megger" all power cable after installation. Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative when "megger" tests are to be made. If any cable fails to pass the "megger" test, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative immediately. 4.8.5 Power and control cable shall be installed in the conduit and handhole system and routed as shown on the Drawings. Conduits shall be filled starting with the bottom row of conduits and shall not be filled to greater than 55% of capacity. Maximum cable pulling tensions specified by the cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during cable installation. Pulling lubricants shall be used where necessary to reduce cable-pulling tensions. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 43 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.8.6 Cables and wires identified by circuit numbers as indicated in the cable schedule drawing. The circuit number shall be fastened to each cable or wire grouping at each terminal, cable trench, pull box, manhole, hand hole, and junction point. (Ty-Rap cable markers, type TY551M or TY-546, manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Co., are recommended). The circuit numbers shall be legibly printed with a permanent marking pen. (Thomas & Betts Co. special nylon marking pen, Cat. #WT163M-1, black, is recommended). 4.8.7 Cut ends of cable shall be protected from water immersion during pulling or when not enclosed in a weather-tight housing. 4.8.8 Cables tied to equipment frames shall not be tied with excessive pressure exerted on the cable. Contractor shall furnish and install non-metallic wire and cable ties as required (Thomas & Betts or Panduit, self-locking type). 4.8.9 Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of the length of all cables pulled. Lengths indicated on the cable and conduit list are approximate. 4.8.10 Bundled control cable and wire installed in equipment housings at terminals shall be tied to and supported by the frame and not by the terminals. Bundled control cable and wire so installed shall clear terminals sufficiently to allow removal of individual wires from the terminals and shall allow slack in each conductor. Control cables shall be terminated with enough slack so that any wire can be terminated anywhere within the equipment cabinet or terminal box. 4.8.11 Use automatic tie wrap tool on wiring. Side cutters shall not be used to cut zipper straps. 4.8.12 To assure positive electrical connection and to avoid damage to the sleeve, it is mandatory that the crimping tool be used in accordance with instruction for its use, and that the proper terminal and crimping tool be used for each wire size. 4.8.13 Compressor lugs of box type with screw or tubular terminals are not acceptable when they can be removed. They will be replaced with compress lug with a ring tongue configuration, which can nut to a stud or screwed down to a terminal. 4.8.14 Direct bury control cable will be laid in a sanded ditch 36” deep. 4.9. Communication Cable 4.9.1 Communication cables shall be of the correct length and shall be continuous from device to device with no splices or intermediate junctions allowed. 4.9.2 Utmost care shall be used in order to protect the cables against damage in handling, during installation and after the cables are installed. 4.10. Outdoor Panels, Cabinets, Junction Boxes, Lighting and Outlets City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 44 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.10.1 Outdoor Distribution Panels – Contractor shall install complete, including wiring and terminating, outdoor panels, cabinets and junction boxes in accordance with the project requirements. Miscellaneous hardware required for mounting and installation shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 4.11. Installation of Major Equipment 4.11.1 General 4.11.1.1. Certified Manufacturer’s Assembly and Erection Drawings and Instruction Books of the equipment included under this section of the Specification will be available to the Contractor. Such data is the property of Owner and shall be returned to Owner’s Representative upon completion of the Work. All work under this section shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction books. 4.11.1.2. The work of assembly and installation of the equipment shall be done only by qualified personnel with experience in assembly of the equipment. Installation of the work may be observed and inspected throughout the installation period. Particular attention shall be made to keep the equipment, tools and work area clean and free from damaging dust, water and other material foreign to the equipment. 4.11.1.3. When work is temporarily halted, incompletely assembled equipment shall be adequately protected against inclement weather. The end of a workday shall be considered a temporary halt of the work. 4.11.2 During construction, the physical high point of all electrical equipment shall be temporarily grounded to prevent lightning damage. 4.11.2.1. Electrical equipment shall be in an operating condition in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Owner reserves the right to perform work and testing on the equipment as may be necessary to validate the condition or acceptance of the equipment. This work may be performed during or after the installation of the equipment. Owner will not unduly interfere with Contractor’s work, but may ask Contractor to cease work for brief test periods. 4.11.2.2. Contractor shall make such tests as are necessary to assure that the equipment has been properly installed in an operating condition and is ready to turn over to Owner for commercial service. These tests shall not damage the equipment or connected circuit or interconnected equipment. Any damage to the equipment as a result of the test shall be repaired or replaced as agreed upon by Contractor. The testing shall be by normal methods, which shall be approved by Owner’s Representative prior to testing and/or by methods as directed by Owner’s Representative. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 45 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.11.3 Wasting and Disposal of Excavation 4.11.3.1. Disposal of material from minor excavations shall be performed in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. 4.11.4 Painting and Touch-Up 4.11.4.1. The existing coating, or galvanizing, of the equipment or structures impaired during installation shall be painted or coated with Galvanox by Contractor. 4.12. Testing, Inspection and Final Acceptance Requirements 4.12.1 General 4.12.1.1. Owner reserves the right to inspect and perform quality control work during fabrication, unloading, construction, and installation of the equipment, systems and materials specified in these specifications and on the Drawings. 4.12.1.2. Contractor shall give proper notice and cooperate with Owner's Representative permitting full access to all places where work is being performed. Such inspection shall not be construed as a substitute for Contractor's own quality control work nor shall it relieve Contractor from any liability under the contract. 4.12.1.3. For Record drawings for both Electrical and Structural Drawings are to be provided by Owner before final 10% retention payment will be paid. 4.12.2 Testing By Contractor 4.12.2.1. Contractor shall perform the following tests specified. In addition to the tests specified in the manufacturer's instruction books, the following tests shall be performed: 4.12.2.2. Continuity and megger test on all distribution power conductors from point to point. 4.12.2.3. Phase rotation checks of existing equipment prior to installation and verification of phase rotation after installation of new feeders to ensure proper rotation of the existing motors in the facility. 4.12.2.4. Tests performed by the Contractor shall be done with qualified personnel familiar with the test procedures, the equipment being tested and the interpretation of the test results. Test results shall be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative prior to acceptance of the work. Contractor furnished test data sheets shall be used to record the test results for all tests performed on the equipment. All test data sheets shall include:  A list of equipment used during the test including model number  Serial number and date of last calibration; signature of the testing  Person completing the test; and the date of the test. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Page - 46 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) 4.12.3 Testing By Owner 4.12.3.1. All control circuit acceptance testing, relay calibration, trip testing, etc., shall be completed by Owner. Performance of these tests by Owner shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibilities of installing and connecting the equipment as specified in the specifications and the manufacturer's instruction books and as shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any errors or deviations resulting from Contractor installation found by tests and checks performed as described above. City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Below Grade Construction - A1 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) Exhibit A – Project Drawings DWG NO. TYPE REV DRAWING TITLE 90‐9901‐12 INSTALL C1 SUBSTATION EXPANSION, SUBSTATION DETAIL: NEW UNDERGROUND  GETAWAYS 466507‐4 INSTALL 6A BELOW GROUND GROUNDING PLAN  D‐1101 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐FOUNDATION PLAN  D‐1102 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐BREAKER FOUNDATION DETAILS  D‐1103 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHBACK FOUNDATION DETAILS  D‐1201 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐GROUNDING AND CONDUIT DETAILS  D‐2101 INSTALL 0B SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHRACK ADDITION  D‐2102R REMOVAL 0R1 COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION  D‐2102 INSTALL 1A COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION  D‐2103R REMOVAL 0R1 COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR BACK PANEL ELEVATION  D‐2104 INSTALL 0B SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHRACK LOADING CRITERIA  D‐2105 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐STD. ELEC. DETAILS BOLTED CONNECTIONS  D‐3101 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER DIAGRAM  D‐3201 INSTALL 1A SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD  D‐3301R REMOVAL 0R1 SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD  D‐3301 INSTALL 1A SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD  D‐4001 INSTALL 0B SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 1  D‐4002 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 2  D‐4901 INSTALL 0A NETWORKING DIAGRAM  D‐5001 INSTALL 0A WIRING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER  D‐5002 INSTALL 0A WIRING DIAGRAM COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR (SEL‐2030‐2)  D‐5501 INSTALL 0A INTERCONNECTION WIRING, SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER  ED92‐0002 INSTALL 6B AZUSA SUBSTATION‐SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM  City of Azusa – Azusa Substation Below Grade Construction - B1 Construction Specification - CS-0001 Rev. 0 (2/13/2020) Exhibit B – Site Photographs Figure 1 – Existing south switchrack structure DWG NO.REMOVAL/INSTALL REVISION 90‐9901‐12R REMOVAL CR1 90‐9901‐12 INSTALL D1 466507‐4INSTALL6A D‐1101 INSTALL 0A D‐1102 INSTALL 0A D‐1103 INSTALL 0A D‐1201 INSTALL 0A D‐2101 INSTALL 0B D‐2102R REMOVAL 0R1 D‐2102 INSTALL 1A D‐2103R REMOVAL 0R1 D‐2104 INSTALL 0B D‐2105 INSTALL 0A D‐2106 INSTALL 0A METER PANEL‐PANEL ELEVATION D‐3101 INSTALL 0A SOUTH BUS POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER DIAGRAM D‐3201 INSTALL 1A D‐3301R REMOVAL 0R1 D‐3301 INSTALL 1A D‐4001 INSTALL 0B D‐4002 INSTALL 0A D‐4901 INSTALL 0A D‐5001 INSTALL 0A D‐5002 INSTALL 0A D‐5003 INSTALL 0A WIRING DIAGRAM‐COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR (SEL‐2030‐2) D‐5501 INSTALL 0A INTERCONNECTION WIRING, SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ED92‐0002 INSTALL 7B 0B 0B C1 5A ‐‐ ‐‐ 0A 0A 6A ‐‐ ‐‐ DSG19083 ‐ CITY OF AZUSA MED VOLTAGE CIRCUIT  BREAKER DRAWING INDEX 60% ISSUE FOR BID DRAWING TITLE SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 1 AZUSA SUBSTATION‐SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM SUPPORT DOCUMENTS SUBSTATION EXPANSION, SUBSTATION DETAIL: NEW UNDERGROUND GETAWAYS SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHRACK LOADING CRITERIA A5405 BUS TIE 12KV ‐ AC & DC ELEMENTARY BELOW GROUND GROUNDING PLAN SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐FOUNDATION PLAN SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐BREAKER FOUNDATION DETAILS SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHRACK FOUNDATION DETAILS SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐GROUNDING AND CONDUIT DETAILS COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR BACK PANEL ELEVATION SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD BELOW GROUND GROUNDING PLAN DELIVERABLE DOCUMENTS BM‐0001 BILL OF MATERIAL D‐2102 COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION 12KV BUS TIE BREAKER CONTROL SCHEMATIC A5506 E91‐2‐11 E91‐2‐12 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐SWITCHRACK ADDITION NETWORKING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐STD. ELEC. DETAILS BOLTED CONNECTIONS COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION PANEL 03 WIRING DIAGRAM SHEET 2 12KV BUS TIE BREAKER WIRING DIAGRAM WIRING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER, SH.2 SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD WIRING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER, SH.1 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV‐AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 2 466507‐4 D‐3201 AZUSA SUBSTATION‐SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM SUBSTATION EXPANSION, SUBSTATION DETAIL: NEW UNDERGROUND GETAWAYS90‐9901‐12 ED92‐0002 DRAWINGS CC‐0001 CABLE SCHEDULE SUBSTATION EXPANSION, SUBSTATION DETAIL: NEW UNDERGROUND GETAWAYS DI-0001 Drawing Index - JRR 1 3/3/20204:52 PM D D __/__/__D. PERKINS 5'-0"2'-0"(2) 4" CONDUITS C.N. 5 (2) 4" CONDUITS C.N. 4 C __/__/__J. ROUTH INSTALL CONDUIT FOR NEW PANELCONTROLCABLE TRENCHDC PANEL BOARD AC PANEL BOARD SOUTH BUS AC/DC PANELBOARD POSITION ADDED REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 D1 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.DC AND AC PANEL BOARD LOCATION IS APPROXIMATE. 2.INSTALL (9) FOUNDATIONS FOR NEW SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE. 3.INSTALL (2) FOUNDATIONS FOR BREAKERS, (1) FOR NEW TIE BREAKER AND (1) FOR FUTURE BREAKER. 4.INSTALL (2) 4" CONDUIT FOR NEW TIE BREAKER. 5.INSTALL (2) 4" CONDUIT FOR FUTURE BREAKER. 6.INSTALL (1) 6" CONDUIT FOR FEEDER GETAWAY. NO PHASE CONDUCTORS INSTALLED AT THIS TIME. 7.INSTALL NEW OUTDOOR DC PANELBOARD IMMEDIATELY ADJACENT TO EXISTING DC PANELBOARD. INSTALL (2) 4" CONDUITS FROM CABLE TRENCH TO DC PANELBOARD. 8.CAP CONDUIT BELOW GRADE. TIE NYLON ROPE AROUND CONDUIT NEAR CAPPED END OF GETAWAY. ROUTE NYLON ROPE TO SURFACE ABOVE CAP, KNOT, AND LEAVE 3" MINIMUM EXPOSED. ROPE WILL BE USED FOR FUTURE LOCATES OF THE CAPPED END. 9.CABLE TRENCH AT SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AND CABLE TRENCH AT RELAY HOUSE ARE CONNECTED VIA SUBGRADE RACEWAY. SPECIFIC ROUTING IS UNKNOWN. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ROUTE LENGTH PRIOR TO ORDERING CABLE. 10.ALL NEW CONDUIT TO BE SCH 40 PVC UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION D1 D1 REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-1102 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV BREAKER FOUNDATION DETAILS D-1201 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV GROUNDING AND CONDUIT DETAILS D1 C.N. 8 C.N. 6 C.N. 2 (TYP.) C.N. 3 CONDUIT STUB-UP LOCATION D1 C.N. 7 D1 CONTROL CONDUIT CONTROLCABLE TRENCHC C __/__/__J. ROUTH DC PANEL BOARD AC PANEL BOARD C-R __/__/__J. ROUTH REMOVE EXISTING DC PANEL BOARD R SOUTH BUS AC/DC PANELBOARD POSITION ADDED REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 CR1 03.04.20 JRR JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN REMOVAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.DC AND AC PANEL BOARD LOCATION IS APPROXIMATE. 2.REMOVE EXISTING DC PANELBOARD AFTER ALL CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN TRANSFERED TO THE NEW DC PANELBOARD. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION CR1 C.N. 2 CR1 5 __/__/__DPPEXISTING SOUTH SWITCHRACK SHOWN 4/0 CU (TYP) 4/0 CU (TYP) __/__/__GROUNDING FOR NEW S-RACK STR. & BREAKERS6 DETAIL 1 DETAIL 1 REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 6A 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.CONTRACTOR TO LOCATE EXISTING GROUND GRID CONDUCTOR. THE EXISTING GROUND GRID CONDUCTOR MAY NEED TO BE REPAIRED AND ROUTED AROUND NEW SWITCHRACK AND BREAKER FOUNDATIONS; SEE CONSTRUCTION NOTE 3. 2.CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY NEW GROUND WIRE PER CONSTRUCTION NOTE 1 AND CADWELD CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING GROUND GRID SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIR OF EXISTING GROUND GRID DAMAGED DURING LOCATION. 3.GROUND GRID NEAR EXISTING SOUTH SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE AND BREAKER FOUNDATIONS HAVE NOT BEEN VERIFIED. 4.CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY AND INSTALL GROUND TAILS. ALL GROUND TAILS TO EXTEND 5' ABOVE TOPS OF FOUNDATIONS DURING INSTALLATION. 5.GROUND TAILS FOR SWITCHRACK DO NOT PENETRATE FOUNDATIONS, BUT SHALL BE INSTALLED TO PREVENT DAMAGE WHEN ABOVE GRADE AND NOT POSE A TRIPPING HAZARD FOR PERSONNEL. SEE GROUNDING DETAILS. 6.GROUND TAILS FOR BREAKER TO BE ROUTED THROUGH CONDUIT STUB-UPS; SEE GROUNDING DETAILS. 7.GROUND CONDUCTORS TO BE BURIED A MINIMUM OF 18" BELOW SUBGRADE. 8.INSTALL (2) 4/0 GROUND TAILS PER NEW TIE BREAKER AND FUTURE BREAKERS. 9.INSTALL (4) 4/0 GROUND TAILS ON SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE. ONE ON EACH CORNER. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 6A 5A REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-1201 GROUNDING DETAILS C.N. 2,3 C.N. 9 C.N. 8 C.N. 9 C.N. 9 C.N. 9 C.N. 1 C.N. 1 C.N. 1 C.N. 1 6'-0"6'-6"3'-3"3'-3" EXISTING SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE FOUNDATION SWITCHRACK FOUNDATION (TYP. OF 9) SEE DRAWING D-1103 FOR DETAILS BREAKER FOUNDATION (TYP. OF 2) SEE DRAWING D-1102 FOR DETAILS 8'-0"8'-0"2'0 4'1' SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" FOUNDATION PLAN NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV FOUNDATION PLAN D-1101 DPP RSB 1/2" = 1'-0" 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.05.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CORRELATE ALL DIMENSIONS BETWEEN THE PLANS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR INCONSISTENCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 2.EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE COMPLETED IN A SAFE, WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN CONFORMANCE WITH ALL OSHA SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. ENGINEERING PLANS FOR BENCHING OR SHORING OF SOILS, IF NECESSARY, ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FOUNDATION CONTRACTOR. 3.ROCK DEPTH HAS NOT BEEN IDENTIFIED. NO SOILS INVESTIGATION HAS BEEN PERFORMED. 4.CONTRACTOR TO TAKE CARE TO AVOID EXISTING FOUNDATIONS. 5.SEE 'NEW UNDERGROUND GETAWAYS' DRAWING 90-9901-12 FOR NUMBERS AND SIZE OF CONDUIT. INSTALL SUCH THAT FOUNDATION IS PENETRATED BY STRAIGHTS ONLY. 6.FOR EACH GROUNDING CONDUIT SUB-UP PROVIDE PVC CONDUIT FROM BELOW FOUNDATION TO 6" ABOVE TOC TO PROTECT GROUND TAILS DURING CONCRETE PLACEMENT. CUT PVC TO TOC AFTER BREAKER HAS BEEN INSTALLED. 7.EXISTING BREAKER FOUNDATIONS ARE DIFFERENT THAN INDICATED ON DESIGN DRAWINGS. EXISTING FOUNDATIONS CONSIST OF A COMBINED FOUNDATION FOR BOTH THE EXISTING BREAKERS AND THE ADJACENT EXISTING SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE BASEPLATES. 8.CONTRACTOR SHALL INVESTIGATE EXISTING BELOW-GRADE EXTENTS OF FOUNDATIONS PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, AND INFORM ENGINEER OF ANY CONFLICTS OR INTERFERENCES. A RECORD OF EXISTING FOUNDATION DESIGNS IS NOT AVAILABLE. REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-1102 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV BREAKER FOUNDATION DETAILS D-1103 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV SWITCHRACK FOUNDATION DETAILS 4'-6"5'-6"1'-8"6"1'-8"TOP OF ROCK 2' TYP.2" CLR TYP.2 3/8" CLR (TYP.)3" CLR3/4" BEVEL ALL AROUND (5) #5x4'-2" (TOP & BOTTOM) WITH BENDS COMPACTED SUBGRADE OR FILL @ 95% COMPACTION PER ASTM D-1557 CRUSHED ROCK OR CLEAN GRAVEL PASSING 1-1/2" SIEVE WITH LESS THAN 6% PASSING #200 SIEVE BREAKER FOUNDATION PLAN A A 2'-9"2'-3"8"3'-6 1/2"2'-7 1/2"8"9"9" 1" CONDUIT STUB-UP (TYP. OF 2) EXTEND 6" ABOVE TOC 4" CONDUIT (TYP. OF 2) SEE DETAIL SHEET D-1201 6"(6) #5x5'-2" (TOP & BOTTOM) WITH BENDS PROVIDE 10" MIN. OVERLAP (TYP.) SECTION A-A (2) REQ'D (4) Ø 3/4" HILTI HAS-V-36 HDG ANCHOR RODS 15" TOTAL LENGTH MINIMUM WITH HILTI HIT-RE-500 V3 EPOXY MORTAR REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN GENERAL NOTES: 1.FOR BREAKER INTERFACES SEE _____________ 2.FIELD VERIFY THE CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE WORK, INFORM EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IN DIMENSIONS, SIZE, LOCATION, OR CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 3.ENSURE THAT NO GRADING TRAPS WATER. 4.KEEP DISTURBED AREA AS SMALL AS POSSIBLE. SOILS PREPARATION NOTES: 1.EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE COMPLETED IN A SAFE, WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN CONFORMANCE WITH ALL OSHA SAFETY REQUIREMENTS, ENGINEERING PLANS FOR BENCHING OR SHORING OF SOILS, IF NECESSARY, ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FOUNDATION CONTRACTOR. FOUNDATION NOTES: 1.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CORRELATE ALL DIMENSIONS BETWEEN THE PLANS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR INCONSISTENCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 2.FOUNDATIONS WERE DESIGNED BASED UPON THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PARAMETERS: 2.a.SOIL BEARING CAPACITY= 1750 PSF 2.b.COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION= 0.25 3.FOUNDATION DESIGN FOR 1750 PSF (SEE NOTE 2) PER IBC TABLE 1806.2; OWNER/CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY BEARING CAPACITY WHEN LICENSED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 4.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL STANDARDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL OWNER SAFETY STANDARDS. 5.CONCRETE TESTING FOR QUALITY CONTROL IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER AND THE FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF TESTING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE OWNER. 6.CONCRETE PLACEMENT WHEN AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURES ARE EXPECTED BELOW 50`F SHALL MEET RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACI 306R-10 FOR COLD WEATHER AND WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ARE EXPECTED ABOVE 90`F SHALL MEET RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACI 305R-10 FOR HOT WEATHER CONCRETE PLACEMENT, CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PROPOSED PROCEDURES FOR COMPLYING WITH THESE DOCUMENTS TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 5 BUSINESS DAYS PRIOR TO CASTING CONCRETE DURING THESE CONDITIONS. 7.CONCRETE SHOULD NOT BE PLACED DURING RAIN, SLEET OR SNOW. RAIN WATER SHOULD NOT BE ALLOWED TO INCREASE MIXING WATER NOR TO DAMAGE SURFACE FINISH. 8.ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE MADE FROM TYPE ll CEMENT AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 4000 P.S.I. AT 28 DAY TEST WITH 4% - 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT. 9.THE MAXIMUM SIZE FOR COARSE AGGREGATES IN CONCRETE MIXES SHALL BE: 9.a.3/4" FOR SLABS ON GRADE, CONCRETE WALLS, AND DRILLED PIERS 9.b.1" FOR GRADE BEAMS AND FOOTINGS. 10.LAP REINFORCING BARS IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLASS B SPLICE PER A.C.I. 318,12.15 AT ALL SPLICES AND EACH SHALL HAVE MATCHING CORNER BARS AT ALL CORNERS. 11.ALL EXTERIOR OR EXPOSED CONCRETE SHALL BE CONSOLIDATED BY INTERNAL VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.C.I. 309, "RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CONSOLIDATION OF CONCRETE." 12.HONEYCOMBED, SPALLED OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED CONCRETE SHALL BE REPAIRED AND PATCHED. NOTIFY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF DEFECTS AND SUBMIT REMEDIAL PROCEDURES IN WRITING, FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 13.ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW BUILT, 60 KSI DEFORMED BARS (ASTM A-615). 14.ALL DETAILING, FABRICATION, PLACING AND SUPPORTING OF REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.C.I. 318 AND C.R.S.I. CURRENT EDITION. 15.ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE RIGIDLY SECURED IN POSITION PRIOR TO THE PLACING OF CONCRETE. 16.SLUMP SHALL BE LESS THAN 4" (UNLESS APPROVED ADMIXTURES ARE USED). MOVING CONCRETE WITH A VIBRATOR IS PROHIBITED. 17.THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR REINFORCEMENT: 17.a.CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH = 3" MINIMUM COVER. 17.b.CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH AND WEATHER = 2" MINIMUM COVER. 18.ALL REINFORCEMENT AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL BE FREE OF RUST, DIRT, OIL AND MILL SCALE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. 19.DEBRIS IN THE BOTTOM OF THE EXCAVATION SHALL BE REMOVED PRIOR TO STEEL PLACEMENT. WATER SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO INFILTRATE THE FOUNDATION EXCAVATION. 20.TO REDUCE THE POTENTIAL FOR GROUNDWATER SEEPAGE INTO THE EXCAVATION AND TO MINIMIZE DISTURBANCE TO THE BEARING AREA, STEEL AND CONCRETE SHALL BE PLACED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER EXCAVATION IS COMPLETED AND PROPERLY CLEANED. 21.THE BEARING SURFACE SHALL BE EVALUATED IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. 22.PRIOR TO PLACING ANY FILL MATERIAL, ALL EXISTING SURFACE VEGETATION, TREES, LOOSE FILL, DEBRIS, TOPSOIL AND SIMILAR UNSUITABLE MATERIALS SHOULD BE REMOVED. 23.IF GROUNDWATER IS ENCOUNTERED, IT SHALL BE CONTROLLED USING STANDARD DRAINAGE TECHNIQUES, SUCH AS DIVERSION DITCHES, OR BY INSTALLING SUBSURFACE DRAINS. 24.CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE FOR UNFORMED SURFACES SHALL BE CLASS B (1/4" INCH IN 10 FOOT) PER A.C.I. 309. 25.CHAMFER ANY EXPOSED EDGES 3/4" X 45 DEGREES. INSTALLNOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV BREAKER FOUNDATION DETAILS D-1102 DPP RSB 1/8" = 1'-0" 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION ON HOLD ON HOLD ON HOLD ON HOLD FOR BREAKER INFORMATION BARS RADIUS OF BEND EXTENSION STEEL REINFORCEMENT 180° HOOKED BARS #3 2-1/4"2-1/2" #4 3"2-1/2" #5 3-3/4"2-1/2" #6 4-1/2"3" #7 5-1/4"31/2" #8 6"4" RADIUS OF BEND EXTENSION 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" RADIUS OF BEND HOOKLENGTH10" 12" 14" 17" 19" MIN. DEPTH 90° HOOKED BARS MINIMUM EMBEDMENT FOR STANDARD BAR STANDARD CLR - INDICATES AMOUNT OF CLEAR COVER db - BAR DIAMETER fy - YIELD STRENGTH OF REINFORCEMENT f'c - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE STANDARD BAR LAP SPLICE BARS RADIUS OF BEND HOOK #3 2-1/4" #4 3" #5 3-3/4" #6 4-1/2" #7 5-1/4" #8 6" BARS DEPTH #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 BAR CLR </= db db < CLR fy=60,000 psi LENGTH f'c=4,000 psi #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 24" 18" 30" 24" 36" 30" 48" 42" 66" 48" 72" 54" ON HOLD FOR DESIGN REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-1101 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV FOUNDATION PLAN ‚ REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALLNOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV SWITCHRACK FOUNDATION DETAILS D-1103 DPP RSB - 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION GENERAL NOTES: 1.FOR SWITCHRACK INTERFACES SEE SEPARATE SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE DRAWINGS. 2.FIELD VERIFY THE CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE WORK, INFORM EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IN DIMENSIONS, SIZE, LOCATION, OR CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 3.ENSURE THAT NO GRADING TRAPS WATER. 4.KEEP DISTURBED AREA AS SMALL AS POSSIBLE. 5.ANCHOR BOLTS SHALL BE PLAIN BARS FABRICATED TO ASTM F-1554 GRADE 36 OR BETTER WITH HEAVY HEX NUTS CONFORMING TO ASTM A563 GRADE A. 6.INSTALL SQUARE FORM STARTING AT SUBGRADE AND ENDING AT T.O.C. TO MATCH EXISTING FOUNDATION STYLE. SOILS PREPARATION NOTES: 1.EXCAVATIONS SHALL BE COMPLETED IN A SAFE, WORKMANLIKE MANNER IN CONFORMANCE WITH ALL OSHA SAFETY REQUIREMENTS, ENGINEERING PLANS FOR BENCHING OR SHORING OF SOILS, IF NECESSARY, ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FOUNDATION CONTRACTOR. FOUNDATION NOTES: 1.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CORRELATE ALL DIMENSIONS BETWEEN THE PLANS BEFORE CONSTRUCTION AND NOTIFY THE ENGINEER OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR INCONSISTENCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK. 2.FOUNDATIONS WERE DESIGNED BASED UPON THE FOLLOWING DESIGN PARAMETERS: 2.a.SOIL BEARING CAPACITY= 1750 PSF 2.b.COEFFICIENT OF FRICTION= 0.25 3.FOUNDATION DESIGN FOR 1750 PSF (SEE NOTE 2) PER IBC TABLE 1806.2; OWNER/CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY BEARING CAPACITY WHEN LICENSED GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER. 4.THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL, STATE AND FEDERAL STANDARDS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL OWNER SAFETY STANDARDS. 5.CONCRETE TESTING FOR QUALITY CONTROL IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER AND THE FREQUENCY AND TYPES OF TESTING SHALL BE DETERMINED BY THE OWNER. 6.CONCRETE PLACEMENT WHEN AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURES ARE EXPECTED BELOW 50`F SHALL MEET RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACI 306R-10 FOR COLD WEATHER AND WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES ARE EXPECTED ABOVE 90`F SHALL MEET RECOMMENDATIONS OF ACI 305R-10 FOR HOT WEATHER CONCRETE PLACEMENT, CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT PROPOSED PROCEDURES FOR COMPLYING WITH THESE DOCUMENTS TO THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER 5 BUSINESS DAYS PRIOR TO CASTING CONCRETE DURING THESE CONDITIONS. 7.CONCRETE SHOULD NOT BE PLACED DURING RAIN, SLEET OR SNOW. RAIN WATER SHOULD NOT BE ALLOWED TO INCREASE MIXING WATER NOR TO DAMAGE SURFACE FINISH. 8.ALL CONCRETE SHALL BE MADE FROM TYPE ll CEMENT AND SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM ULTIMATE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 4000 P.S.I. AT 28 DAY TEST WITH 4% - 6% AIR ENTRAINMENT. 9.THE MAXIMUM SIZE FOR COARSE AGGREGATES IN CONCRETE MIXES SHALL BE: 9.a.3/4" FOR SLABS ON GRADE, CONCRETE WALLS, AND DRILLED PIERS 9.b.1" FOR GRADE BEAMS AND FOOTINGS. 10.LAP REINFORCING BARS IN ACCORDANCE WITH CLASS B SPLICE PER A.C.I. 318,12.15 AT ALL SPLICES AND EACH SHALL HAVE MATCHING CORNER BARS AT ALL CORNERS. 11.ALL EXTERIOR OR EXPOSED CONCRETE SHALL BE CONSOLIDATED BY INTERNAL VIBRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.C.I. 309, "RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CONSOLIDATION OF CONCRETE." 12.HONEYCOMBED, SPALLED OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED CONCRETE SHALL BE REPAIRED AND PATCHED. NOTIFY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF DEFECTS AND SUBMIT REMEDIAL PROCEDURES IN WRITING, FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO BEGINNING WORK. 13.ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW BUILT, 60 KSI DEFORMED BARS (ASTM A-615). 14.ALL DETAILING, FABRICATION, PLACING AND SUPPORTING OF REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH A.C.I. 318 AND C.R.S.I. CURRENT EDITION. 15.ALL REINFORCING SHALL BE RIGIDLY SECURED IN POSITION PRIOR TO THE PLACING OF CONCRETE. 16.SLUMP SHALL BE LESS THAN 4" (UNLESS APPROVED ADMIXTURES ARE USED). MOVING CONCRETE WITH A VIBRATOR IS PROHIBITED. 17.THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR REINFORCEMENT: 17.a.CONCRETE CAST AGAINST AND PERMANENTLY EXPOSED TO EARTH = 3" MINIMUM COVER. 17.b.CONCRETE EXPOSED TO EARTH AND WEATHER = 2" MINIMUM COVER. 18.ALL REINFORCEMENT AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC SHALL BE FREE OF RUST, DIRT, OIL AND MILL SCALE PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE. 19.DEBRIS IN THE BOTTOM OF THE EXCAVATION SHALL BE REMOVED PRIOR TO STEEL PLACEMENT. WATER SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED TO INFILTRATE THE FOUNDATION EXCAVATION. 20.TO REDUCE THE POTENTIAL FOR GROUNDWATER SEEPAGE INTO THE EXCAVATION AND TO MINIMIZE DISTURBANCE TO THE BEARING AREA, STEEL AND CONCRETE SHALL BE PLACED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE AFTER EXCAVATION IS COMPLETED AND PROPERLY CLEANED. 21.THE BEARING SURFACE SHALL BE EVALUATED IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE. 22.PRIOR TO PLACING ANY FILL MATERIAL, ALL EXISTING SURFACE VEGETATION, TREES, LOOSE FILL, DEBRIS, TOPSOIL AND SIMILAR UNSUITABLE MATERIALS SHOULD BE REMOVED. 23.IF GROUNDWATER IS ENCOUNTERED, IT SHALL BE CONTROLLED USING STANDARD DRAINAGE TECHNIQUES, SUCH AS DIVERSION DITCHES, OR BY INSTALLING SUBSURFACE DRAINS. 24.CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE FOR UNFORMED SURFACES SHALL BE CLASS B (1/4" INCH IN 10 FOOT) PER A.C.I. 309. 25.CHAMFER ANY EXPOSED EDGES 3/4" X 45 DEGREES. ON HOLD REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-1101 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV FOUNDATION PLAN G2 G1 DETAIL NOTE 1 G2 G1 DETAIL NOTES: 1.DURING FOUNDATION POUR LEAVE 1' EXCESS CONDUIT ABOVE T.O.C. TO PROTECT GROUND AND NEUTRAL CONNECTIONS. TRIM TO T.O.C. AFTER CURE AND BREAKER PLACEMENT. 2.EXTEND CONDUIT 3" BELOW BOTTOM OF FOUNDATION. 3.INSTALL GROUNDING PRIOR TO PAD INSTALLATION. PROTECT GROUNDING DURING PAD CONSTRUCTION. 4.INSTALL GROUNDING CONDUIT STUB UPS FOR FUTURE BREAKER ALSO PER D-1102. PROTECT GROUNDING TERMINATIONS; PROVIDE CAP (ITEM #C13) 1" CONDUIT STUB UPS ABOVE PAD TO PREVENT WATER INFILTRATION. G1 G2 TO GROUND GRID 2-HOLE LUG AS PART OF STRUCTURE END BELL YARD SURFACE MATERIAL EXISTING CABLE TRENCH SCH 40 PVC CONDUIT (SEE PLAN FOR SIZES) SCREENED BACKFILL 24" ELBOW DETAIL NOTES: 1.ALL STEEL STRUCTURES TO BE GROUNDED TO GROUND GRID WITH LUGS AT BOTTOM OF STRUCTURES. DETAIL NOTES: 1.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SUBGRADE CONDITIONS AT CABLE TRENCH TO GROUND GRID TO GROUND GRID 18" MIN.BREAKER GROUNDING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.1 STRUCTURE GROUNDING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.2 TYPICAL CONDUIT & CABLE TRENCH DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.3 24" MIN(2) 4" CONDUIT 3" 3" TYP.3" TYP.SCREENED BACKFILL TO BREAKER BREAKER FOUNDATION 24" MIN.BREAKER CONDUIT DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.4 SCREENED BACKFILL COMPACTED SUBGRADE OR FILL CRUSHED ROCK OR CLEAN GRAVEL TOC PVC CONDUIT BOTTOM OF BREAKER CABINET C8 C7 C6 C7 C9 C10 C8 BREAKER, CONDUIT DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.5 END BELL EXISTING CABLE TRENCH DETAIL NOTES: 1.INSTALL (1) C-CHANNEL FOR MOUNTING DC PANELBOARD. USE UNISTRUT TO ALIGN WITH PANELBOARD MOUNTING HOLES. SEE OEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR DETAILS. SECURE BASE WITH GENERAL PURPOSE CONCRETE. 2.MODIFY EXISTING TRENCH COVER PLATE FOR CONDUIT PENETRATION. ALLOW FOR TRENCH COVER TO BE REMOVED FOR MAINTENANCE. MINIMIZE HOLE AND/OR INSTALL GUARD TO PROTECT AGAINST ANIMAL ENTRY. 2.SECURE CONDUIT TO EXISTING CABLE TRENCH. 3.BOND PANELBOARD TO SUPPORTING STEEL AND NEAREST GROUND ELECTRODE WITH #2 AWG COPPER. (2) 4" CONDUIT 45°SWEEP DC PANELBOARD UNISTRUT C-CHANNEL C6X8.2 1'-6"1'-6"8" CONCRETE GENERAL PURPOSE DC PANELBOARD CONDUIT & GROUNDING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.6 EXOTHERMAL WELD CONNECTION DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S.7 REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JRR RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALLNOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV GROUNDING AND CONDUIT DETAILS D-1201 DPP RSB N.T.S. 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REFERENCE DRAWINGS 466507-4 BELOW GROUND GROUNDING PLAN REFERENCE DRAWINGS BM-0001 BILL OF MATERIAL A A B B C C D D E E C TRANSFER BUS JUMPER EXISTING BUS EXISTING SOUTH BUS STRUCTURE PLAN VIEW MAIN BUS 7 1/2"1'-3"1'-3"1'-3"2'-9"1'-3"1'-3"1'-3"NEW TIE BREAKER FUTURE DISTRIBUTION BREAKER A B C A B C 531 642 B A SECTION B-B 9"NEW TIE BREAKER 3'-4 5/8"4'-4 3/8"FUTURE DISTRIBUTION BREAKER 7'-6"T.O.S. M5 TYP. 3M6TYP. 6 1'-9"A B C 642 SECTION D-D 4'-4 1/2"6'-6"6'-6" MAIN BUSTRANSFER BUS FUTURE DISTRIBUTION BREAKER 9'-6"6'-6"T.O.S. 3'-9" T.O.C. M3 1'-0"12'-10"B2 M5 B4 B12 C3 B9 B13 B36 L1 B35 B6 M4 B35 B36 B6 x2 SECTION E-E NEW TIE BREAKER T.O.C. T.O.S. 4'-4 1/2"6'-6"6'-6" MAIN BUSTRANSFER BUS B14 B34 B15 B15 B34 B15 M2 B6 x2 SECTION C-C SLAB FOUNDATION (TYP.)FOOTING (TYP.) 8'-0"8'-0"9"1'-9"6'-0"7'-6"T.O.S. NEW TIE BREAKERFUTURE DISTRIBUTION BREAKER MAIN BUS M6 TYP. 6 B36 TYP.B15 B5 B11 TYP. 6" MIN. M4 B14 12'-10"8'-0"8'-0" SECTION A-A TRANSFER BUS 6'-6"EXISTING SWITCHRACK C.N. 7 TO EAST FENCE SEE 90-9901-12 B11 1'-6"TYP. B3 TYP. M3 TYP.B15 B5 B7 L1 1'-0"B14 TYP. C5 NOTE 1 10" TYP.6" MIN. B8TYP. TO SWITCH 3'-6"2'-0"6" B15 M1 B1 2 1/2" 1 1/2"1 3/4"4"Ø9/16 1/4" THK, ASTM A36 OR BETTER 2-HOLE GROUNDING TAB DETAIL (4 LOCATIONS) N.T.S. 3/16 DETAIL NOTES: 1.LOCATE (4) GROUNDING TABS ON CORNER COLUMNS; SEE 466507-4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 01.22.20 DPP JAB RSB 30% DETAIL DESIGN 0B 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL NOTES: 1.FEEDER BUS OFFSET FROM TANDEM TRANSFER SWITCH. LEGEND: T.O.S. = TOP OF STEEL T.O.C. = TOP OF CONCRETE C.N. 1 C.N. 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.CROSS BRACING IS LOCATED IN PLANE WITH TOP OF STEEL 2.PROVIDE SUPPORT STEEL MEMBER AT INSULATOR LOCATION, CONNECTING THE (3) D-D SECTIONS. 3.ONLY SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE MEMBER CENTERLINES ARE SHOWN HEREIN. SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE SHALL BE DESIGNED BY FABRICATOR. REFER ALSO TO D-2104 SWITCHRACK LOADING CRITERIA. 4.THE MINIMUM BEND RADIUS OF THE CONDUCTOR L1 IS 10" 5.CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY SWITCH MOUNTING DIMENSIONS AND CONNECTIONS WITH SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE PRIOR TO FABRICATION. 6.INSTALL CAP OVER CONDUIT. DO NOT AFFIX PERMANENTLY. 7.DRAWING FOR EXISTING SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE IS NOT AVAILABLE. 8.BREAKER DEPICTION TO BE UPDATED ON RECEIPT OF VENDOR PRINTS. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV SWITCHRACK ADDITION D-2101 DPP RSB 3/8" = 1'-0" 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION ON HOLD FOR SWITCH MOUNTING DIMENSION C.N. 5 C.N. 5 C.N. 6 REFERENCE DRAWINGS 446507-4 BELOW GROUND GROUNDING PLAN 90-9901-12 SUBSTATION EXPANSION: SUBSTATION DETAIL: NEW UNDERGROUND GETAWAYS D-1101 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV FOUNDATION PLAN D-1201 GROUND DETAILS D-2105 SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV STD. ELEC DETAILS BOLTED CONNECTIONS REFERENCE DOCUMENTS BM-0001 BILL OF MATERIAL C.N. 8 C.N. 8 C.N. 8 ABB FT-19 TS2 NP-1 NP-2 NP-3 NP-7 NP-8 NP-9 NP-10 NP-4 SEL-2032 SEL-2032 7'-6"2'-7 1/2" FUTURE FEEDER RELAY FUTURE FEEDER RELAY TEST SWITCHES SEL-9321 LOW VOLTAGE DC POWER SUPPLY MOUNTED ON BACK OF PANEL SEE DRAWING D-2103 SEL-2401 SATELLITE SYNCHRONIZED CLOCK MOUNTED ON BACK OF PANEL SEE DRAWING D-2103 CS SSS TS1 R4 R1 R2 R3 R7 R8 R16 R9 R10 3 1/4"2'-4 1/16"3 15/32"4 11/16"1 25/32"13/16"2"2 29/32"4 9/32"8 3/4"7"CUTOUT FOR CONTROL SWITCH LIGHTS (R9 & R10) SCALE: 1"=1" 18.31"3.00"17.63"3.60"SEL-2030-2 CUTOUT (R7) SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" Ø0.250 (TYP.) CUTOUT 18.47"2.75"17.50"3.00"FT-19 TEST SWITCH CUTOUT (R8) SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" CUTOUT Ø0.250 (TYP.)CUTOUT FOR RECLOSE & GROUND CUTOUT SWITCHES (R4) SCALE: 1" = 1" 0.43"0.06"Ø0.48" EQUIPMENT CUTOUT LOCATIONS (R2) SCALE: 1" = 1" 1.00"1.00"1.09"1.09"Ø0.221 (TYP. OF 3) Ø0.44 19.00"6.38"(4) Ø0.50" FILLER PLATE (R1) SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 18.38"7.00"(4) Ø0.50"8.75"FILLER PLATE (R16) SCALE: 6" = 1'-0"8.13"19.00" 18.38" NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2018 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA COMMUNICATIONS PROCCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION D-2102 DPP AS SHOWN 1 0 DRAWING CORRECTION 1 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 1A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 1 C.N. 2 C.N. 3 C.N. 4 1A CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.INSTALL TIE BREAKER RELAY, SEL-351A FOR TIE BREAKER CONTROL AT THE SAME HEIGHT AS THE PARAMOUNT RELAY (MOUNTED ON PANEL TO THE LEFT.) 2.INSTALL ABB FT-19 TEST SWITCH IMMEDIATELY BELOW TIE BREAKER RELAY. 3.INSTALL BLANK PLATES OVER REMOVED ITEMS. 4.INSTALL CONTROL SWITCH, BREAKER INDICATION, RECLOSE CUTOUT, AND GROUND CIRCUIT CUTOUT REQUIRED FOR TIE BREAKER CONTROL. MOUNT ABOVE RELAY. USE EXISTING BUS TIE LAYOUT AS GUIDE FOR CUTOUT POSITION. 5.ON HOLD FOR CLARIFICATION: CITY OF AZUSA TO CONFIRM METER AND TEST SWITCH MOUNTING LOCATION IS ACCEPTABLE. DEVICE NO. DEVICE SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION R8 R7 R4 R3 R2 R1 BUS TIE OVERCURRENT AND RECLOSING RELAY SEL-351A 1A BLANK PANEL, 19",4RU BUS TIE 12KV PCB BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH BUS TIE 12KV CUTOUT SWITCH SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW BUS TIE 12KV SETTING GROUP SELECTOR SWITCH FT-19 ASSEMBLY, EXTENDED TEST SWITCH P P P C-C C-C C-C P QTYNAME PLATE # NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING LIST SECOND LINEFIRST LINE THIRD LINE PLT. SIZE LTR. SIZE ALL NAMEPLATES ARE .062 BLACK MATERIAL & INSTALLED WITH ADHESIVE TAPE NP-9 NP-8 NP-7 NP-4 NP-3 NP-2 NP-1 1.0 x 3.0 .1871 1 1 1 1 1 1 BUS TIE 12KV BUS TIE 12KV GROUND CUTOUT RECLOSE CUTOUT AUTO SOLID AUTO SOLID 1.0 x 3.0 .187 1.0 x 3.0 .187 1.0 x 3.0 .187 1.0 x 3.0 .187BUS TIE 12KV SETTING GROUP SELECTOR SWITCH 1.0 x 3.0 .187 1.0 x 3.0 .187 BUS TIE 12KV PCB NP-10 1 (BLANK)1.0 x 3.0 .187 BUS TIE RELAY OVERCURRENT &RECLOSING RELAY TEST SWITCH TS-1 TEST SWITCH TS-2 CONTROL SWITCH MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER ELECTROSWITCH ABB SEL 74202LH 24201B FR2H014001000NX08 0351A0H2X3E52X1 ELECTROSWITCH TE CONNECTIVITY 2-1520228-3 CHATSWORTH 30026-104 1A 0 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1'2'6"3"1/2" R9 R10 R16 LIGHT, INDICATING, LED, 48VDC, GREEN LAMP, GREEN LENS LIGHT, INDICATING, LED, 48VDC, RED LAMP, RED LENS BLANK PANEL, 19",5RU GE GE 116B6708G42G52G4 116B6708G42G52G4 CHATSWORTH 30026-105 SEL-2032 SEL-2032 HMI KEYBOARD 7'-6"2'-7 1/2"1'-0 1/2"1'-3 3/4"2 1/2"NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2018 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA COMMUNICATIONS PROCCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION D-2102R DPP 1-1/2"=1'-0" 0 0 DRAWING CORRECTION 0R REMOVE HMI AND KEYBOARD REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0R1 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN REMOVAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.REMOVE HMI AND ASSOCIATED KEYBOARD. REMOVE ASSOCIATED WIRING (NOT PICTURED) FROM HMI TO TERMINAL BLOCK. 0 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 1'2'6"3"1/2" C.N. 1 0R1 C.N. 1 0R1 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR BACK PANEL ELEVATION D-2103R DPP NTS 0 0 REMOVE HMI AND KEYBOARD REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0R1 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN REMOVAL C.N. 1 C.N. 2 0R1 0R1 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.REMOVE HMI AND ASSOCIATED KEYBOARD. REMOVE ASSOCIATED WIRING FROM HMI TO TERMINAL BLOCK. 2.RELOCATE COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (SEL-2401 AND SEL-9321) MOUNTED ON BACK OF RELAY PANEL TO BELOW SEL-2030-2 (SEE DWG. D-2102 INSTALL.) REPLACE WIRING AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW POSITION. A A B B C C INSULATOR LOADS: Pi (TYP.) CONDUCTOR LOADS: Pcd, Pcew (TYP.) PLAN VIEW TRANSFER BUS JUMPER EXISTING BUS EXISTING SOUTH BUS STRUCTURE MAIN BUS 7 1/2"1'-3"1'-3"1'-3"2'-9"1'-3"1'-3"1'-3"C A B C A B Pds Pds Pds Ptts Ptts Ptts SECTION A-A DISCONNECT SWITCH TANDEM TRANSFER SWITCH 9"3'-4 5/8"4'-4 3/8"7'-6"T.O.S.1'-9"TANDEM TRANSFER SWITCH 3'-9" Pi Pi SECTION C-C STEEL LAYOUT TYP. FOR (3) LOCATIONS DISCONNECT SWITCH SURGE ARRESTOR 9'-6"6'-6"T.O.S. T.O.C. 4'-4 1/2"6'-6"6'-6" MAIN BUSTRANSFER BUS 12'-10"FEEDER CONDUIT Pds SECTION B-B 2'-6"2'-6"1'-8"1'-4"1'-8"2'-6"2'-6"1'-4" 8'-0"8'-0"9"1'-6"6'-3"7'-6"T.O.S. MAIN BUS PdsPdsPdsPdsPds FOOTING (TYP.) NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV SWITCHRACK LOADING CRITERIA D-2104 DPP RSB 3/8" = 1'-0" 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 01.22.20 DPP JAB RSB 30% DETAIL DESIGN 0B 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL ON HOLD DEPENDENT ON SWITCH MOUNTING DIMENSION ON HOLD DEPENDENT ON SWITCH MOUNTING DIMENSION LOADING NOTES: 1.LOADS PER ASCE7-16. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LOADS PER IEEE 693, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE SUBSTATION STRUCTURE DESIGN GUIDE ASCE 113. 2.FOR DESIGN, CONSIDER THE FOLLOWING LOADS: a.DEAD LOAD DEAD WEIGHT OF STRUCTURE, EQUIPMENT, AND COMPONENTS AS DETERMINED BY DESIGN. ADD 15% MINIMUM TO ACCOUNT FOR CONNECTIONS, FASTENERS, ETC. DEAD WEIGHTS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING. b.WIND LOAD BASIC WIND SPEED = 105 MI/HR EXPOSURE CATEGORY = C, TOPOGRAPHIC FACTOR Kzt = 1.0 c.SEISMIC LOAD SITE CLASS = D, Ss = 1.692 s, S1 = 0.643 s, Fa = 1.0, Fv = 1.7 SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORY = D SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM = STEEL ORDINARY CONCENTRICALLY BRACED FRAME d.SNOW LOADS NOT APPLICABLE e.EQUIPMENT LOADS EQUIPMENT WEIGHTS AND LOADS ARE ASSIGNED ON THIS DRAWING, SPECIFIC TO THE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. f.SHORT CIRCUIT LOAD SHORT CIRCUIT FORCE Fsc = 3 LB/FT FOR BOTH THE MAIN AND TRANSFER BUS PIPE. 3.A SOILS INVESTIGATION HAS NOT BEEN PROVIDED FOR THE DESIGN OF THE SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE. FOR SEISMIC CONSIDERATIONS, APPLY SITE CLASS D PER ASCE7-16 SECTION 11.4.3. 4.REPORTED LOADS ARE UNFACTORED. STRUCTURE EVALUATION SHALL BE PERFORMED BASED ON LRFD LOAD AND LOAD COMBINATIONS (STRENGTH DESIGN), PER ASCE 7-16. SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE DESIGN NOTES: 1.THE DESIGN OF THE SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE SHALL INCORPORATE THE SWITCHRACK STEEL SPECIFICATION. 2.SWITCHRACK DESIGN SHALL CONSIDER THE APPLICABLE WORST-CASE LOADING FOR DESIGN OF MEMBERS, CONNECTIONS, AND BASEPLATES. 3.CONSTRUCTION CONCEPTS FOR THE ADJACENT, EXISTING SOUTH SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE SHALL BE CONSIDERED AND INCORPORATED INTO THE SWITCHRACK ADDITION FOR UNIFORMITY WITH THE EXISTING CITY OF AZUSA SOUTH SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE. 4.PROVIDE CONDUIT SUPPORT FOR FEEDER CONDUIT. LOAD ASSIGNMENTS: CONDUCTOR LOADS: WEIGHT, Pcd = 10 LBS/FT (VERTICAL) EXTREME WIND, Pcew = 12 LBS/FT (HORIZONTAL, NORMAL TO BUS PIPE) INSULATOR WEIGHT, Pi = 20 LBS DISCONNECT SWITCH WEIGHT, Pds = 200 LBS TANDEM TRANSFER SWITCH WEIGHT, Ptts = 200 LBS NOTES: 1.MEMBERS ARE SHOWN AS CENTERLINES ONLY, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. IN CERTAIN INSTANCES, MEMBERS ARE DIMENSIONED TO TOP OF STEEL. 2.THIS SHEET IS TO BE USED FOR LOADING INFORMATION ONLY. REFER TO D-2101 FOR SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE LAYOUT AND GEOMETRY. LEGEND: T.O.S. = TOP OF STEEL T.O.C. = TOP OF CONCRETE B8 ALUMINUM BUS AT BASE: 4-1/2"-13 X 1 1/4" GALVANIZED CAP SCREW 4-FLAT WASHER FOR 1/2" SCREW 4-LOCK WASHER FOR 1/2" SCREW FOR 3" BOLT CIRCLE AT BUS SUPPORT: 4-1/2"-13 X 1 1/4" GALVANIZED CAP SCREW 4-FLAT WASHER FOR 1/2" SCREW 4-LOCK WASHER FOR 1/2" SCREW FOR 3" BOLT CIRCLE B9 FOR B1 - 4" NPS FOR B2 - 2" NPS MOUNTING HARDWARE SUPPLIED BY BUS SUPPORT MANUFACTURER B3 STEEL POST INSULATOR TO STEEL2 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR BOLTED CONNECTIONS (CURRENT CARRYING) ALUMINUM TO ALUMINUM: 1.VIGOROUSLY CLEAN ALL CONTACT SURFACES OF THE CONNECTOR AND CONDUCTOR WITH A STIFF STAINLESS BRUSH TO REMOVE OXIDES. A TYPICALLY BRIGHT ALUMINUM SURFACE SHOULD BE OBTAINED. 2.IMMEDIATELY COAT THESE CONTACT AREAS WITH A LIBERAL AMOUNT OF CONTACT SEALANT AND ABRADE CONTACT SURFACES THROUGH THE COMPOUND. 3.INSTALL FITTING WITH BOLTS FINGER TIGHT. IF A GENEROUS BEAD OF COMPOUND DOES NOT APPEAR, REMOVE THE CONDUCTOR AND ADD MORE SEALANT. 4.ALTERNATELY AND EVENLY TIGHTEN BOLTS WITH A TORQUE WRENCH TO THE VALUES RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. 5.EXCESS SEALANT SQUEEZED OUT OF JOINT CAN BE LEFT AS IS OR CAN BE LIGHTLY SMOOTHED ALONG CONTACT LINE. AL. TERM AL. PAD 316 STAINLESS STEEL BOLT 316 STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER 316 STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER 316 STAINLESS STEEL SPRING LOCK WASHER 316 STAINLESS STEEL NUT ALUMINUM TO ALUMINUM1 TYPICAL BOLTED CONNECTION DETAIL NOTES: 1.MAINTAIN MINIMUM BEND RADIUS OF 10" FOR CONDUCTORS. 1'-3"1'-7"NOTE 1 SWITCH TAB B1 B14 L1 B6 M4 TIE BREAKER SWITCH3 DETAIL, CLOSE PHASE BUS TO MAIN BUS 10 21/ 3 2 "1'-4 27/32"B1 B14 2'-9"1'-7"B34 L1 NOTE 1 SWITCH TAB DETAIL NOTES: 1.MAINTAIN MINIMUM BEND RADIUS OF 10" FOR CONDUCTORS. TIE BREAKER SWITCH4 DETAIL, CLOSE PHASE BUS TO MAIN BUS DETAIL, 3000A FLEXIBLE JUMPER5 B15L1B15 REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JRR RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALLNOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV STD. ELEC. DETAILS BOLTED CONNECTIONS D-2105 DPP RSB N.T.S. 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION ON HOLD FOR HARDWARE CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.SWITCH DEPICTIONS ON HOLD FOR VENDOR PRINTS. CLEARANCE TO BE RE-CHECKED. REFERENCE DRAWINGS D-2101 SOUTH BUS TIE 12kV SWITCHRACK ADDITION REFERENCE DOCUMENTS BM-0001 BILL OF MATERIAL C.N. 1 ℄ ℄ ℄ ℄ R5 R6 2 27/32"2 27/32" 2 11/16"2 11/16"1 5/32"1 5/32"℄ Ø4" (4)Ø13/ 6 4 " 3 3/8"3 3/8"NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA METER PANEL PANEL ELEVATION D-2106 JRR AS SHOWN 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION INSTALL REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 JRR JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.INSTALL NEW METERING EQUIPMENT, CENTER IN LINE WITH EXISTING EQUIPMENT. METER PANEL NEW TEST SWITCH CUTOUT (R6) C.N. 1 C.N. 1 1"0 SCALE: 1" = 1" 1/2"4"0 1'6" SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" DEVICE NO. DEVICE SCHEDULE DESCRIPTION R6 R5 0A BUS TIE 12KV METER BUS TIE 12KV METER, FT-1 TEST SWITCH QTYNAME PLATE # NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING LIST SECOND LINEFIRST LINE ALL NAMEPLATES ARE .062 BLACK MATERIAL & INSTALLED WITH ADHESIVE TAPE NP-6 NP-5 1 1 BUS TIE 12KV TEST SWITCH TS-M METER NEW BUS TIE METER CUTOUT (R5) A B C MAIN BUS 12KV 3-1ɸ PT'S 7200-120V 60:1 400VA ACC: ON HOLD SAFETY DISCONNECT FUSED PARAMOUNT RELAY PANEL TB11 EXISTING NEW TO SOUTH BUS TIE RELAY IN COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL DWG. D-4001 TO OTHER PROTECTION AND METERING CIRCUITS 1 2 3 4 SBT-PT-1 4/C#12B1B2B3 B0NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER DIAGRAM D-3101 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 1 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.FIELD TO LOCATE NEAREST SOUTH BUS PT SIGNAL AND I.D. CONNECTION POINT, RELAY PANEL, AND TERMINAL BLOCK. 2.CITY OF AZUSA TO REVIEW EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND CONFIRM INFORMATION IS CORRECT. N G 150A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 120/240VAC FROM CONTROL HOUSE SBT-AC-1 4/C#10 TO SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 N G L1 L2 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANEL BOARD D-3201 DPP NTS 1 0 DRAWING CORRECTION 1 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 1A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 3 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD IS EXISTING AND IN-SERVICE. 2.CITY OF AZUSA TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT DESIGNATION, CABLE DESIGNATION, INTERRUPTING CAPACITY, AND CIRCUIT SIZES FOR EXISTING CIRCUITS. 3.INSTALL NEW CIRCUIT TO SUPPLY POWER TO NEW SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER 84. C.N. 1 & 2 1A 48VDC FROM CONTROL HOUSE SBT-DC-1 2/C#6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE TO SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER SEE D-5501 C.N. 5 40A 10KAIC 225A, 10KAIC MAIN BREAKER 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC 40A 10KAIC Cxxx TO AMFORGE FEEDER BREAKER Cxxx TO AZUSA FEEDER BREAKER Cxxx TO CERRITOS FEEDER BREAKER Cxxx TO PARAMOUNT FEEDER BREAKER Cxxx TO IRWINDALE FEEDER BREAKER 2/C#4 2/C#4 2/C#42/C#4 2/C#4 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD D-3301 DPP NTS 1 1 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 1A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.INSTALL NEW OUTDOOR DC PANELBOARD. 2.CONNECT EXISTING DC CIRCUITS. EXISTING CABLES AND WIRES TO BE RE-USED. FIELD TO NOTE WIRE SIZE AND CABLE DESIGNATION. 3.IN THE EVENT AN EXISTING BREAKER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DOES NOT REACH NEW DC PANEL LOCATION, CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL NEW DC CABLE TO THAT BREAKER. 4.IN THE EVENT THE FEEDER SUPPLY DOES NOT REACH NEW DC PANELBOARD, CONTRACTOR TO USE UNDERGROUND SPLICE TO SUPPLY SUFFICIENT LENGTH. 5.INSTALL NEW DC CABLE TO NEW SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER FROM POSITION 1, 3. 6.ON HOLD: OCPD AND CIRCUIT SIZE FOR NEW TIE BREAKER TO BE REVIEWED ON RECEIPT OF VENDOR DRAWINGS. 7.ON HOLD FOR CLARIFICATION: CITY OF AZUSA TO IDENTIFY DC CIRCUIT WIRE SIZES. DC CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO BE RESIZED BASED ON CIRCUIT SIZE. C.N. 2,4 C.N. 7 TYP. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK DC PANELBOARD D-3301R DPP NTS 1 0 REMOVE PANELBOARD AND BOX REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0R1 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN REMOVAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.EXISTING DC PANELBOARD TO BE REPLACED. REMOVE DC PANELBOARD AFTER ALL CIRCUITS HAVE BEEN MOVED TO NEW DC PANELBOARD. 2.NEW DC CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO BE SUPPLIED TO MATCH EXISTING CIRCUIT BREAKER AND CAPACITY. REUSE EXISTING WIRING IN NEW DC PANELBOARD. 3.IN THE EVENT AN EXISTING BREAKER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DOES NOT REACH NEW DC PANEL LOCATION, CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL NEW DC CABLE TO THAT BREAKER. 4.IN THE EVENT THE FEEDER SUPPLY DOES NOT REACH NEW DC PANELBOARD, CONTRACTOR TO USE UNDERGROUND SPLICE TO SUPPLY SUFFICIENT LENGTH. 5.EXISTING DC PANELBOARD SHOWN IN THE PICTURE IS FACING NORTH. C.N. 2 C.N. 1 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA LIGHT & WATER DEPARTMENT AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 1 D-4001 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 01.22.20 DPP JAB LLQ 30% DETAIL DESIGN 0B 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B 0B NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA LIGHT & WATER DEPARTMENT AZUSA, CA SOUTH BUS TIE 12KV AC & DC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM SHT. 2 D-4002 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL PORT 5A SEL-351A SOUTH-BUS TIE LOCATED ON COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR PANEL TO SEL-2030's SCADA COMPUTER CABINET LOCATED ON SOUTH WALL NEW EXISTING SCADA DEDICATED NETWORK SWITCH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SBT-COMM-1 CAT-5E NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA NETWORKING DIAGRAM D-4901 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 3 C.N. 1 C.N. 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.INSTALL SEL-351A SOUTH BUS TIE RELAY. 2.CONNECT TO EXISTING SCADA DEDICATED ETHERNET SWITCH WITH CAT 5 ETHERNET CABLE. ROUTE CABLE THROUGH OVERHEAD CABLE TRAY. 3.CITY OF AZUSA TO DETERMINE EXISTING CONNECTIONS. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA WIRING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER D-5001 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 01.24.20 DPP LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA WIRING DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER D-5002 JRR NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 JRR JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 1 & 4 SEL-2030-1 SEL-2030-2 IN15IN14IN13 C.N. 1 NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA WIRING DIAGRAM COMMUNICATION PROCESSOR (SEL-2030-2)D-5003 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL TB10 SB R(+) R(-) C2 C1 C8 C9 C3 C2M B1 B2 B3 B0 2A 2B 2C 2D SB DWG. D-5004 SBT-CTRL-1 12/C#10 DWG. D-5003 SBT-CT-1 4/C#10 DWG. D-5003 SBT-CT-2 4/C#10 DWG. D-3201 SBT-AC-1 4/C#10 AC DWG. D-3301 SBT-DC-1 2/C#6 DC NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K ©2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER D-5501 DPP NTS 0 0 SOUTH BUS TIE BREAKER ADDITION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN INSTALL C.N. 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1.INSTALL CABLES ON BREAKER TERMINAL BLOCKS AS SHOWN. 2.BREAKER TERMINAL INFORMATION ON HOLD. EPS E&D, TAKES EXCEPTION TO THE CERTIFICATION OF THE EXISTING ACCURACY OF THE DRAWINGS OR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 7A 01.22.20 DPP JAB LLQ 30% DETAIL DESIGN 7B 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 © EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. 2020 INSTALL NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION DSG19083 ‐ CITY OF AZUSA ‐ BREAKER ADDITIONBILL OF MATERIALItem NumberMaterial Description Qty Needed Qty in Stock Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Source Intended Use/RemarksM1STRUCTURE, STEEL, 2‐BAY DISTRIBUTION RACK 1‐‐TBD‐‐ ‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0001M2BREAKER, 15KV, 3000A, OUTDOOR, VACUUM 1‐‐SIEMENSSVD7‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0002M3SURGE ARRESTER, 7.65KV MCOV, SUBSTATION CLASS 3‐‐HPSEVP000800‐3001‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0003M4 SWITCH, HOOKSTICK, SINGLE POLE, 15KV, 1200A3‐‐TBD‐‐ ‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0003M5SWITCH, TANDEM TRANSFER, HOOKSTICK, SINGLE POLE, 15KV, 1200A 3‐‐TBD‐‐ ‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0003M6SWITCH, HOOKSTICK, SINGLE POLE, 15KV, 3000A6‐‐TBD‐‐ ‐‐CITY OF AZUSASPECIFICATION DOC# TS‐0003A1 PANELBOARD, 48VDC, 225A MAIN BREAKER, BOTTOM FEED, 10KAIC, NEMA 3R 1‐‐SQUARE D TYPE NQ‐‐CONTRACTORWITH ALL REQUIRED PARTS PER OEMA2 BREAKER FOR 48VDC PANELBOARD, 2‐POLE, 40A, 10KAIC 12‐‐SQUARE D QOB240‐‐CONTRACTORNOTE 4A3 UNISTRUT, 1‐5/8" X 1‐5/8", SLOTTED HOLE, HOT DIP GALVANIZED AS REQ'D‐‐UNISTRUT P1000T HG‐‐CONTRACTORFOR DC PANELBOARD MOUNTINGA4 STEEL, C‐CHANNEL, C6X8.2, HOT DIP GALVANIZED AS REQ'D‐‐NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORFOR DC PANELBOARD MOUNTINGA5 CONCRETE, GENERAL PURPOSEAS REQ'D‐‐NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORFOR DC PANELBOARD MOUNTINGB1 SEAMLESS TUBING BUS,ALUMINUM, 4" NPS, SCHEDULE 80 (6063‐T6) 120 FT‐‐NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORB2 SEAMLESS TUBING BUS,ALUMINUM, 2" NPS, SCHEDULE 40 (6063‐T6) 30 FT NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORB3 INSULATOR, 15KV, STANDARD STRENGTH 24‐‐LAPP315205‐70‐‐CONTRACTORB4 TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, FOR 2" NPS TO 4‐HOLE PAD 6 SEFCORWTF‐3960‐4A‐‐CONTRACTORB5 TERMINAL, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 4" NPS TUBE TO FLAT 4‐HOLE PAD 6 SEFCORWFTC‐64‐4A‐‐CONTRACTORB6 TERMINAL, ALUMINUM, BOLTED CABLE TO FLAT, AAC CONDUCTOR TO 4‐HOLE PAD 14 SEFCORAFNC‐3653‐4B‐‐CONTRACTORB7 TERMINAL, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 2‐1/2" NPS TUBE TO FLAT 4‐HOLE PAD 6 SEFCORWFTC‐60‐4A‐‐CONTRACTOR EXISTING. CONFIRM WITH UTILITY PRIOR TO PURCHASEB8 BUS SUPPORT, ALUMINUM, HORIZONTAL BOLTED, 4" NPS TUBE TO INSULATOR 18 SEFCORASTI‐64‐3‐‐CONTRACTORB9 BUS SUPPORT, ALUMINUM, HORIZONTAL BOLTED, 2" NPS TUBE TO INSULATOR 6 SEFCORASTI‐58‐3‐‐CONTRACTORB10 TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, FOR 4" NPS TO 4‐HOLE PAD 0 SEFCORWTF‐6269‐4A‐‐CONTRACTORB11 END PLUG, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 4" NPS 6 SEFCORWEB‐64H‐‐CONTRACTORB12 TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, FOR 2" NPS TO 2‐HOLE PAD 3 SEFCORWTF‐3960‐2B‐‐CONTRACTORB13 END PLUG, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 2" NPS 6 SEFCORWEB‐58‐‐CONTRACTORB14 TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM, TUBING MAIN TO TWO CABLE TAP 6 HUBBELLATT2C4016‐‐CONTRACTORB15 TERMINAL, ALUMINUM, BOLTED 2 CABLES TO FLAT, AAC CONDUCTOR TO 4‐HOLE PAD 18 HUBBELLA2F18D‐‐CONTRACTORB30 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BOLT90 L.H. DOTTIEMBS5162‐‐CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM BOLT LENGTH PRIOR TO PROCUREMENTB31 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL FLAT WASHER 90 L.H. DOTTIEFWS12‐‐CONTRACTORB32 1/2" STAINLESS STEEL BELLEVILLE WASHER 90 FASTENALL125782‐‐CONTRACTORB33 1/2" HEX NUT90 L.H. DOTTIEHNS12‐‐CONTRACTORB34 TERMINAL, ALUMINUM, BOLTED 2 CABLES TO FLAT, AAC CONDUCTOR TO 4‐HOLE PAD, ‐90 5 HUBBELLA2F18D‐90‐‐CONTRACTORB35 TERMINAL, CABLE TO FLAT, ‐905 SEFCORAFNC‐3653‐4B‐90‐‐CONTRACTORB36 TEE TUBE TO CABLE6 SEFCORATTC4016‐‐CONTRACTORC1 4" CONDUIT, SCH. 80 PVC  RIGID, 4" TRADE SIZE, 10' LENGTHS 60 FTCANTEX A53EA12‐‐CONTRACTORC2 CONDUIT ELBOW, PVC SCH 80, 24" SWEEP,  4" DIA, BELLED END 12 CANTEX 5221022‐‐CONTRACTORC3 6" CONDUIT, SCH. 80 PVC  RIGID, 4" TRADE SIZE, 10' LENGTHS 70 FTCANTEX A53GA12‐‐CONTRACTORC4 CONDUIT ELBOW, PVC SCH 80, 36" SWEEP,  6" DIA, BELLED END 4 CANTEX5121045‐‐CONTRACTORC5 GALVANIZED U‐BOLT, 6" PIPE2 GRAINGER20W515‐‐CONTRACTORC6 4" LIQUATITE FLEXIBLE CONDUIT ‐ TYPE UL ‐ STEEL W/ JACKETING 10 FT T&BLA400‐‐CONTRACTORC7 4" STRAIGHT LT FITTING WITH LOCKNUT 4 T&B5340AL‐‐CONTRACTORC8 4" MALE TERMINAL ADAPTER4 T&BE943N‐‐CONTRACTORC9 4" INSULATED BUSHING2 NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORC10 4" SEALING LOCKNUT2 NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORC11 1" CONDUIT, SCH. 80 PVC  RIGID, 1" TRADE SIZE, 10' LENGTHS 20 FTCANTEX A53BA12‐‐CONTRACTORC12 CONDUIT ELBOW, PVC SCH 80, 18" SWEEP,  1" DIA, BELLED END 2 CANTEX 5221846‐‐CONTRACTORC13 CONDUIT END CAP, PVC, 1" DIA2 CANTEX 5140033‐‐CONTRACTOR FOR GROUNDING STUB UP CAPS AT FUTURE XFMR PADG1 CONDUCTOR, 4/0 COPPERWELD, BARE, STRANDED 200 FT NOTE 1‐‐ ‐‐CONTRACTORG2 TERMINAL, BRONZE, 4/0 COPPERWELD TO 2‐HOLE PAD 6 HUBBELLSWL050B2‐‐CONTRACTOR HOLD FOR BREAKER GROUNDING INFORMATIONG3 MOLD, EXOTHERMIC WELD, LAP, 4/0 RUN TO 4/0 TAP 1 ERICOTAC2Q2Q‐‐CONTRACTORG4 WELD METAL, EXOTHERMIC WELD, 250 SHOT 10 ERICO250PLUSF20‐‐CONTRACTORG5 CONDUCTOR, #2 AWG, BARE, STRANDED 25 FT NOTE 1‐‐‐‐CONTRACTORG6 CONNECTOR, BOLTED, BRONZE, #2 AWG CU TO FLAT 2 HUBBELLTLS32‐‐CONTRACTOR DC PANELBOARD BONDG7 CONNECTOR, CRIMP, PARALLEL TAP, 4/0 AWG CU RUN TO #2 AWG CU TAP 1 BURNDYYGHC29C26L1 CONDUCTOR, 2000 KCMIL, COWSLIP, AAC, 91 STRAND 240 FT SOUTHWIRECOWSLIP‐‐CONTRACTORR1BLANK PANEL, 19" 4RU1 CHATSWORTH30026‐104‐‐CONTRACTORR2BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH1 ELECTROSWITCH74202LH‐‐CONTRACTORR3 CUTOUT SWITCH, SINGLE POLE, DOUBLE THROW 2 TE CONNECTIVITY2‐1520228‐3‐‐CONTRACTORR4SETTING GROUP SELECTOR SWITCH, WITH ENGRAVED ESCUTCHEON1ELECTROSWITCH24201B w/ 010D‐2T26BD‐‐CONTRACTORR5BUS TIE 12KV METER1 SATECPM172E‐‐CONTRACTORR6 METER TEST SWITCH, FT‐1, P P P C‐C C‐C C‐C P1ABB 129A514G01‐‐CONTRACTORR7 OVERCURRENT & CLOSING RELAY SEL‐351A 1 SEL 0351A0H2X3E52X1‐‐CONTRACTORBM‐00011 of 3Revision No. 0B DSG19083 ‐ CITY OF AZUSA ‐ BREAKER ADDITIONBILL OF MATERIALItem NumberMaterial Description Qty Needed Qty in Stock Manufacturer Model Number Serial Number Source Intended Use/RemarksR8 FT‐19 ASSEMBLY, EXTENDED TEST SWITCH 1 ABB FR2H014001000NX08‐‐CONTRACTORR9 LIGHT, INDICATING, LED, 48VDC, GREEN LAMP, GREEN LENS 1 GE116B6708G42G52G4‐‐CONTRACTORR10 LIGHT, INDICATING, LED, 48VDC, RED LAMP, RED LENS 1 GE116B6708G42R52R4‐‐CONTRACTORR11 TERMINAL 4‐POLE SHORTING BLOCK, 30A, 600V 2 MARATHON1504 SC‐‐CONTRACTOR NOTE 2R12 TERMINAL 12‐POLE SHORTING BLOCK, 30A, 600VMARATHON1512STD‐‐CONTRACTORR13 FUSE BLOCK, 2‐POLE, 30A, 600V1 MARATHONF30A2S‐‐CONTRACTORR14 FUSE, CLASS NON, 5A5 BUSSMANNON‐5‐‐CONTRACTOR FOR USE WITH R13R15 FUSE BLOCK, 3‐POLE, 30A, 600V5 MARATHONF30A3S‐‐CONTRACTORR16 BLANK PANEL, 19" 5RU1 CHATSWORTH30026‐105W1 CABLE, 4/C310 CU 600V XLPE XHHW‐2 400' SOUTHWIRE 890686 ‐ SPEC 45053‐‐CONTRACTORNOTE 3W2 CABLE, 12/C#10 CU 600V XLPE XHHW‐2 200' SOUTHWIRE890688 ‐ SPEC 45053‐‐CONTRACTORNOTE 3W3 ETHERNET CABLE, 24/4RP, CAT5E25' SOUTHWIRE96263 ‐ SPEC 70470 96263‐‐CONTRACTORNOTE 3W4 CABLE ‐ 3/C#10 w/GND CU 600V EPR XHHW‐2 100' SOUTHWIRE SPEC 45107‐‐CONTRACTORNOTE 31234LENGTH ESTIMATE BASED ON PLAN VIEW. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY LENGTH BASED ON INSTALLED RACEWAY ROUTING.ALTERNATIVES ACCEPTABLE WITH ENGINEERING APPROVAL (EXCEPT SEL RELAYS AND ELECTROSWITCH SWITCHES). PROVIDE CUTSHEET TO OWNER'S ENGINEER FOR REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE.COMMON ITEM; NO MANUFACTURER SPECIFIEDNOTESON HOLD FOR CLARIFICATION: DC BREAKERS TO BE SIZED BASED ON EXISTING WIRE SIZE. CITY OF AZUSA TO DETERMINE WIRE SIZE.BM‐00012 of 3Revision No. 0B DSG19083 ‐ CITY OF AZUSA ‐ BREAKER ADDITIONBILL OF MATERIALPrepared By:Initials1/16/2020 RSB 0A 30% ISSUE FOR REVIEW JAB 1/17/2020 SDE 1/24/20203/4/2020 JRR 0B 60% ISSUE FOR QA REVIEW JAB 2/27/2020 SDE 3/3/20202nd Approver:Initials & DateDate Rev # Description1st Approver:Initials & DateBM‐00013 of 3Revision No. 0B TYPE SIZE LENGTH NO. COND. RATED VOLT. INSULATION SBT‐DC‐1 DC SUPPLY CABLE TRENCH/CONDUIT SOUTH TIE BREAKER XHHW‐2 Cu #8 50' 2 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SBT‐AC‐1 AC SUPPLY CABLE TRENCH/CONDUIT SOUTH TIE BREAKER XHHW‐2 Cu #10 50' 3 + GND 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SBT‐CTRL‐1 SOUTH TIE BREAKER CABLE TRENCH/CONDUIT RELAY PNL XHHW‐2 Cu #10 135' 12 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SBT‐CT‐1 SOUTH TIE BREAKER CABLE TRENCH/CONDUIT RELAY PNL XHHW‐2 Cu #10 135' 4 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SPT‐CT‐2 SOUTH TIE BREAKER CABLE TRENCH/CONDUIT RELAY PNL XHHW‐2 Cu #10 135' 4 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SBT‐PT‐1 RELAY PNL CABLE TRAY PANEL XHHW‐2 Cu #12 25' 4 600V XLPE NOTE 1 SBT‐COMM‐1 RELAY PNL CABLE TRAY SCADA DATA CAT‐5E 25' 4/PR 300V XLPE NOTE 1 NOTES: 1. Length estimate based on plan view. Contractor to verify length based on installed raceway routing. DSG19083 City of Azusa Med Voltage Circuit Breaker ‐ CABLE SCHEDULE CABLE REMARKSCABLE NO. VIAFROM TO CC‐0001 1 of 2 Revision No. 0A Prepared By: Initials 1/16/2020 DP 0A 30% ISSUE FOR REVIEW JAB 1/17/2020 SDE 1/24/2020 3/4/2020 DP 0A 60% ISSUE FOR REVIEW JAB 2/27/2020 SDE 3/3/2020 Date Rev # Description 1st Approver: 2nd Approver: Initials & Date Initials & Date CC‐0001 2 of 2 Revision No. 0A CONTROLCABLE TRENCHC C __/__/__J. ROUTH DC PANEL BOARD AC PANEL BOARD SOUTH BUS AC/DC PANELBOARD POSITION ADDED REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 C1 03.04.20 JRR JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN DRAWING CORRECTION CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. DC AND AC PANEL BOARD LOCATION IS APPROXIMATE. NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION C1 C.N. 1 C1 REFERENCE DRAWING 5 __/__/__DPP EXISTING SOUTH SWITCHRACK STRUCTURE ENVELOPE EXISTING SOUTH SWITCHRACK SHOWN REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 5A 03.04.20 DPP JAB RSB 60% DETAIL DESIGN DRAWING CORRECTIONNOT FOR CONSTRUCTION 5A A5405REFERENCE DRAWING A5506 REFERENCE DRAWING SEL-2032 SEL-2032 HMI KEYBOARD 7'-6"2'-7 1/2" NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K © 2018 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA COMMUNICATIONS PROCCESSOR PANEL ELEVATION D-2102 DPP 0 0 DRAWING CORRECTION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 12.27.19 DPP LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN REFERENCE DRAWING N G 150A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A 20A SPARE 120/240VAC FROM CONTROL HOUSE NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A B C D E F G H J K © 2020 EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 REV REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWING NO. DRAFTER: CHECKER: ENGR: APPD: DATE: SCALE: CITY OF AZUSA 2-BREAKER RACK ADDITION AZUSA, CA SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD D-3201 DPP NTS 0 0 DRAWING CREATION REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 0A 02.03.20 DPP LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN C.N. 2 CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. SOUTH DISTRIBUTION RACK AC PANELBOARD IS EXISTING AND IN-SERVICE. 2. CITY OF AZUSA TO SUPPLY CIRCUIT DESIGNATION, CABLE DESIGNATION, INTERRUPTING CAPACITY, AND CIRCUIT SIZES FOR EXISTING CIRCUITS. C.N. 2C.N. 2 C.N. 1 REFERENCE DRAWING REFERENCE DRAWING REFERENCE DRAWING © EPS ENGINEERING & DESIGN INC. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE NOT INTENDED FOR USE ON OTHER PROJECTS AT THIS SITE OR OTHER SITES WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER. 2020 EPS E&D, TAKES EXCEPTION TO THE CERTIFICATION OF THE EXISTING ACCURACY OF THE DRAWINGS OR INSTALLED EQUIPMENT REV DATE DESCRIPTIONBY TEMPORARY ISSUE TRACKING BLOCK QC LD DSG19083 6A 03.04.20 DPP JAB LLQ 60% DETAIL DESIGN A Division of Electric Power Systems International, Inc. ENGINEERING & DESIGN 1338 E. KINGSLEY, SUITE B SPRINGFIELD, MO 65804 PHONE: (417) 886-4840 FAX: (417) 886-4842 DRAWING CORRECTION NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION NQ Circuit Breaker Panelboards Class 1640 Catalog 1640CT0801 R10/19 www.schneider-electric.com A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Legal Information The Schneider Electric brand and any trademarks of Schneider Electric SE and its subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Schneider Electric SE or its subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners. This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished for informational use only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of Schneider Electric. Schneider Electric does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide or its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an "as is" basis. Schneider Electric products and equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information contained in this guide may be subject to change without notice. To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by Schneider Electric and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational content of this material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the information contained herein. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Table of Contents Standards and Ratings ..............................................................................5 Standards..................................................................................................6 Ratings......................................................................................................6 Interiors.........................................................................................................7 Main Lug Interiors.......................................................................................7 Main Lugs for MLO Interiors ........................................................................7 Main Circuit Breaker Interiors ......................................................................9 Interior Accessories..................................................................................11 Fingersafe IP2X per IEC 60529 Barriers for NQ Panelboards.......................12 Separated Distribution and Split Bus Panelboards ..............................14 Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on)...........................................................15 Lighting Contactors...................................................................................17 Neutrals ......................................................................................................18 Auxiliary Neutral Lugs...............................................................................19 Neutral Bonding Provisions .......................................................................19 Ground Bar Kits .........................................................................................20 Ground Bar Insulator Kit (Catalog No. PKGTAB).........................................20 Technical Information................................................................................21 NQ 14-inch wide—up to 240 Vac or 48 Vdc.................................................21 Surge Protection .......................................................................................22 Enclosures .................................................................................................23 Indoor Enclosures (NEMATypes 1 and 2)...................................................24 Rainproof (Type 3R) and Dust Resistant (Type 5 and 12) Enclosures ...........25 Corrosion-Resistant Fiberglass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures (Type4X).................................................................................................26 Stainless Steel Enclosures (Type 4 and 4X)................................................26 Single Row (Column-Width) Panelboards ............................................27 Cable Trough ...........................................................................................27 Pull Box...................................................................................................28 Power and Energy Management Options ...................................................28 Typical Wiring Diagrams ..........................................................................29 1640CT0801 3A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Standards and Ratings Class 1640 Standards and Ratings NQ circuit breaker panelboards meet US and Canadian standards, and are marked cULus. NQ circuit breaker panelboards accept QO™ and QOB branch circuit breakers. Voltage System System Diagram 120/240 Vac 1Ø3W 208Y/120 Vac 3Ø4W 240/120 Vac 3Ø4W Delta 240 Vac 3Ø3W Delta 240 Vac 3Ø3W Grd. BØ Delta 48 1Ø Vdc 1Ø2W 1640CT0801 5A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Standards and Ratings Standards NQ circuit breaker panelboards are designed, manufactured, and tested to comply with the following standards: • UL 67—Standard for Panelboards • UL 50—Enclosures for Electrical Equipment • CSA C22.2, No. 29-M1989—Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards • CSA C22.2, No. 94-M91—Special Purpose Enclosures • NEMA PB 1—Panelboards • NFPA 70—National Electrical Code ®(NEC®) • Federal Specification W-P-115C Type I Class 1—Circuit Breaker Panelboards • ASCE 7-05, ASCE 7-10, IBC 2009, IBC 2012, CBC 2010, CBC 2013, CBC 2016, NBCC 2015 Seismic Qualification, and OSHPD Special Seismic Certification Pre-approval: OSP-0016-10 • ABS Type Certified Ratings • Main Lugs 100–600 A • Main Circuit Breaker 100–600 A 6 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Interiors Class 1640 Interiors Main Lug Interiors 225 A Maximum Main Lug Interior and Deadfront • Will accept plug-on or bolt-on branch circuit breakers • Top- or bottom-feed • 65k AIR maximum branch circuit breakers (fully-rated) • 200k AIR maximum when supplied by remote PowerPact circuit breaker (series rated) • Field-installable sub-feed lug kits for 100–400 A interiors • Factory installed main lugs on all interiors • 225–400 A main lug interiors are convertible to main circuit breaker by adding a main circuit breaker and adapter kit • Available with silver/tin-plated copper or tin-plated aluminum bus (aluminum is standard). Tin-plated or thick silver plated copper bus are available options. Branch connector fingers are tin-plated copper; thick silver-plated branch connector fingers are optional Main Lugs for MLO Interiors Main Lug Interiors 100–225 A Maximum and 600 A Maximum Table 1 - Aluminum Main lugs for MLO Interiors Amperes Catalog Number Lug Wire Range for wire bending space Aluminum Mechanical (Standard) 1 100 NQALM1 (1) #6–2/0 225 NQALM2 (1) #6–350 kcmil 400 NQALM4 (1) 1/0–750 kcmil, or (2) 1/0–350 kcmil 600 NQALM6 (2) 1/0–750 kcmil 6002 NQALM6A (3) 1/0–250 kcmil Aluminum Compression 100 NQALV1 (1) #4–300 kcmil 225 NQALV2 (1) 250–350 kcmil 400 NQALV4 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil 600 NQALV6 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil 1640CT0801 7 1. NQ MLO interiors are supplied with lugs. No selection is required if aluminum mechanical lugs are acceptable. 2. Optional lug for 600 A. Can also be used for 400 A. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Interiors NQALM2 225 A Main Lug Kit NQALM6A 600 A Main Lug Kit Type VCEL VERSAtile™ Compression Equipment Terminals NQCUM2 225 A Copper Mechanical Lugs NQCUV2 225 A Copper Compression Lugs Table 2 - Copper Main lugs for MLO Interiors Amperes Catalog Number Lug Wire Range for wire bending space Copper Mechanical 100 NQCUM1 (1) #6–2/0 225 NQCUM2 (1) #6–350 kcmil 400 NQCUM4 (1) 1/0–750 kcmil, or (2) 1/0–350 kcmil 600 NQCUM6 (2) 1/0–750 kcmil Copper Compression 100 NQCUV1 (1) #6–350 kcmil 225 NQCUV2 (1) #6–350 kcmil 400 NQCUV4 (1) 400–750 kcmil 600 NQCUV6 (2) 250–500 kcmil Main Lugs Interior with PowerPact™ Q Main Circuit Breaker and Main Circuit Breaker Kit Deadfront Removed Deadfront Installed NQ442L2 Main Lugs Interior (without deadfront) and QBL32225 Main Circuit Breaker (mounted to NQMB2Q kit) 8 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Interiors Class 1640 Main Circuit Breaker Interiors QOB Branch Mounted Main Circuit Breaker on a 225 A NQ Interior QBL Main Circuit Breaker on a 3-phase NQ Main Lug Interior • May be assembled from merchandised main lug interiors, main circuit breaker, and main circuit breaker kits. • Will accept plug-on or bolt-on branch circuit breakers. • Merchandised main circuit breaker interiors are suitable for use as service entrance (US only). • Barriers must be installed in jurisdictions that have adopted the 2017 National Electric Code. Table 3 - UL Service Entrance Barrier Kits Catalog Number 3 Description Applicable Main Breakers HJQLLC H/J/Q Line Lug Cover PowerPact™ H, J, Q LALLC LA/LH Line Lug Cover LA/LH PPLLC PowerPact™ L Line Lug Cover PowerPact™ L • Service entrance barriers are required and available in Canada (factory- assembled only). • May be top-feed or bottom-feed. • Accept 65k AIR maximum branch circuit breakers (fully-rated). • May be series rated 200k AIR maximum when supplied by PowerPact™ circuit breaker. • Are available with silver/tin plated copper or tin-plated aluminum bus (aluminum is standard). Tin-plated or silver-plated copper bus is available as an option. Branch connector fingers are tin-plated copper; silver-plated branch connector fingers are optional. • 100 A main circuit breaker interiors use a standard or 14” wide main lug interior and an appropriate QOB or QOB-VH main circuit breaker in a branch space; vertical main breaker main breaker interiors are also available. • 110–225 A main circuit breaker may be assembled from: — A standard or 14” wide main lug interior. — Main circuit breaker adaptor kit (NQMB2Q, NQMB2HJ) (or NQMB2Q14 or NQMB2HJ14 for 14" interiors). — Appropriate PowerPact™ H, J, or Q frame circuit breaker • 250 A main circuit breaker interiors are factory-assembled only. • Merchandised 400 A main circuit breaker interiors consist of: — 400 A 3-phase or single phase main lug interior. — Main circuit breaker adapter kit (Catalog No. NQMB4LA). — Appropriate LA or LH circuit breaker. • Factory assembled 400 A main circuit breakers are available with LA, LH, or PowerPact™ L 4 main circuit breakers. • 600 A main circuit breaker interiors (factory-assembled only) use: — Appropriate LD, LG, LJ, or LL circuit breaker. 4 1640CT0801 9 3. Main circuit breaker panels are supplied with UL service entrance barriers if "UL Service Entrance" is selected as a requirement in SE Advantage. 4. Requires 8.75 in.deep enclosures. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Interiors Main Circuit Breaker Adapter Kit MAIN PRINCIPAL 80 110 - 32 7-038 0 1 10 -3 2 7 - 0 3 80 1 1 0 -3 2 7 - 0 380122-125-01A B C I F G H E D Hardware not shown to scale Table 4 - NQMB2Q Kit Contents A Main circuit breaker deadfront cover (1) B Main circuit breaker mounting pan (1) C Deadfront support brackets (2) D “Main” circuit breaker label (1) E 10-32 x 7/16-inch tapping screws (2) F 10-32 x 5/16-inch tapping screws (6) G 8-32 x 2 ¼-inch tapping screws (2) H 8-32 x 3 ¼-inch tapping screws (2) I Main lug wires (4) Table 5 - Main Circuit Breaker Adapter Kits Catalog No.Ampere Rating Main Circuit Breaker NQMB2Q 100–225 A PowerPact™ Q NQMB2HJ 100–225 A PowerPact™ H or J NQMB4LA 125–400 A LAL, LHL NQMB4LA, 400 A LA/LH Main Breaker Kit Table 6 - Main Circuit Breakers Max. Amperes Circuit Breaker Type 100 A QOB5, QOB-VH 5 150 A HDL, HGL, HJL, HLL, or HRL 225 A QBL, QDL, QGL, QJL, JDL, JGL, JJL, JLL, or JRL 250 A PowerPact™ J 6: JD, JG, JJ, JL, or JR 400 A LAL or LHL PowerPact™ L 6: LD, LG, LJ, or LL 600 A PowerPact™ L 6: LD, LG, LJ, or LL Field-Installable Circuit Breaker Accessories Field-installable shunt trip, alarm switch, and other accessories are available for PowerPact™ H, J, L and LA/LH main circuit breakers. Refer to Catalog 0616CT1001 or 0601CT9101 for additional information. 10 1640CT0801 5. Backfed main circuit breaker. 6. Factory assembled only. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Interiors Class 1640 Interior Accessories QOB3125SL Sub-Feed Lug Device Sub-Feed Lug Kits Table 7 - Branch Mounted Sub-Feed Lugs Rating Amperes Number of Poles Type of Connection Catalog No.Main Wire Size 125 2 Bolt-On QOB2125SL #4–2/0 Al or Cu 3 QOB3125SL NQSFL4, 400 A Sub-Feed Lug Kit Field-Installable Sub-Feed Lugs Table 8 - Field-Installable Sub-Feed Lugs Mains Rating Added Length 7 Catalog No. 100 A —NQSFL1 225 A 6 Inches NQSFL2 400 A —NQSFL4 NQFTL2, 225 A Feed-Through Lug Kit Table 9 - Field installable Feed-Through Lugs Mains Rating Interior Circuits Added Length 7 Catalog No. 225 A 30 6 inches NQFTL2 42 — 54, 72, 84 6 inches NQFTL2H 400 A 30 — NQFTL4L 42 6 inches 54, 72 6 inches NQFTL4H 84 — 225 A Main Lug Interior with Sub-feed Lugs Field Installable Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Kits Table 10 - Field Installable Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers Field Ampere Rating Catalog Number Number of Sub-Feed Circuit Breakers and Type 225 NQSFB2Q 1 Q-frame 225 NQSFB2HJ 1 H or J-frame 400 NQSFB4Q 2 Q-frame 400 NQSFB4HJ 2 H or J-frame 1640CT0801 11 7. Refer to Digest 178 for the correct box size. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Interiors 225 A Main Lug Interior with Feed-Through Lugs Factory-Installed Sub-Feed and Feed-Through Options • Feed-through lugs are available on standard width 1Ø or 3Ø, 100–600 A interiors (main lug interiors only). • Sub-feed lugs are available on 1Ø or 3Ø, 100–400 A main lug interiors only. • Sub-feed circuit breakers — Available on 1Ø or 3Ø, main lugs 225–600 A interiors (main lug or main breaker) — One sub-feed circuit breaker for each 225 A panelboard — One or two sub-feed circuit breakers for each 400–600 A panelboard — Sub-feed circuit breakers may be PowerPact™ H, J, or Q frame. Fingersafe IP2X per IEC 60529 Barriers for NQ Panelboards • Factory-installed IP2X barriers for NQ Panelboards reduce the risk of accidental contact with energized components if a cover is removed. • Plastic barriers cover Mains (lugs or circuit breaker), copper bus, and branch circuit breakers, providing IP2X per IEC 60529 protection for undergrounded parts. • Available in 3 phase interiors with main lugs up to 400 A. Main circuit breaker choices include PowerPact™ Q, H, J or LA/LH frame. • Series rated up to 200 kAIC—fully rated up to 65 kA. • Selectively coordinated up to 30 kAIC. • All standard NEMA 1, 2, 3R, 4/4X, 5, or 12 enclosures available up to 225 A. Higher ampacity panels are supplied with NEMA 1 enclosures. • Branch breakers available to 100 A in 1P, 2P, and 3P. • Two factory assembled constructions: ◦Standard design that offers maximum flexibility, including interiors with 18–84 circuits, and sub-feed lugs up to 225 A. ◦Enhanced design that retains IP2X per IEC 60529 protection whether or not a branch breaker is installed. 12 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Interiors Class 1640 Standard IP2X per IEC 60529 Enhanced IP2X per IEC 6052 (Bus Finger Covers Empty Spaces) (Bus Covered Without Branch Circuit Breaker) 1 Main Lug Cover 2 Main Breaker Line Side Cover 3 Main Breaker Load Side Cover 4 Neutral Cover 5 Low Amp QO(B) Cover 6 High Amp QO(B) Cover 7 Bus Finger Cover For more information please reference Document Number 1640BR1701. 1640CT0801 13A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Separated Distribution and Split Bus Panelboards Separated Distribution and Split Bus Panelboards Square D™ NQ Separated Distribution and Split Bus Panelboards come Factory Assembled with copper bus, with or without an integral Main Circuit Breaker. For more detailed information about Square D NQ Separated Distribution and Split Bus Panelboards please review document 1600HO1701. 14 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on)Class 1640 Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on) Please reference QO QOB Circuit Breaker Catalog 0730CT9801. QOB Branch Circuit Breakers QO Branch Circuit Breakers Table 11 - Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on or Plug-on) Circuit Breaker Catalog Prefix Max. Vac Rating Number of Poles Ampere Rating Interrupting Rating—RMS Symmetrical Amperes 8 Vac 120 120/240 240 QO, QOB 120/240 1 10–70 —10k — 120/240 2 10–125 —10k — 240 3 10–100 ——10k QO-H, QOB-H 240 2 15–125 ——10k QO-VH 120/240 1 15–70 —22k — 120/240 2 15–125 —22k — 240 3 15–100 ——22k QOB-VH 120/240 1 15–70 —22k — 120/240 2 15–150 —22k — 240 3 15–150 ——22k QOH-QOHB 120/240 2 35–125 —42k — QH, QHB 120/240 1 15–30 —65k — 120/240 2 15–30 —65k — 240 3 15–30 ——65k 1640CT0801 15 8. Series ratings are also available. Canada: See the Series Rating Guide (data bulletin #S1600PD0302EP) USA: See Switchboard/ Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Ratings (data bulletin #2700DB9901). A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on) QO™ Arc-Fault Circuit Breakers QO arc-fault circuit breakers provide combination arc fault protection with or without ground fault circuit protection as required by the NEC and local code adoption, and comply with UL 1699. Table 12 - QO Arc-Fault Circuit Breaker Catalog Numbers Circuit Breaker Type 9 Ampere Rating 1P 120 Vac 10 kAIR 1 Space Required 1P 120 Vac 22 kAIR 1 Space Required Catalog Number Catalog Number Combination Arc-Fault Interrupter 15 QO(B)115CAFI QO(B)115VCAFI 20 QO(B)120CAFI QO(B)120VHCAFI Combination Arc-Fault and Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (Pigtail Neutral) 15 QO(B)115DF QO(B)115VHDF 20 QO(B)120DF QO(B)120VHDF Table 13 - Branch Circuit Breaker Lug Data Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker Type Wire Size Aluminum Copper 10–30 QO, QOB (2) #12–#8 (2) #14–#8 35–50 QO, QOB (1) #8–#4 (1) #8–#4 60–70 QO, QOB (1) #6–#2 (2) #6–#2 80–125 QO, QOB (1) #4–2/0 (1) #4–2/0 150 QOB-VH (1) #4–300 kcmil (1) #4–300 kcmil NOTE: • Lugs suitable for 75°C wire • Torque QOB connector mounting screws to 18–21 lb-in • Torque labels are included on the circuit breakers with load side lug torque requirements Table 14 - QO Breaker Binding Screw Torque Summary Type Description and AIC Rating Torque lb.-in (N- m) QO/QOB 10 A–30 A, 1, 2 and 3–pole, all interruption ratings 36 (4) QO/QOB 35 A–70 A, 1 and 2–pole and 40 A–60 A 3–pole, 10kA 45 (5) QO/QOB-VH, QOH 40 A–125 A, 2–pole, 22kA and 42kA 50 (5.6) QO/QOB-VH 40 A–100 A, 3–pole, 22kA 50 (5.6) QO/QOB 70 A–100 A, 3–pole, 10kA 50 (5.6) QO/QOB-H 40 A–100 A, 2–pole, 240 Vac 50 (5.6) QO/QOB 80 A–125 A, 2–pole, 10kA 50 (5.6) Recommended torque values may be found on the label of the Panelboards. 16 1640CT0801 9. HACR type for use with air conditioning, heating and refrigeration equipment having motor group combinations and marked for use with HACR type circuit breakers. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Lighting Contactors Class 1640 Lighting Contactors Lighting Contactors are available as an option in factory-assembled panelboards. 2-pole and 3-pole contactors are available for 30, 60, 75, 100, 150, 200, or 225 A applications. Fore more information please review Lighting Contactors Catalog 8903CT9701. 1640CT0801 17A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Neutrals Neutrals 100–225 A Neutral Assembly Typical Neutral Assemblies 400 A 600 A NQNL2: 225 A Copper 200% Neutral Assembly • All lugs suitable for copper or aluminum wire.100–600 A interiors have split neutral located on same end as mains. • Bondable for use as service entrance (in Canada, available as factory- assembled only). • Branch terminals suitable for #12–#4 aluminum and #14–#4 copper. • Provisions for larger branch terminal lugs with use of auxiliary neutral lugs. • All unused neutral terminals may be used to terminate equipment grounding conductors when panelboard is used as service entrance. • 100% rated neutrals. One neutral termination provided per circuit in panelboard. • 200% rated neutrals are available as factory-assembled options or as kits. Table 15 - Field Installable Copper 100% Neutral Kits Amperes Catalog Number 100 NQN1CU 225 NQN2CU 400/60010 NQN6CU Table 16 - Field Installable 200% Neutral Kits Amperes Catalog Number 100 NQNL1 225 NQNL2 11 400 NQNL4 12 200% Neutral Restrictions • Compression lugs on 200% neutrals not available with accessories (feed through lugs, sub feed lugs). 225 A, 200% Neutral • Integral lighting contactors are not available. • Not available on column width or 14" wide interiors. • If sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, or sub-feed circuit breakers are required, order the following 200% neutral kit:NQNL2ACCY. 400 A, 200% Neutral • NEMAType 3R, 5, and 12 enclosures require copper-bussed interiors. • Integral lighting contactors are not available. • NQNLEP neutral plate available for 400 A panelboards equipped with 200% neutrals and sub-feed lugs, feedthrough lugs, or sub-feed circuit breakers. 18 1640CT0801 10. Not for use with 600 sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, or sub-feed circuit breaker. 11. Use NQNL2ACCY when installing on a 225A panel with SFL, SFB, or TFL. 12. Not to be used with SFL, FTL, or SFB. These combinations are factory-assembled only. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Neutrals Class 1640 Auxiliary Neutral Lugs Auxiliary Neutral Lugs Catalog No. QO70AN Catalog No. Q1150AN Lugs are suitable for copper or aluminum wire and are field-installable on neutral assembly. Table 17 - Optional Ground Bar / Neutral Bar Lugs QO70AN #10–#2 Al or #14–#4 Cu lug Q1100AN #4–#1/0 Al/Cu lug Q1150AN #1–#4/0 Al/Cu lug NOTE:Up to 5 lugs may be added to NQ neutrals or ground bars. Neutral Bonding Provisions Bonding strap may be field-installed for UL service equipment requirements on 100–600 A interiors (in Canada, available as factory-assembled only). 100–225 A Provision 1640CT0801 19A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Ground Bar Kits Ground Bar Kits Equipment Ground Bar • Field-installable in all panelboards. • Suitable for copper or aluminum wire. • Provisions for mounting up to four ground bar kits per panel. Table 18 - Available Ground Bar Kits Catalog Number Terminals Approximate Overall Length Inches (mm) Distance Between Mounting Holes Inches (mm) Number of Terminals Quantity Available for Each Size Material I/II PK12GTA 12 Al 12/0 4.700 (119) 3.125 (79) PK12GTACU 12 Cu 12/0 4.700 (119) 3.125 (79) PK18GTA 18 Al 18/0 6.560 (167) 3.125 (79) PK18GTACU 18 Cu 18/0 6.560 (167) 3.125 (79) PK23GTA 24 Al 23/1 9.125 (232) 3.125 (79) PK23GTACU 24 Cu 23/1 9.125 (232) 3.125 (79) PK27GTA 27 Al 24/1 9.125 (232) 3.125 (79) PK27GTACU 27 Cu 27/0 9.125 (232) 3.125 (79) Table 19 - Ground Bar Kit Wire Ranges Size Cu Al I (1) #14 to #4 or (2) #14 or #12 (1) #12 to #4 or (2) #12 or #10 II (1) #1 to 4/0 (1) #1 to 4/0 Ground Bar Insulator Kit (Catalog No. PKGTAB) The insulator kit is field installable and may be used with equipment ground bar kits. NQ panelboard enclosures have equipment ground bar mounting provisions in all four corners. Ground Bar with Insulator Kit 20 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Ground Bar Kits Class 1640 Technical Information All PK equipment grounding kits are supplied with mounting screws, necessary installation instructions, and an “Equipment Grounding Terminal” self-adhesive label. NQ 14-inch wide—up to 240 Vac or 48 Vdc NQ 14 in. interior (without deadfront) with QOB branch circuit breakers (in NQB532 enclosure) Features • 240 Vac, 48 Vdc maximum. • 100 or 225 A rated interior with main circuit breaker or main lugs only. • Accepts same QO(B) branch circuit breakers as standard NQ interiors, up to 100 A maximum. • Interiors supplied with tin plated copper bus as standard. • Three-phase, four-wire, and single-phase, three-wire interiors available. • Panelboards available with Mono-Flat™ trim front. • Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. • Branch circuit filler plates provide fast and easy installation. Table 20 - 14–inch wide Main Circuit Breakers Main Circuit Breaker Catalog Number Mains Rating Voltage System Main Circuit Breaker — 100 A 1 phase, 3 wire 2–pole QOB or QOB-VH 13 —3 phase, 4 wire 3–pole QOB or QOB-VH 13 NQMB2HJ14 or NQMB2Q14 225 A Any PowerPact™ H, J, or Q 1640CT0801 21 13. Select a PowerPact circuit breaker (and associated main circuit breaker kit from the list for 225 interiors), for panels to be “Suitable for use as UL service equipment.” A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Surge Protection Surge Protection NQ Main Circuit Breaker Interior with SurgeLoc™ SPD Square D™ brand SurgeLoc™ Surge Protective Device (SPD) delivers specification grade performance for service entrance or critical branch panel applications. The SurgeLoc™ SPD product utilizes a high-energy suppression circuit that provides 6–10 modes of suppression from 80,000 to 240,000 peak Amps of surge current rating per phase. 14 These devices feature circuity that provides not only transient surge suppression, but also noise filtration. More detailed information can be found in SurgeLoc™ Brochure1300BR1302. Table 21 - Surge Protection Ratings NQ SurgeLoc™ Voltage Specifications Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) Service Voltage L–N L–G N–G L–L MCOV 15 120/240 Vac, 1-phase 700 700 600 1000 150 208Y/120 Vac, 3-phase, 4-wire 700 700 600 1000 150 240/120 Vac, 3-phase, high-leg delta 800 800 700 1200 150 Select a 30 A circuit breaker if a SPD Disconnect is desired (2–pole) breaker for single phase interiors, or 3–pole breaker for three phase interiors. Design Features • Individually fused suppression modules. • Thermal cutout. • Inline, copper bus bar connection. • Solid state bi-directional. • Push-to-Test on-line diagnostic display. • Audible alarm with enable/disable switch. • LED indicators indicate loss of protection, or fully-operational circuit. • High-energy parallel design for IEEE C62.41 category A, B, and C3 applications. • Available in main circuit breaker and main lug only panelboards with sub-feed circuit breakers, feed-through lugs, or sub-feed lugs. • AC tracking filter with EMI/RFI filtering up to -30 dB from 100 kHz to 100 MHz. • Dry Contacts provide remote indication of the SPD device’s operating status to a computer interface board or emergency management system. Table 22 - Surge Protection Options Option Description Surge Counter Displays the combined total number of transient voltage surges detected from L–G, L–L, L–N, and N–G since the counter was last reset. Remote Monitor Displays the alarm status of the surge protective device up to 1,000 ft (305 m) away from the unit. This option uses the dry contacts. 22 1640CT0801 14. Available surge current rating: 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, and 240kA. 15. MCOV: maximum continuous operating voltage. A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Enclosures Class 1640 Enclosures Indoor Enclosures Interior Mounts to Box Studs MH Box Front (Type 1) Enclosure for 400–600 A Interiors Mono-Flat Front (Type 1 Enclosure) for 100–250 A Interiors Concealed Hinge Used on 100–600 ATrim Fronts Indoor Enclosure Accessories Flush Lock (standard) Catalog No. PK4FL Sliding Vault Lock (optional) Catalog No. PK5FL Key NSR-251 Catalog No. LP9618 1640CT0801 23A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Enclosures Table 23 - Enclosure Types Type Environment Protects Against Type 1 Indoor Contact with the enclosed equipment, falling dirt Type 2 Indoor Type 1, plus • Dripping and light splashing of non-corrosive liquids Type 3R Outdoor Type 2, plus • Rain, snow, and sleet Type 4 Indoor/outdoor Type 3R, plus • Circulating dust, lint, fiber • Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers • Windblown dust • Hosedown and splashing water Type 4X Indoor/outdoor Type 4, plus • Corrosive agents Type 5 Indoor Type 2, plus • Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers, and flyings Type 12 Indoor Type 2, plus • Circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings • Settling airborne dust, lint, fibers, and flyings • Oil and coolant seepage Indoor Enclosures (NEMATypes 1 and 2) Boxes (MH): • Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, one is provided with knockouts and the other is blank. • Standard enclosure sizes: ‒ 20 in. (508 mm) wide x 5.75 in. (146 mm) deep, 600 A main lug interior max. or 400 A main circuit breaker max. ‒ 20 in. (508 mm) wide x 8.75 in. (223 mm) deep, for PowerPact™ L main circuit breaker interior, factory-assembled only. • Enclosure and interior mounting instructions are found in the information manual shipped with the interior. • Interiors mount directly to studs in the MH enclosure. Interior mounting brackets are not required. • Type 2 enclosure includes a driphood. ‒ Surface-mounted trim only. NOTE:Also available with knockouts / blank endwalls both ends. NOTE:A wide variety of enclosure widths and height extensions are available for factory assembled panelboards. Trims Fronts (NC): • Finished with gray baked enamel over cleaned phosphatized steel (ANSI 49). • Flush or surface mounted (Type 2 surface only). • Door has flush lock. Uses NSR-251 key. • Directory card located on the inside of the door. • Trim fronts for 400–600 A interiors are vented and mount to the enclosure with trim screws. Door hinges are concealed. • Optional hinged trim fronts are available. These meet most door-in-door specifications. 24 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Enclosures Class 1640 Hinged Trim on Surface Mounted Enclosure NOTE:Special trim fronts are also available, including: welded metal directory card holders; three point latches; custom paint colors, stainless steel, custom door locks, taller and/or wider trim fronts. Rainproof (Type 3R) and Dust Resistant (Type 5 and 12) Enclosures Rainproof and Dusttight Enclosure Type 3R, 5, and 12 Enclosure Vault Handle with Lock Catalog No. PK4NVL • Finished with gray baked enamel over cleaned phosphatized galvanized steel (ANSI 49). • Gasketed door has vault handle with lock (uses NSR-251 key). • Directory card holder on inside of door. • No knockouts. • Removable drain screw for Type 3R enclosure rating. • Provisions for two ground bars. 1640CT0801 25A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Enclosures Corrosion-Resistant Fiberglass-Reinforced Polyester Enclosures (Type4X) Corrosion-Resistant Fiberglass- Reinforced Polyester Enclosure • Watertight and dust resistant. • Gasketed door with optional locking handle. • Directory card holder on inside of door. Stainless Steel Enclosures (Type 4 and 4X) Stainless Steel Enclosure • Watertight and dust resistant. • Gasketed door with optional locking handle. • Directory card holder on inside of door. • Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel available. 26 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Single Row (Column-Width) Panelboards Class 1640 Single Row (Column-Width) Panelboards NQ Column Width Panelboard with Cable Trough and Pull Box Ratings • Main lugs: 100–225 A • Main circuit breaker: 100–225 A Enclosures • 8.625 in. (219 mm) wide by 5.00 in. (126.95) deep for 10” WF Beams • Galvanized Steel • Removable endwalls • Finish: gray baked enamel over cleaned, phosphatized steel Miscellaneous • All lugs are suitable for 75°C copper or aluminum wire • 60 A maximum branch circuit breaker • Bolt-on QOB/QOB-VH/QHB circuit breakers • Solid neutral opposite mains, second neutral in pull box Table 24 - Branch Circuit Breakers (Bolt-on) 240 Vac 10 k AIR QOB 22 k AIR QOB-VH 65 k AIR QHB 1 pole, 10–60 A 1 pole, 10–60 A 1 pole, 10–30 A 2 pole, 10–60 A 2 pole, 10–60 A 2 pole, 10–30 A 3 pole, 10–60 A 3 pole, 10–60 A 3 pole, 10–30 A Cable Trough • Stackable • 8.625 in. (219 mm) wide by 5.00 in. (127 mm) deep for 10” WF Beams • Galvanized steel trough uses enclosure end wall • Two-piece front trim ‒ 15 in. (381mm) long top piece of front trim removable for pull box mounting • Finish: gray baked enamel over cleaned, phosphatized steel • Cable troughs are standard with a trough barrier Table 25 - Cable Troughs Length of Cable Trough Catalog Number 36 inch (9914 mm)MTX836 48 inch (1219 mm)MTX848 56 inch (1422 mm)MTX856 66 inch (1676 mm)MTX866 1640CT0801 27A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Class 1640 Single Row (Column-Width) Panelboards Pull Box • Mounts on cable trough • 20 in. (508 mm) wide by 5.00 in. (127.00 mm) deep by 15 in. (381 mm) high • Finish: gray-baked enamel electrodeposited over cleaned, phosphatized steel • Removable end walls with knockouts • Solid neutral included with 42 circuits • Pull Box catalog number MPX81542 Power and Energy Management Options NQ 100 A Branch Mounted Main Circuit Breaker Interior with EM3555 Circuit Monitor and SurgeLoc™ SPD Module Several Power Meters and Circuit Monitors are available factory-assembled in NQ panelboards. Basic Energy Metering at the Mains is possible with PowerLogic EM3500 series circuit monitors. Power Quality Monitoring is available with the selection of PM5563 or PM8244 power meters. These are typically installed with an LCD display in a 7 inch (178 mm) wide side gutter. Communications from these meters is avaiable via Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP. Measurement and Verification Panels may be created through the selection of PowerLogic BCPM branch circuit power metering in factory assembly NQ panelboards. CTstrips work with communication modules to enable power monitoring of every branch circuit in an NQ panelboard. Measurement and Verification Panels (MVP Panelboards) may be created through the selection of PowerLogic BCPM branch circuit power metering in factory assembled NQ panelboards. CTstrips work with communication modules to enable power monitoring of every branch circuit in an NQ panelboard. More information about NQ MVP Panelboards may be found in Document Number 1200BR1201. 28 1640CT0801A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Typical Wiring Diagrams Class 1640 Typical Wiring Diagrams 1-Phase, 3-Wire 100–225 A Main Lugs S N S N 100 A QOB Main Circuit Breaker S N S N 70–225 A Main Circuit Breaker Types QBL, JDL, HDL S N S N 400–600 A Main Lugs S/N 400 A Main Circuit Breaker Type LAL S/N 3-Phase, 4-Wire 100–225 A Main Lugs S N S N 100 A QOB Main Circuit Breaker S N S N 70–225 A Main Circuit Breaker Types QBL, JDL, HDL S N S N 400–600 A Main Lugs S/N 400 A Main Circuit Breaker Type LAL S/N 1640CT0801 29A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD Schneider Electric 252 North Tippecanoe Peru, IN 46970 USA 888–778–2733 www.schneider-electric.com As standards, specifications, and design change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. © 2008 – 2019 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved. 1640CT0801 A1, A2 - SQUARE D # TYPE NQ - DC PANELBOARD P1000T Materials & Finishes - Standard: Pregalvanized (PG): Conforms to ASTM A653 SS GR 33, G90. Unistrut Defender (DF): Conforms to ASTM A1046 SS GR 33 Hot Dip Galvanized (HG): Steel conforms to ASTM A1011 SS GR 33, Finish conforms to ASTM A123 Perma-Green (GR): Steel conforms to ASTM A1011 SS GR 33, E-Coat finish Perma-Gold (ZD): Steel conforms to ASTM A1011 SS GR 33, Finish conforms to ASTM B633, Type II SC3 Plain (PL): Conforms to ASTM A1011 SS GR 33 Materials & Finishes - Special Metals: Stainless Steel, Type 304 (SS): ASTM A240, Type 304 * Stainless Steel, Type 316 (ST): ASTM A240, Type 316 * Aluminum (EA): ASTM B221, Type 6063-T6 (Extruded) * * These materials have different physical properties and performance characteristics. Please contact us for design support. Part No. Lengt h (ft)Finish Produ ct We ight / Ft (lb s/ft) P1000T 10 PG 1.85 P1000T 20 PG 1.85 P1000T 10 DF 1.961 P1000T 20 DF 1.961 P1000T 20 HG 1.961 P1000T 10 HG 1.961 P1000T 20 GR 1.85 P1000T 10 GR 1.85 P1000T 10 PL 1.85 P1000T 20 PL 1.85 P1000T 10 ZD 1.85 P1000T 20 ZD 1.85 P1000T 20 SS 1.85 P1000T 10 SS 1.88 P1000T 20 ST 1.85 P1000T 10 EA 0.76 P1000T 20 EA 0.76 Project: Architect / Engineer: Date:Phone: Contractor: Address: Notes: Approval Stamp: Beam Loading - P1000T Span (in) Max Allow. Uniform Lo ad (lbs) Deflection at Uniform load (in) Uniform Loading at Deflection Lateral Bra cing Reduc tion Factor Span/180 (lbs) Span/240 (lbs) Span/360 (lbs) 24 1,437 0.06 1,437 1,437 1,437 1.00 36 961 0.13 961 961 765 0.94 48 723 0.22 723 646 425 0.88 60 578 0.35 553 408 272 0.82 72 476 0.50 383 289 187 0.78 84 408 0.68 281 213 136 0.75 96 357 0.89 213 162 111 0.71 108 323 1.14 170 128 85 0.69 120 289 1.40 136 102 68 0.66 144 238 2.00 94 68 51 0.61 168 204 2.72 68 51 34 0.55 192 179 3.55 51 43 NR 0.51 216 162 4.58 43 34 NR 0.47 240 145 5.62 34 NR NR 0.44 Note NR - Not R ecommende d Refer to the General Specifications for loading information. Column Loading - P1000T Unbraced Height (in) Allowable Load at Slot Face (lbs) Max Column Load Applied at C.G. K=0.65 (lbs)K=0.80 (lbs)K=1.0 (lbs)K=1.2 (lbs) 24 3,550 10,740 9,890 8,770 7,740 36 3,190 8,910 7,740 6,390 5,310 48 2,770 7,260 6,010 4,690 3,800 60 2,380 5,910 4,690 3,630 2,960 72 2,080 4,840 3,800 2,960 2,400 84 1,860 4,040 3,200 2,480 1,980 96 1,670 3,480 2,750 2,110 1,660 108 1,510 3,050 2,400 1,810 KL/r>200 120 1,380 2,700 2,110 KL/r>200 KL/r>200 144 1,150 2,180 1,660 KL/r>200 KL/r>200 Refer to the General Specifications for loading information. A3 - UNISTRUT # P1000T HG - 1.625X1.625 SLOTTED HOLE * For Maximum recommended working loads see “Specifications,” page 5. Note: For RG glazed insulators equivalent to these standard insulators, see table on page 9. Illustrations shown are true representations of Lapp products at the time of printing, but are subject to change at any time.11ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES Ø 7.0Ø 7.0 Ø 4.25Ø 4.25 10.010.0 4 TAPPED HOLES4 TAPPED HOLES1/2-13 +.015 OVERSIZE1/2-13 +.015 OVERSIZE 5/85/8" FULL THREADFULL THREADON 3.0ON 3.0" BOLT CIRCLE BOLT CIRCLE STANDARD STRENGTH UNIT Ø 4.25Ø 4.25 Ø 8.50Ø 8.50 Ø 6.25Ø 6.25 Ø 6.25Ø 6.25 12.012.0 4 TAPPED HOLES4 TAPPED HOLES5/8-11 +.015 OVERSIZE5/8-11 +.015 OVERSIZE 3/43/4" FULL THREAD FULL THREADON 5.0ON 5.0" BOLT CIRCLE BOLT CIRCLE HIGH STRENGTH UNIT Ø 10.0Ø 10.0 Ø 6.12Ø 6.12 Ø 6.12Ø 6.12 12.012.0 4 TAPPED HOLES4 TAPPED HOLES5/8-11 +.015 OVERSIZE5/8-11 +.015 OVERSIZE 11/1611/16" FULL THREAD FULL THREADON 5.0ON 5.0" BOLT CIRCLE BOLT CIRCLE EXTRA-HIGH STRENGTH UNIT CHARACTERISTICS Lapp Catalog Number 315205-70 315225-70 318451-70 Ansi Technical Reference Number T.R.205 T.R.225 Dimensions Leakage Distance, Inches 15.5 15.5 17 Mechanical Values * Cantilever Strength, Upright, Pounds 2000 4000 8000 Cantilever Strength, Underhung, Pounds 2000 4000 8000 Tensile Strength, Pounds 8500 20000 28000 Torsion Strength, Inch-Pounds 7000 14000 40000 Compression Strength, Pounds 10000 20000 40000 Electrical Values Voltage Class, kV 15 15 15 Impulse Flashover, Positive, kV 125 125 125 Low Frequency Withstand, 10 Sec. Wet, kV 45 45 45 Impulse Withstand, kV 110 110 110 Radio Influence Voltage Data Test Voltage, Rms to Ground, kV 10 10 10 Maximum RIV, Microvolts at 1000 kHz 50 50 50 Weight Net Weight, Each, Pounds 18 44 52 315205-70315205-70 318451-70318451-70315225-70315225-70 B3 - LAPP # 315205-70 - INSULATOR 110KV BIL STD STRENGTH 65 ),(/' :(/'$$%&% 7 :: ),*),*   Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. TYPE WTF Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum ),(/' :(/'$&: % % $&7 ),* ),* Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum TYPE WTFR Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad 90º Transverse Pad Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. See page 125 for full current ſ ttings. CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)ABCTW WTF-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 13/16 2 0.85 WTF-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 13/16 3 1.30 WTF-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 4-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-1/2 0.75 WTF-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 5 1.70 CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AB C T W WTFR-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 0.50 WTFR-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 1.00 WTFR-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 2-1/2 1.25 WTFR-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 1-1/4 1.00 WTFR-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3 1.00 WTFR-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 4 1.35 ALUMINUM TEE CONNECTORS B3 - LAPP # 315205-70 - INSULATOR 110KV BIL STD STRENGTH 225 Aluminum alloy weldment terminal for connecting aluminum pipe to ƀ at pad. Center-formed tongues have NEMA drilling. Contact sealant is recommended for contact pad after welding. Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum Options: See Page 210 TYPE WFTC Weldment Pipe to Flat C FIG. 1 134"T C DA134" FIG. 2B CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO. PIPE SIZE (NPS) DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AB C D T WFTC-30-2B 1 3/4 4-5/8 15/16 2 5/8 3/8 0.40 WFTC-30-4A 2 4-5/8 15/16 3 5/8 3/8 0.50 WFTC-30-4B 2 5-5/8 15/16 4 1-1/8 3/8 0.60 WFTC-39-2B 1 1 4-5/8 15/16 2 5/8 3/8 0.40 WFTC-39-4A 2 4-5/8 15/16 3 5/8 3/8 0.50 WFTC-39-4B 2 5-5/8 15/16 4 1-1/8 3/8 0.60 WFTC-49-2B 1 1-1/4 4-3/4 1 2 5/8 3/8 0.80 WFTC-49-4A 2 4-3/4 1 3 5/8 3/8 0.90 WFTC-49-4B 2 5-3/4 1 4 1-1/8 3/8 1.00 WFTC-53-2B 1 1-1/2 5-1/8 1-3/8 2 5/8 1/2 1.00 WFTC-53-4A 2 5-1/8 1-3/8 3 5/8 1/2 1.00 WFTC-53-4B 2 6-1/8 1-3/8 4 1-1/8 1/2 1.25 WFTC-58-2B 1 2 5-1/4 1-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 1.25 WFTC-58-4A 2 5-1/4 1-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 1.50 WFTC-58-4B 2 6-1/4 1-1/2 4 1-1/8 7/16 1.75 WFTC-60-2B 1 2-1/2 5-7/16 1-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 1.50 WFTC-60-4A 2 5-5/16 1-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 1.70 WFTC-60-4B 2 6-1/4 1-1/2 4 1-1/8 1/2 2.10 WFTC-62-2B 1 3 5-3/4 1-3/4 2 5/8 5/8 2.40 WFTC-62-4A 2 5-3/4 1-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 2.60 WFTC-62-4B 2 6-3/4 1-3/4 4 1-1/8 5/8 2.90 WFTC-63-2B 1 3-1/2 5-3/4 1-7/8 2 5/8 3/4 2.75 WFTC-63-4A 2 5-3/4 1-7/8 3 5/8 3/4 3.00 WFTC-63-4B 2 6-7/8 1-7/8 4 1-1/8 3/4 3.50 WFTC-64-2B 1 4 5-7/8 2 2 5/8 3/4 3.00 WFTC-64-4A 2 5-7/8 2 3 5/8 3/4 3.30 WFTC-64-4B 2 6-13/16 2 4 1-1/8 15/16 3.80 WFTC-67-4A 2 5 7 2-7/8 3 5/8 1 6.20 WFTC-67-4B 2 8 2-7/8 4 1-1/8 1 6.60 WFTC-69-4B 2 6 8 2-3/4 4 1-1/8 1-1/8 8.50 ALUMINUM TERMINALS B5 - SEFCOR # WFTC-64-4A - ALUMINUM TERMINAL, WELDMENT, 4-HOLE 212 C134"FIG.3 C D D134"TA B FIG.1 FIG.2 J TYPE AFNC Straight Bolted Cable to Flat Aluminum alloy terminal with hex head clamping bolts for connecting aluminum cable to ƀ at pad. Clamping bolts have hex-stops for one-wrench installation. Side form tongues. Flat pads have NEMA drilling. Contact sealant is recommended. Wide cable ranges using reversible caps are available and are listed at the end of the table. CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO. CONDUCTOR RANGE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AAC ACSR A B C D J T AFNC-13-2B 1 #4 - 266 MCM #4 - 4/0 STR 6-1/4 3 2 5/8 1/2 5/16 1.00 AFNC-13-4A 2 6-1/4 3 3 5/8 1/2 5/16 1.20 AFNC-13-4B 2 7-1/4 3 4 1-1/8 1/2 5/16 1.40 AFNC-20-2B 1 4/0 - 500 MCM 4/0 - 397 MCM 7 3-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 3/8 1.30 AFNC-20-4A 2 7 3-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 3/8 1.45 AFNC-20-4B 2 7-3/4 3-1/2 4 1-1/8 1/2 3/8 1.50 AFNC-24-2B 1 350 - 650 MCM 336 - 556 MCM 7-3/8 4 2 5/8 1/2 3/8 1.50 AFNC-24-4A 2 7-1/4 4 3 5/8 1/2 3/8 1.60 AFNC-24-4B 2 8 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 3/8 1.70 AFNC-34-2B 1 556 - 1000 MCM 477 - 795 MCM 7-3/8 4 2 5/8 1/2 1/2 1.70 AFNC-34-4A 2 7-1/2 4 3 5/8 1/2 3/8 1.80 AFNC-34-4B 2 8-1/2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 3/8 2.00 AFNC-39-2B 1 900 - 1300 MCM 715 - 1113 MCM 7-7/8 4-1/4 2 5/8 1/2 1/2 2.30 AFNC-39-4A 2 7-7/8 4-1/4 3 5/8 1/2 5/8 2.40 AFNC-39-4B 2 9 4-1/4 4 1-1/8 1/2 5/8 2.50 AFNC-43-2B 1 1250 - 1600 MCM 1113 - 1431 MCM 8 4-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 1/2 3.10 AFNC-43-4A 2 8 4-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 1/2 3.20 AFNC-43-4B 2 9 4-1/2 4 1-1/8 5/8 5/8 3.30 AFNC-46-2B 1 1250 - 1800 MCM 1113-1590 MCM 8-1/2 4-3/4 2 5/8 5/8 5/8 3.30 AFNC-46-4A 2 7-7/8 4-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 1/2 3.40 AFNC-46-4B 2 9-3/4 4-3/4 4 1-1/8 5/8 5/8 3.50 AFNC-49-2B 1 1500 - 2000 MCM 1272 - 1590 MCM 8-1/2 4-3/4 2 5/8 5/8 5/8 3.30 AFNC-49-4A 2 8-3/4 4-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 5/8 3.40 AFNC-49-4B 2 9-1/2 4-3/4 4 1-1/8 5/8 5/8 3.50 AFNC-56-4B 3 2000 - 3500 MCM 2034 - 3064 MCM 10-5/8 6 4 1-1/8 5/8 3/4 6.00 AFNC-1139-2B 1 4/0 - 1300 MCM 4/0 - 1113 MCM 7-7/8 4-1/4 2 5/8 1/2 1/2 2.30 AFNC-1139-4A 2 7-7/8 4-1/4 3 5/8 1/2 5/8 2.40 AFNC-1139-4B 2 9 4-1/4 4 1-1/8 1/2 1/2 2.50 AFNC-3653-4B 2 1100 - 2500 MCM 1113 - 2300 MCM 9-1/8 4 4 1-1/8 5/8 3/4 4.20 Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum Hardware: Aluminum Alloy Options: See Page 210 ALUMINUM TERMINALS B6 - SEFCOR # AFNC-3653-4B, ALUMINUM TERMINAL, CABLE TO FLAT, FOR AAC 225 Aluminum alloy weldment terminal for connecting aluminum pipe to ƀ at pad. Center-formed tongues have NEMA drilling. Contact sealant is recommended for contact pad after welding. Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum Options: See Page 210 TYPE WFTC Weldment Pipe to Flat C FIG. 1 134"T C DA134" FIG. 2B CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO. PIPE SIZE (NPS) DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AB C D T WFTC-30-2B 1 3/4 4-5/8 15/16 2 5/8 3/8 0.40 WFTC-30-4A 2 4-5/8 15/16 3 5/8 3/8 0.50 WFTC-30-4B 2 5-5/8 15/16 4 1-1/8 3/8 0.60 WFTC-39-2B 1 1 4-5/8 15/16 2 5/8 3/8 0.40 WFTC-39-4A 2 4-5/8 15/16 3 5/8 3/8 0.50 WFTC-39-4B 2 5-5/8 15/16 4 1-1/8 3/8 0.60 WFTC-49-2B 1 1-1/4 4-3/4 1 2 5/8 3/8 0.80 WFTC-49-4A 2 4-3/4 1 3 5/8 3/8 0.90 WFTC-49-4B 2 5-3/4 1 4 1-1/8 3/8 1.00 WFTC-53-2B 1 1-1/2 5-1/8 1-3/8 2 5/8 1/2 1.00 WFTC-53-4A 2 5-1/8 1-3/8 3 5/8 1/2 1.00 WFTC-53-4B 2 6-1/8 1-3/8 4 1-1/8 1/2 1.25 WFTC-58-2B 1 2 5-1/4 1-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 1.25 WFTC-58-4A 2 5-1/4 1-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 1.50 WFTC-58-4B 2 6-1/4 1-1/2 4 1-1/8 7/16 1.75 WFTC-60-2B 1 2-1/2 5-7/16 1-1/2 2 5/8 1/2 1.50 WFTC-60-4A 2 5-5/16 1-1/2 3 5/8 1/2 1.70 WFTC-60-4B 2 6-1/4 1-1/2 4 1-1/8 1/2 2.10 WFTC-62-2B 1 3 5-3/4 1-3/4 2 5/8 5/8 2.40 WFTC-62-4A 2 5-3/4 1-3/4 3 5/8 5/8 2.60 WFTC-62-4B 2 6-3/4 1-3/4 4 1-1/8 5/8 2.90 WFTC-63-2B 1 3-1/2 5-3/4 1-7/8 2 5/8 3/4 2.75 WFTC-63-4A 2 5-3/4 1-7/8 3 5/8 3/4 3.00 WFTC-63-4B 2 6-7/8 1-7/8 4 1-1/8 3/4 3.50 WFTC-64-2B 1 4 5-7/8 2 2 5/8 3/4 3.00 WFTC-64-4A 2 5-7/8 2 3 5/8 3/4 3.30 WFTC-64-4B 2 6-13/16 2 4 1-1/8 15/16 3.80 WFTC-67-4A 2 5 7 2-7/8 3 5/8 1 6.20 WFTC-67-4B 2 8 2-7/8 4 1-1/8 1 6.60 WFTC-69-4B 2 6 8 2-3/4 4 1-1/8 1-1/8 8.50 ALUMINUM TERMINALS B7 - SEFCOR # WFTC-60-4A - ALUMINUM TERMINAL, WELDMENT, 2.5IN NPS, 4-HOLE 6 / 0 %& - + 6 TYPE ASTI Horizontal Bolted Pipe to Insulator Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum Clamping Hardware: Aluminum Alloy Mounting Hardware: Galvanized Steel Aluminum alloy support for aluminum pipe. Slip or rigid ſ t is provided by rotating cap members. Each cap member is provided with a static spring. Hardware supplied for CAP mounting. For PIN mounting, add sufſ x (P) to catalog number. Example: ASTI-63-3P CATALOG NUMBER PIPE SIZE (NPS) BOLTCIRCLE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)HLM S J ASTI-30-3 3/4 3 2 8 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.25 ASTI-30-5 5 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 11/16 x 1 1/2 4.60 ASTI-39-3 1 3 2 7-1/2 1-1/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.25 ASTI-39-5 5 2-1/4 9-3/4 1-1/8 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 2.85 ASTI-49-3 1-1/4 3 2-1/4 7-1/8 1-3/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.05 ASTI-49-5 5 2-1/4 9-1/2 1-3/8 11/16 x 1-1/8 1/2 3.90 ASTI-53-3 1-1/2 3 2-1/2 7-1/8 1-3/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.60 ASTI-53-5 5 2-1/2 9-5/8 1-3/8 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 3.40 ASTI-58-3 2 3 2-3/4 7-3/8 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.05 ASTI-58-5 5 2-3/4 9-7/8 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 3.65 ASTI-60-3 2-1/2 3 3-1/8 7-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.90 ASTI-60-5 5 3-1/8 9-5/8 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 4.50 ASTI-60-7 7 3-1/8 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 1/2 5.80 ASTI-62-3 3 3 3-5/8 8-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 6.20 ASTI-62-5 5 3-5/8 9-3/4 1-1/2 11/16 x 15/16 5/8 7.00 ASTI-62-7 7 3-5/8 11-3/4 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 8.60 ASTI-63-3 3-1/2 3 4 8-1/4 1-1/2 9/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 6.20 ASTI-63-5 5 4 9-3/4 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 7.00 ASTI-63-7 7 4 12-1/2 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-1/8 5/8 8.50 ASTI-64-3 4 3 4-1/2 8-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 6.67 ASTI-64-5 5 4-1/2 10 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 7.80 ASTI-64-7 7 4-1/2 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 9.35 ASTI-67-3 5 3 5 8-3/4 1-1/2 9/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 8.55 ASTI-67-5 5 5 10 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 9.55 ASTI-67-7 7 5 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 12.10 ASTI-69-3 6 3 5-5/8 10-1/4 1-3/4 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 12.00 ASTI-69-5 5 5-5/8 10-1/4 1-3/4 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 12.60 ASTI-69-7 7 5-1/2 12-1/4 1-3/4 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 14.40 ALUMINUM BUS SUPPORTS B8 - SEFCOR # ASTI-64-3 - ALUMINUM BUS SUPPORT, 4IN IPS, W HW 6 / 0 %& - + 6 TYPE ASTI Horizontal Bolted Pipe to Insulator Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum Clamping Hardware: Aluminum Alloy Mounting Hardware: Galvanized Steel Aluminum alloy support for aluminum pipe. Slip or rigid ſ t is provided by rotating cap members. Each cap member is provided with a static spring. Hardware supplied for CAP mounting. For PIN mounting, add sufſ x (P) to catalog number. Example: ASTI-63-3P CATALOG NUMBER PIPE SIZE (NPS) BOLTCIRCLE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)HLM S J ASTI-30-3 3/4 3 2 8 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.25 ASTI-30-5 5 2 2-1/4 2-1/4 11/16 x 1 1/2 4.60 ASTI-39-3 1 3 2 7-1/2 1-1/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.25 ASTI-39-5 5 2-1/4 9-3/4 1-1/8 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 2.85 ASTI-49-3 1-1/4 3 2-1/4 7-1/8 1-3/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.05 ASTI-49-5 5 2-1/4 9-1/2 1-3/8 11/16 x 1-1/8 1/2 3.90 ASTI-53-3 1-1/2 3 2-1/2 7-1/8 1-3/8 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 2.60 ASTI-53-5 5 2-1/2 9-5/8 1-3/8 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 3.40 ASTI-58-3 2 3 2-3/4 7-3/8 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.05 ASTI-58-5 5 2-3/4 9-7/8 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 3.65 ASTI-60-3 2-1/2 3 3-1/8 7-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 1/2 3.90 ASTI-60-5 5 3-1/8 9-5/8 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 1/2 4.50 ASTI-60-7 7 3-1/8 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 1/2 5.80 ASTI-62-3 3 3 3-5/8 8-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 6.20 ASTI-62-5 5 3-5/8 9-3/4 1-1/2 11/16 x 15/16 5/8 7.00 ASTI-62-7 7 3-5/8 11-3/4 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 8.60 ASTI-63-3 3-1/2 3 4 8-1/4 1-1/2 9/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 6.20 ASTI-63-5 5 4 9-3/4 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 7.00 ASTI-63-7 7 4 12-1/2 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-1/8 5/8 8.50 ASTI-64-3 4 3 4-1/2 8-1/2 1-1/2 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 6.67 ASTI-64-5 5 4-1/2 10 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 7.80 ASTI-64-7 7 4-1/2 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 9.35 ASTI-67-3 5 3 5 8-3/4 1-1/2 9/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 8.55 ASTI-67-5 5 5 10 1-1/2 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 9.55 ASTI-67-7 7 5 12 1-1/2 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 12.10 ASTI-69-3 6 3 5-5/8 10-1/4 1-3/4 9/16 x 13/16 5/8 12.00 ASTI-69-5 5 5-5/8 10-1/4 1-3/4 11/16 x 1-1/16 5/8 12.60 ASTI-69-7 7 5-1/2 12-1/4 1-3/4 13/16 x 1-3/16 5/8 14.40 ALUMINUM BUS SUPPORTS B9 - SEFCOR # ASTI-58-3 - ALUMINUM BUS SUPPORT, 2IN IPS, W HW 65 ),(/' :(/'$$%&% 7 :: ),*),*   Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. TYPE WTF Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum ),(/' :(/'$&: % % $&7 ),* ),* Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum TYPE WTFR Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad 90º Transverse Pad Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. See page 125 for full current ſ ttings. CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)ABCTW WTF-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 13/16 2 0.85 WTF-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 13/16 3 1.30 WTF-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 4-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-1/2 0.75 WTF-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 5 1.70 CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AB C T W WTFR-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 0.50 WTFR-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 1.00 WTFR-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 2-1/2 1.25 WTFR-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 1-1/4 1.00 WTFR-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3 1.00 WTFR-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 4 1.35 ALUMINUM TEE CONNECTORS B10 - SEFCOR # WTF-6269-4A - TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM, 4IN NPS 83  ‘ TYPE GSAL2N-4 Straight Bolted Flat Pad to Stud Aluminum grounding stud for grounding aluminum ƀ at bar pads. NEMA drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended. A bronze version is also available, example: GSAL2N-4-BR. Consult manufacturer for further details or unlisted applications. Welded aluminum alloy internal end plug for pipe. Consult manufacturer for further details or unlisted applications. Add sufſ x (H) for SCH 80 pipe. Example: WEB-58H TYPE WEB Internal - Welded End Cap Casting: 356-F Aluminum CATALOG NUMBER CONDUCTOR SIZE (NPS) THICKNESS (INCHES) WEIGHT (POUNDS) WEB-49 1-1/4 3/8 0.30 WEB-53 1-1/2 3/8 0.30 WEB-58 2 3/8 0.30 WEB-60 2-1/2 1/2 0.50 WEB-62 3 1/2 0.40 WEB-63 3-1/2 1/2 0.50 WEB-64 4 5/8 0.65 WEB-67 5 5/8 1.25 WEB-69 6 3/8 2.00 WEB-71 8 3/8 3.50 T Casting: 356-T6 Aluminum ALUMINUM MISCELLANEOUS B11 - SEFCOR # WEB-64H - END PLUG, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 4IN NPS 65 ),(/' :(/'$$%&% 7 :: ),*),*   Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. TYPE WTF Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum ),(/' :(/'$&: % % $&7 ),* ),* Castings: 356-T6 Aluminum TYPE WTFR Weldment Tee Pipe Main to Flat Pad 90º Transverse Pad Aluminum alloy weldment, range taking tee, for connecting aluminum pipe main to ƀ at pad. NEMA hole drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended on pad after welding. Pad is ſ nished on both sides. NOTE: Not intended for full current application. See page 125 for full current ſ ttings. CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)ABCTW WTF-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 13/16 2 0.85 WTF-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 13/16 3 1.30 WTF-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 4-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-1/2 0.75 WTF-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3-1/2 1.00 WTF-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 5 1.70 CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO.PIPE SIZE DIMENSIONS - INCHES WEIGHT (POUNDS)AB C T W WTFR-3960-2B 1 1” - 2-1/2” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 0.50 WTFR-3960-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 2-3/4 1.00 WTFR-3960-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 1/2 2-1/2 1.25 WTFR-6269-2B 1 3” - 6” NPS 3 2 5/8 3/4 1-1/4 1.00 WTFR-6269-4A 2 3 3 5/8 3/4 3 1.00 WTFR-6269-4B 2 4 4 1-1/8 3/4 4 1.35 ALUMINUM TEE CONNECTORS B12 - SEFCOR #WTF-3960-2B - TEE CONNECTOR, ALUMINUM, 2IN NPS 83  ‘ TYPE GSAL2N-4 Straight Bolted Flat Pad to Stud Aluminum grounding stud for grounding aluminum ƀ at bar pads. NEMA drilling is standard. Contact sealant is recommended. A bronze version is also available, example: GSAL2N-4-BR. Consult manufacturer for further details or unlisted applications. Welded aluminum alloy internal end plug for pipe. Consult manufacturer for further details or unlisted applications. Add sufſ x (H) for SCH 80 pipe. Example: WEB-58H TYPE WEB Internal - Welded End Cap Casting: 356-F Aluminum CATALOG NUMBER CONDUCTOR SIZE (NPS) THICKNESS (INCHES) WEIGHT (POUNDS) WEB-49 1-1/4 3/8 0.30 WEB-53 1-1/2 3/8 0.30 WEB-58 2 3/8 0.30 WEB-60 2-1/2 1/2 0.50 WEB-62 3 1/2 0.40 WEB-63 3-1/2 1/2 0.50 WEB-64 4 5/8 0.65 WEB-67 5 5/8 1.25 WEB-69 6 3/8 2.00 WEB-71 8 3/8 3.50 T Casting: 356-T6 Aluminum ALUMINUM MISCELLANEOUS B13 - SEFCOR # WEB-58 - END PLUG, ALUMINUM WELDMENT, 2IN NPS SC 6 ANDERSON™ HUBBELL® POWER SYSTEMS FARGO® October 2016 TEES BOLTED ALUMINUM TUBING MAIN TO TWO CABLE TAP Aluminum.alloy,.tubing.to.double.cable,.tee.for.connecting. aluminum-aluminum.or.aluminum-copper.conductor.com- binations..Clamping.bolts.have.hex-stops.for.one-wrench. installation..Contact.sealant.is.recommended. Material:.Castings—356-T6.aluminum.alloy .Hardware—aluminum.alloy ALUMINUM ATT2C CATALOG NUMBER CONDUCTOR RANGE DIMENSIONS INCHES (MM)APPROX. WT. EACH LBS. (KG) TUBING MAIN IPS/EHIPS CABLE TAP AAC ACSR DIA.C A W J *ATT2C066 3/4 #4-250 MCM #4-4/0 Str..232-.575 (5.89-14.6) 4-5/8 (117.48) 3 (76.2) 2-1/2 (63.5) 1/2 (12.7) 2.2 (1.0) *ATT2C106 1 #4-250 MCM #4-4/0 Str..232-.575 (5.89-14.6) 4-3/4 (120.65) 3 (76.2) 2-3/4 (69.85) 1/2 (12.7) 2.3 (1.04) ATT2C149 1-1/2 350-600 MCM 336.4-477 MCM .681-.893 (17.3-22.68) 5-1/4 (133.35) 3-1/4 (82.55) 3-1/4 (82.55) 1/2 (12.7) 4.2 (1.90) ATT2C207 2 250-400 MCM 4/0-336.4 MCM .563-.744 (14.3-18.9) 5-1/4 (133.35) 3 (76.2) 3-1/2 (88.9) 1/2 (12.7) 3.7 (1.68) ATT2C209 2 350-600 MCM 336.4-477 MCM .681-.893 (17.3-22.68) 5-1/2 (139.7) 3-1/4 (82.55) 3-1/2 (88.9) 1/2 (12.7) 3.9 (1.77) ATT2C2011 2 600-900 MCM 556.5-795 MCM .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 5-3/4 (146.05) 3-1/2 (88.9) 3-1/2 (88.9) 1/2 (12.7) 5.2 (2.36) ATT2C2013 2 900-1250 MCM 715.5-1113 MCM 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 6 (152.4) 3-3/4 (95.25) 3-1/2 (88.9) 1/2 (12.7) 6.1 (2.77) ATT2C247 2-1/2 250-400 MCM 4/0-336.4 MCM .563-.744 (14.3-18.9) 5-1/2 (139.7) 3 (76.2) 3-3/4 (95.25) 1/2 (12.7) 4.2 (1.90) ATT2C249 2-1/2 350-600 MCM 336.4-477 MCM .681-.893 (17.3-22.68) 5-3/4 (146.05) 3-1/4 (82.55) 3-3/4 (95.25) 1/2 (12.7) 5.1 (2.31) ATT2C2411 2-1/2 600-900 MCM 556.5-795 MCM .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 6 (152.4) 3-1/2 (88.9) 3-3/4 (95.25) 1/2 (12.7) 6.3 (2.86) ATT2C2413 2-1/2 900-1250 MCM 715.5-1113 MCM 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 6-1/4 (158.75) 3-3/4 (95.25) 3-3/4 (95.25) 1/2 (12.7) 6.6 (2.99) ATT2C309 3 350-600 MCM 336.4-477 MCM .681-.893 (17.3-22.68) 6-1/8 (155.58) 3-1/4 (82.55) 4 (101.6) 1/2 (12.7) 5.1 (2.31) ATT2C3011 3 600-900 MCM 556.5-795 MCM .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 6-3/8 (161.92) 3-1/2 (88.9) 4 (101.6) 1/2 (12.7) 6.8 (3.08) ATT2C3013 3 900-1250 MCM 715.5-1113 MCM 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 6-5/8 (168.28) 3-3/4 (95.25) 4 (101.6) 1/2 (12.7) 7.5 (3.40) ATT2C3015 3 1250-1600 MCM 1113-1272 MCM 1.289-1.459 (32.74-37.06) 7-1/4 (184.15) 4-1/4 (107.95) 4 (101.6) 5/8 (15.88) 8.6 (3.9) ATT2C3411 3-1/2 600-900 MCM 556.5-795 MCM .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 6-5/8 (168.28) 3-1/2 (88.9) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1/2 (12.7) 6.5 (2.95) ATT2C3413 3-1/2 900-1250 MCM 715.5-1113 MCM 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 6-7/8 (174.62) 3-3/4 (95.25) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1/2 (12.7) 8.3 (3.76) ATT2C3415 3-1/2 1250-1600 MCM 1113-1272 MCM 1.289-1.459 (32.74-37.06) 7-1/2 (190.5) 4-1/4 (107.95) 4-1/4 (107.95) 5/8 (15.88) 8.9 (4.04) ATT2C4011 4 600-900 MCM 556.5-795 MCM .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 6-7/8 (174.62) 3-1/2 (88.9) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1/2 (12.7) 6.7 (3.04) ATT2C4013 4 900-1250 MCM 715.5-1113 MCM 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 7-1/8 (180.98) 3-3/4 (95.25) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1/2 (12.7) 8.4 (3.81) ATT2C4015 4 1250-1600 MCM 1113-1272 MCM 1.289-1.459 (32.74-37.06) 7-7/8 (200.02) 4-1/4 (107.95) 4-1/4 (107.95) 5/8 (15.88) 9.3 (4.22) ATT2C4016 4 1500-2000 MCM 1272-1590 MCM 1.382-1.632 (35.1-41.45) 8-1/4 (209.55) 4-1/2 (114.3) 4-1/4 (107.95) 5/8 (15.88) 10.5 (4.76) Product Data & Conductor Size * Tap connections are furnished with reversible cable caps. B14 - HPS # ATT2C4016 - TEE BOLTED 4IN TUBE TO 2-CABLE 2000KCMIL SA 2 ANDERSON™ HUBBELL® POWER SYSTEMS FARGO® October 2016 Aluminum.alloy.terminal.for.connecting.two.aluminum.cables.to. aluminum.or.copper.flat.pad.combinations..Side.formed.tongues. are.standard.to.allow.clearance.for.flush.mounting..Clamping.bolts. have.hex-stops.for.one-wrench.installation..Tongue.holes.have. NEMA.spacing..Contact.sealant.is.recommended. Material:.Castings—356-T6.aluminum.alloy .Clamping Hardware—aluminum.alloy ALUMINUM A2CF CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO. CONDUCTOR RANGE DIMENSIONS INCHES (MM)APPROX. WT. EACH LBS. (KG)AAC ACSR CABLE DIA. INCHES (MM)L A K T W B J *A2CF6B2 1 #4-250 MCM #4-4/0 .232–.575 (5.89-14.6) 6-1/8 (155.58) 3 (76.2) 5/8 (15.88) 15/32 (11.91) 2 (50.8) 2-9/16 (65.09) 1/2 (12.7) 1.7 (.8) *A2CF6C 2 6-1/8 (155.58) 3 (76.2) 5/8 (15.88) 15/32 (11.91) 3 (76.2) 2-9/16 (65.09) 1/2 (12.7) 2.0 (.9) A2CF7B2 1 250-400 MCM 4/0-336 .563-.744 (14.3-18.9) 6-1/8 (155.58) 3 (76.2) 5/8 (15.88) 1/2 (12.7) 2 (50.8) 2-9/16 (65.09) 1/2 (12.7) 2.1 (1.0) A2CF7C 2 6-1/4 (158.75) 3 (76.2) 5/8 (15.88) 9/16 (14.29) 3 (76.2) 2-13/16 (71.44) 1/2 (12.7) 2.3 (1.04) A2CF9B2 1 350-600 MCM 336-477 .681-.893 (17.3-22.68) 6-3/8 (161.92) 3-1/4 (82.55) 5/8 (15.88) 9/16 (14.29) 2 (50.8) 2-13/16 (71.44) 1/2 (12.7) 2.4 (1.1) A2CF9C 2 6-3/8 (161.92) 3-1/4 (82.55) 5/8 (15.88) 9/16 (14.29) 3 (76.2) 2-13/16 (71.44) 1/2 (12.7) 2.6 (1.2) A2CF11B2 1 600-900 MCM 556-795 .870-1.108 (22.1-28.14) 6-5/8 (168.28) 3-1/2 (88.9) 5/8 (15.88) 5/8 (15.88) 2 (50.8) 3-1/16 (77.79) 1/2 (12.7) 2.6 (1.2) A2CF11C 2 6-3/4 (171.45) 3-1/2 (88.9) 5/8 (15.88) 5/8 (15.88) 3 (76.2) 3-1/16 (77.79) 1/2 (12.7) 2.9 (1.3) A2CF11D 2 7-3/4 (196.85) 3-1/2 (88.9) 1-1/8 (28.58) 5/8 (15.88) 4 (101.6) 3-1/16 (77.79) 1/2 (12.7) 3.2 (1.45) A2CF13C 2 900-1250 MCM 715-1113 1.081-1.293 (27.46-32.84) 7 (177.8) 3-3/4 (95.25) 5/8 (15.88) 5/8 (15.88) 3 (76.2) 3-5/16 (84.14) 1/2 (12.7) 3.3 (1.5) A2CF13D 2 8 (203.2) 3-3/4 (95.25) 1-1/8 (28.58) 5/8 (15.88) 4 (101.6) 3-5/16 (84.14) 1/2 (12.7) 3.6 (1.7) A2CF15C 2 1250-1600 MCM 1113-1272 1.289-1.459 (32.74-37.06) 7-1/2 (190.5) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1-1/8 (28.58) 21/32 (16.67) 3 (76.2) 3-13/16 (96.84) 5/8 (15.88) 5.2 (2.4) A2CF15D 2 8-5/8 (219.08) 4-1/4 (107.95) 1-1/8 (28.58) 5/8 (15.88) 4 (101.6) 3-13/16 (96.84) 5/8 (15.88) 5.8 (2.6) A2CF16C 2 1500-2000 MCM 1272-1780 1.382-1.632 (35.1-41.45) 7-5/8 (193.68) 4-1/2 (114.3) 1-1/8 (28.58) 21/32 (16.67) 3 (76.2) 4 1/16 (103.19) 5/8 (15.88) 6.0 (2.7) A2CF16D 2 8-7/8 (225.42) 4-1/2 (114.3) 1-1/8 (28.58) 7/8 (22.22) 4 (101.6) 4 1/16 (103.19) 5/8 (15.88) 6.9 (3.1) A2CF18D 2 2000-2500 MCM 2034-2312 1.632-1.824 (41.45-46.33) 8-3/4 (222.25) 4-3/8 (111.12) 1-1/8 (28.58) 1 (25.4) 4 (101.6) 4 1/16 (103.19) 5/8 (15.88) 7.9 (4.1) * Furnished with reversible cable caps. Product Data & Conductor Size TERMINALS BOLTED ALUMINUM STRAIGHT BOLT LUG, TWO CABLES TO FLAT B15 - HPS # A2F18D - TERMINAL BOLTED 2-CABLE TO FLAT 4-HOLE L.H. Dottie Company 6131 Garfield Avenue Commerce, California 90040 Call: 323-725-1000 • Fax: 323-721-0000 All Categories > Fasteners and Hardware > Cap Screws > 18-8 Stainless Steel Cap Screws > Item # MBS5162 Item # MBS5162, (MBS5162) 18-8 Stainless Steel Cap Screw Stainless steel hex head cap screws are used in non-critical application with nuts and washers. Length is determined from the base of the fastener head. 18-8 Stainless steel is used where corrosion resistance is required. 18% chromium, 8% nickel. UPC Code 781002697541 Category Number 4010 Price per Quantity 100 Head Size 1/2 in. Style/Type Hexagonal Head Material 18-8 Stainless Steel Diameter 5/16 in. Product Specifications | Packaging Specifications Product Specifications Page 1 of 2Item # MBS5162, (MBS5162) 18-8 Stainless Steel Cap Screw On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020http://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/18-8-stainless-steel-cap-screws/mbs5162B30 - LH DOTTIE # MBS5162, 1_2IN SS BOLT Operating Enviroment Corrosion Resistance Thread Count 18 Length 2 in. Package Type IB642 Unit Quantity 100 Master Quantity 1000 Unit (UM)C Package Length 6.14 in. Package Width 4.72 in. Package Height 2.9100 in. Package Weight 5.1000 lb. United Nations Standard Products & Services Code (UNSPSC) 31161501 Packaging Specifications Page 2 of 2Item # MBS5162, (MBS5162) 18-8 Stainless Steel Cap Screw On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020http://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/18-8-stainless-steel-cap-screws/mbs5162B30 - LH DOTTIE # MBS5162, 1_2IN SS BOLT L.H. Dottie Company 6131 Garfield Avenue Commerce, California 90040 Call: 323-725-1000 • Fax: 323-721-0000 All Categories > Fasteners and Hardware > Washers > Flat Washers > Stainless Steel Flat Washers > Item # FWS12 Item # FWS12, (FWS12) Stainless Steel Flat Washer Flat Washers - general use; Stainless Steel - corrosion and chemical resistant UPC Code 781002698920 Category Number 4010 Price per Quantity 100 Washer Features Corrosion Resistant Bolt Size 1/2 in. Material 18-8 Stainless Steel Inside Diameter 9/16 in. Outside Diameter 1-3/8 in. Product Specifications | Packaging Specifications Product Specifications Page 1 of 2Item # FWS12, (FWS12) Stainless Steel Flat Washer On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020https://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/stainless-steel-flat-washers/fws12B31 - LH DOTTIE # FWS12, 1_2IN SS WASHER Package Type Invincibox 2 Unit Quantity 50 Sleeve Quantity 250 Master Quantity 2000 Unit (UM)C Package Length 1.5000 in. Package Width 2.8000 in. Package Height 3.5 in. Package Weight 0.850 lb. United Nations Standard Products & Services Code (UNSPSC) 31161807 Packaging Specifications Page 2 of 2Item # FWS12, (FWS12) Stainless Steel Flat Washer On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020https://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/stainless-steel-flat-washers/fws12B31 - LH DOTTIE # FWS12, 1_2IN SS WASHER 1–131 HOW DO YOU PREFER TO BUY? Local Store / Personal Service / Inventory Solutions / fastenal.com FastenersLock Washers, Belleville Washers Lock Washers High Alloy Split Lock Washers These Heavy-duty zinc-yellow- chromate washers are designed for tough applications. Use primarily with Grade 8 nut and bolt assemblies. Yellow Zinc Nominal Size Part No. 1/4" 33891 5/16" 33892 3/8" 33893 7/16" 33894 1/2" 33895 9/16" 33896 5/8" 33897 High Collar Lock Washers These washers are specially designed for use with socket head cap screws and where there are space limitations. The smaller outer diameter accommodates confined areas, while the increased thickness sustains the washers overall locking effectiveness. Plain Zinc Nominal Size Part No.Part No. #4 0152664 0149225 #5 0152665 - #6 33682 0129164 #8 33683 0129165 #10 33684 0129166 #12 33685 0129167 1/4"33686 0129168 5/16"33687 0129169 3/8"33688 0129170 7/16"33689 0129171 1/2"33690 0129172 9/16"33691 0129173 5/8"33692 0129174 3/4"33693 0129175 7/8"33694 0129176 1"33695 0129177 1-1/8"33696 0142100 1-1/4"33697 0129178 1-3/8"33698 0129179 1-1/2"33699 0129180 1-3/4"- 0142104 2"- 0142105 Toothed Lock Washers Internal tooth lock washers work best with small screw heads. Use them to prevent snagging or scratching and where appearance warrants that the teeth be hidden. Teeth lock into screw head or nut to prevent loosening. Style - External Tooth Zinc Yellow Zinc Black Oxide Nominal Size Part No. Part No. Part No. #2 0149187 - #3 33730 -- #4 33731 -- #5 33732 -- #6 33733 0149544 0149146 #8 33734 0149545 0149147 #10 33735 0149546 0149148 #12 33736 0149547 - 1/4"33737 0149548 0149150 5/16"33738 0149549 - 3/8"33739 0149550 - 7/16"33740 -- 1/2"33741 0149551 - 9/16"33742 -- 5/8"33743 0149552 - 3/4"33744 -- 7/8"33745 -- 1"33746 -- 1-1/8" 33747 -- 1-1/4" 33748 -- Style - Internal Tooth Zinc Yellow Zinc Black Oxide Nominal Size Part No. Part No. Part No. #2 33703 0149557 #3 33704 -- #4 33705 0149558 - #5 33706 -- #6 33707 0149559 0149153 #8 33708 0149560 0149154 #10 33709 0149561 0149155 #12 33710 -- 1/4"33711 0149563 0149157 5/16"33712 0149564 - 3/8"33713 0149565 - 7/16"33714 -- 1/2"33715 0149566 - 9/16"33716 -- 5/8"33717 0149567 - 3/4"33718 -- 7/8"33719 -- 1"33720 -- 1-1/8" 33721 -- 1-1/4" 33722 -- 1-1/2" 33724 -- Internal / External Combo Tooth Lock Washers Washers feature a large bearing surface for spanning oversize and elongated holes. Teeth on both sides allow the washers to also be used as an insert between two adjustable pieces to maintain their position after original setting. Zinc Nominal Size Part No. #6 0149193 #8 0149194 3/16"33758 1/4"33760 5/16"33761 3/8"33762 7/16"33763 1/2"33764 5/8"33765 3/4"33766 Countersunk External Tooth Washers Zinc plated washers feature external teeth angled at 82˚ for use with flat and oval head screws in countersunk holes. The teeth lock into the screw head to prevent loosening. Zinc Nominal Size Part No. #4 0149189 #6 0149190 #8 0149191 #10 33770 #12 0149192 1/4"33772 5/16"33773 3/8"33774 1/2"33776 Belleville Washers Series AM Disc Springs A disc spring (sometimes called a "Belleville washer" after the inventor) consists primarily of a convex disc supported at the outer periphery by one force and an opposing force on the center of the disc. Disc springs are used singly, or in stacks, to achieve a desired load and travel. The advantage of a disc spring is that it generates high force in a very short spring length and with minimal movement when compressed. All discs are preset so that they will not significantly relax under load over time. AM Series are precision springs geared to the metric community and manufactured utilizing DIN 2092 and DIN 2093 as guidelines. AM series springs are designed to meet high performance requirements of dynamic spring applications. They are typically manufactured from High Carbon or Alloy steel; AISI C1075 or 6150 material. Plain Nominal Size Overall Height Inner Diameter Thickness Outer Diameter Part No. 1/8" 0.0216" 0.126" 0.012" 0.315" 0125746 1/8" 0.0236" 0.126" 0.016" 0.315" 0125747 3/16" 0.0177" 0.165" 0.008" 0.315" 0125748 3/16" 0.0236" 0.165" 0.016" 0.315" 0125750 3/16" 0.0354" 0.205" 0.020" 0.472" 0125752 3/16" 0.0374" 0.205" 0.024" 0.472" 0125753 3/16" 0.0394" 0.165" 0.024" 0.472" 0125751 1/4" 0.0315" 0.244" 0.014" 0.492" 0125755 1/4" 0.0374" 0.244" 0.024" 0.472" 0125754 1/4" 0.0394" 0.244" 0.016" 0.709" 0125765 1/4" 0.0394" 0.244" 0.028" 0.492" 0125757 5/16" 0.0354" 0.283" 0.020" 0.551" 0125758 5/16" 0.0354" 0.323" 0.016" 0.630" 0125761 5/16" 0.0413" 0.323" 0.024" 0.630" 0125762 5/16" 0.0433" 0.283" 0.032" 0.551" 0125759 5/16" 0.0453" 0.323" 0.028" 0.630" 0125763 5/16" 0.0492" 0.323" 0.028" 0.709" 0125766 5/16" 0.0492" 0.323" 0.035" 0.630" 0125764 5/16" 0.0512" 0.323" 0.032" 0.709" 0125767 5/16" 0.0571" 0.323" 0.035" 0.787" 0125770 5/16" 0.0669" 0.323" 0.039" 0.906" 0125778 3/8" 0.0413" 0.362" 0.018" 0.709" 0125768 3/8" 0.0472" 0.362" 0.028" 0.709" 0125769 3/8" 0.0531" 0.402" 0.032" 0.787" 0125771 3/8" 0.0610" 0.402" 0.039" 0.787" 0125772 3/8" 0.0610" 0.402" 0.043" 0.787" 0125773 3/8" 0.0669" 0.402" 0.039" 0.906" 0125779 3/8" 0.0689" 0.402" 0.049" 0.787" 0125774 3/8" 0.0709" 0.402" 0.059" 0.787" 0125775 3/8" 0.0886" 0.402" 0.059"1.100" 0125785 7/16" 0.0551" 0.441" 0.024" 0.886" 0125776 7/16" 0.0689" 0.441" 0.049" 0.886" 0125777 1/2" 0.0630" 0.480" 0.028" 0.984" 0125782 1/2" 0.0630" 0.480" 0.035" 0.984" 0125783 1/2" 0.0728" 0.480" 0.049" 0.906" 0125780 1/2" 0.0787" 0.480" 0.059" 0.906" 0125781 1/2" 0.0807" 0.480" 0.059" 0.984" 0125784 1/2" 0.0827" 0.480" 0.039"1.240" 0125792 1/2" 0.0827" 0.480" 0.049"1.100" 0125786 1/2" 0.0886" 0.480" 0.059"1.100" 0125787 1/2" 0.0984" 0.480" 0.059"1.340" 0125796 9/16" 0.0709" 0.559" 0.031"1.100" 0125788 9/16" 0.0709" 0.559" 0.039"1.100" 0125789 9/16" 0.0827" 0.559" 0.049"1.100" 0125790 9/16" 0.0846" 0.559" 0.059"1.100" 0125791 9/16" 0.0945" 0.563" 0.049"1.340" 0125797 9/16" 0.1004" 0.563" 0.059"1.340" 0125798 5/8" 0.0728" 0.642" 0.031"1.240" 0125793 5/8" 0.0846" 0.642" 0.049"1.240" 0125794 5/8" 0.0965" 0.642" 0.069"1.240" 0125795 5/8" 0.1122" 0.642" 0.079"1.340" 0125799 3/4" 0.0886" 0.720" 0.049"1.400" 0125800 3/4" 0.1102" 0.720" 0.079"1.400" 0125801 3/4" 0.1240" 0.720" 0.079"1.570" 0125802 3/4" 0.1378" 0.724" 0.079"1.970" 0125810 13/16" 0.1043" 0.803" 0.059"1.570" 0125804 13/16" 0.1220" 0.803" 0.079"1.570" 0125805 Yellow Zinc Nominal Size Part No. 3/4" 33898 7/8" 33899 1"33900 1-3/4" 33905 1-7/8" 33906 2"33907 B32 - FASTENALL # 0125782, 1_2IN BELLEVILLE SS WASHER L.H. Dottie Company 6131 Garfield Avenue Commerce, California 90040 Call: 323-725-1000 • Fax: 323-721-0000 All Categories > Item # HNS12 Item # HNS12, (HNS12) 18-8 Stainless Steel Hexagonal Machine Nut Hex machine screw nuts are for screws smaller than 1/4" diameter. Finished hex nuts are heavier (thicker) and are furnished in sizes 1/4" and up. UPC Code 781002697923 Category Number 4010 Price per Quantity 100 Material 18-8 Stainless Steel Diameter 1/2 in. Thread Count 13 Product Specifications | Packaging Specifications Product Specifications Packaging Specifications Page 1 of 2Item # HNS12, (HNS12) 18-8 Stainless Steel Hexagonal Machine Nut On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020https://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/hexagonal-machine-nuts/hns12B33 - LH DOTTIE # HNS12, 1_2IN SS NUT Package Type Invincibox 2 Unit Quantity 25 Sleeve Quantity 125 Master Quantity 1000 Unit (UM)C Package Length 1.5000 in. Package Width 2.8000 in. Package Height 3.5 in. Package Weight 0.950 lb. United Nations Standard Products & Services Code (UNSPSC) 31161727 Page 2 of 2Item # HNS12, (HNS12) 18-8 Stainless Steel Hexagonal Machine Nut On L. H. Dottie Co. 1/22/2020https://catalog.lhdottie.com/printitem/all-categories/hexagonal-machine-nuts/hns12B33 - LH DOTTIE # HNS12, 1_2IN SS NUT C1 - CANTEX # A53EA12- 4IN sch. 80, with belled end C2 - Cantex # 5221022, RNMC Elbow C3 - CANTEX # A53GA12- 6IN sch. 80, with belled end C4 - Cantex # 5221045 RNMC Elbow 6in. Dia., 36 in. rad. sch. 80, with belled end EmailPrint CAD Downloads Select 2D or 3D file format Download How can we improve our Product Images? Compare Web Price  $12.61 / each 1 Add to Cart + Add to List | Shipping Weight 1.0 lbs. Country of Origin USA | Country of Origin is subject to change. Note: Product availability is real-time updated and adjusted continuously. The product will be reserved for you when you complete your order. More GRAINGER APPROVED U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvanized, 1/2"-13, 2" Thread Length Item # 20W515 Mfr. Model # 53119 1 Catalog Page # N/A UNSPSC # 31161616 Technical Specs Item U-Bolt Type Round Bend Material Low Carbon Steel Finish Hot Dipped Galvanized Thread Size 1/2"-13 Thread Length 2" Inside Length 8-3/8" Inside Width 6-3/4" Pipe Size (In.)6 Characteristics Has Coarse Rolled Threads, For Square Form Connections. Includes U-bolt, 2 Hex Nuts Plumbing Pipe, Tubing and Fittings Pipe and Tubing Accessories Pipe Hangers and Clamps U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvanized, 1/2"-13, 2" Thread Length  N Shipping Picku Available for pickup Tue. Jan 2 estimated after 8:30 AM. St. Louis Branch #688 Branch Info |Change  Page 1 of 3GRAINGER APPROVED U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvaniz... 1/27/2020https://www.grainger.com/product/GRAINGER-APPROVED-U-Bolt-20W515C5 - GRAINGER # 20W515 - 6IN GALVANIZED, U-Bolt How can we improve our Technical Specifications? Compliance and Restrictions None Alternate Products Alternate Products may not be identical in style or function to original selection. Please compare below for more information. Alternate Search Terms Fasteners (88664)U-Bolts (844)U- Bolts (844) Customers Also Purchased Compare Item # 20W514 U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvanized, 1/2"-13, 2" Thread Length GRAINGER APPROVED Web Price  $11.53 / each Compare Item # 20W516 U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvanized, 1/2"-13, 2" Thread Length GRAINGER APPROVED Web Price  $14.61 / each CADDY U Bolt With Nuts, Steel Item # 1CWJ5 Web Price  $4.50 / each PIC GAUGES Pressure Gauge Item # 54XR13 Web Price  $6.61 / each LYLE Fire Lane Sign, No Header, Recycled Aluminum, 18" ... Item # 449C54 Web Price  $26.39 / each HOSE MASTER Flexible Metal Hose Assembly, Hose Tube ... Item # 1CWB3 Web Price  $194.83 / each GRAINGER APPROVED 7/8"-9, Steel Hex Head Cap Screw, Grade 8, 6"L, Zinc ... Item # 1UY80 Clearance Price  $11.90 / pkg. of 10 Web Price $99.50 1 Add to Cart 1 Add to Cart 1 Add to Cart 1 Add to Cart 1 Add to Cart Qty Qty Qty Qty Qty  Page 2 of 3GRAINGER APPROVED U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvaniz... 1/27/2020https://www.grainger.com/product/GRAINGER-APPROVED-U-Bolt-20W515C5 - GRAINGER # 20W515 - 6IN GALVANIZED, U-Bolt Page 3 of 3GRAINGER APPROVED U-Bolt, Round Bend, Low Carbon Steel, Hot Dipped Galvaniz... 1/27/2020https://www.grainger.com/product/GRAINGER-APPROVED-U-Bolt-20W515C5 - GRAINGER # 20W515 - 6IN GALVANIZED, U-Bolt 129 T&B Conduit Fittings Liquatite®Flexible Conduit— Steel Type LA Carton Reel Reel Inside Bend Trade Size Content*Content*Content*Radius Weight (in.)Cat. No. (m)Cat. No. (m)Cat. No. (m)in. (mm) kg/30m 3/8 LA038-30 30 LA038-150 150 LA038-300 300 2.0 (50.8) 13 1/2 LA050-30 30 LA050-150 150 LA050-300 300 3.0 (76.2) 15 3/4 LA075-30 30 LA075-150 150 LA075-300 300 4.2 (106.7) 24 1 LA100-30 30 LA100-120 120 -- 5.5 (139.7) 37 1-1/4 LA125-15 15 LA125-60 60 -- 7.0 (177.8) 46 1-1/2 LA150-15 15 LA150-45 45 -- 4.5 (114.3) 47 2 LA200-15 15 LA200-30 30 -- 6.0 (152.4) 66 2-1/2 LA250-8 8 LA250-80 80 -- 8.0 (203.2) 87 3 LA300-8 8 LA300-50 50 -- 10.0 (254.0) 114 3-1/2 LA350-8 8 LA350-50 50 -- 11.0 (279.4) 140 4 LA400-8 8 LA400-30 30 -- 12.0 (304.8) 154 See Chart on p.153 for dimensions and tolerances. * See p.153 for label and packaging detail. Type LA A flexible liquidtight steel conduit which is both listed UL and certified CSA. It offers outstanding protection against wet, oily conditions and is permitted for use in exposed or concealed locations. Construction The flexible inner core is made from a spiral wound strip of heavy gauge, corrosion resistant, hot-dipped galvanized steel. The 3/8 through 1-1/4 inch trade sizes are square lock formed and include an integral bonding strip of copper that is enclosed within the convolutions throug- hout its entire length. The 1-1/2 through 4 inch trade sizes are designed with a fully interlocked strip. The liquidtight jacketing material is of a high quality, rugged, flame retardant flexible PVC compound which resists oils, mild acids and exposure to sunlight. For further information, refer to the Conduit—Chemical Resistance chart beginning on p. 156. Applications This conduit is intended for installation with Rule 12-1300 of Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part I 2002. The use of a separate bonding conductor is mandatory in accordance with CEC Rule 12-1306 for Ordinary Locations. The use of Liquidtight Flexible Conduit with sign and Outline Lighting are in accordance with CEC Rule 34-400 (2). -Listed and marked for direct burial and in poured concrete. -For containment of 600-volt and lower potential circuits -Sunlight resistant Working Temperatures -20°C to 60°C intermitting to 90°C Listing/Certification Listed. Conforms to UL Standard ANSI/UL-360 for Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit. Certified. Conforms to CSA 22.2 No. 56 for use per CEC C22.1 Section 12-1300. Standard Colours Machine tool grey, and black. Other colours available upon request. Blue is commonly used for computer room installations. See TYPE CBLA on p.130. Squarelock with filler 3/8”-1-1/4” Interlock 1-1/2”- 4” C6 - T&B # LA400 - Liquatite flexible conduit Halogen Free — Features & Benefits: • Meets UL 514B and CSA C22.2, No. 18.3 for liquid-tight fittings • Full compliance to IEC 61386-1, -23 requirements, CE Certified • Trade sizes from 3/8” to 4” (12mm to 103mm) • Straight and 90° conduit bodies • NPT Threads • Coordinated performance with T&B Liquidtight Systems Flexible Metallic Conduits • Ingress protection ratings aligned with industrial enclosures • Safe Edge®, zinc plated steel ground cones provides superior bonding • Double Bevel Sealing Ring eases assembly and insures liquid-tight performance • Revolver® grounding version with GR part number suffix — Applications: • Typical applications include raceway for industrial and commercial applications such as suspended electrical systems, corrosive environments and portable equipment, where light weight requirements must be met • Ideal for use with LTAE and LTLE aluminum LT Flexible Metallic Conduits • Used where liquid-tight flexible metallic raceway is installed in outdoor or indoor locations, and exposed to continuous or intermittent moisture • Used to positively bond flexible liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit to boxes or enclosures • Liquid-tight applications against water, oils, cutting fluids, mild acids • For use in electrical circuits up to 1,000 V • Suitable for use in Class 1 Division 2, Class 2 Division 1 & 2 Hazardous Locations per NEC® Section 500 — Construction / Material / Finish: • Trade sizes 3/8” to 4” Copper-Free Aluminum • Zinc plated steel ground cones • Thermoplastic Nylon sealing rings • Halogen Free seal rings • Aluminum Cast Locknuts with teeth for vibration resistance — Environment ratings: Working Temperature: • UL: Gen: -20 to +105°C (-4 to +221°F) • CSA: Gen: -20 to +105°C (-4 to +221°F) • IEC/CE: Gen: -25 to +105°C (-13 to +221°F) — Chemical Resistance Guide: • See Publication TDS000081 (Fittings: Aluminum & PA66 Polyamide) • See Publication TDS000117 (Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduits) — Conforms to: • UL 514B, Fittings for Cable and Conduit –File: E23018 • CSA C22.2, No. 18.3, Outlet and Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Accessories –File: LR-4484 • IEC/EN 61386-1, -23, Conduit Systems for Cable Management –EU DoC: EC-012-7187 • RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substance directive) • NEMA FB-1 (Fittings and Conduit Bodies) • JIC EGP1 (Electrical standard for GP machine tools) • JIC EMP1 (Electrical Standard for Mass Production Engineering) • Federal Specification A-A 50552 (Fittings for flexible conduit) • Federal Specification H-28 (Threads) — Ingress Protection: • Provides “Ingress Integrity” between enclosures, fittings, conduits & seals when using Series 5200AL liquid-tight fittings and T&B Liquidtight Systems LFMC • Covers all trade sizes from 3/8” to 4” (12mm to 103mm) • Ingress ratings require use of Series 5260 Seal Gaskets UL, CSA & NEMA system ingress ratings: • 5200AL UL Listed type ratings tested to UL 50E requirements with UL Listed LFMC • UL File No.: E23018 – Indoor: Type 4, 12, 13 –Outdoor: Type 3, 3R, 4 • CSA C22.2, No. 94.2: Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13 • NEMA 250: Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13 IEC system ingress ratings: • IP Ingress Protection per IEC/EN EC 60529 requirements • IEC Ingress Ratings: IP66, IP67 — Standards requirements: Designed to UL 514B and CSA C22.2, No. 18.3 test requirements including: • Assembly, Pull, Resistance, Oil spray, Polymer durability, Flammability coating thickness, Current withstand Meets all IEC/EN 61386-1, -23 standard requirements including: • Impact resistance - Code 3 Medium; 6 Joules • Tensile strength - Code 3 Medium; 500 N/2 min. • Lower and upper temperatures • IP protection against solid and liquids Aluminum Liquid-tight fittings are ideal for use in corrosive environ- ments and where light weight conduit systems are required. Certifications / Standards: 1 — TECHNICAL DATA SHEET Liquid-tight fittings - Series 5200AL Aluminum For liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit C7 - T&B # 5340AL- Straight Fitting with Locknut Product selection Series 5200AL Aluminum LT fittings Series 200AL Aluminum LT fittings Seal Gaskets Trade size Thread Type Non-Insulated Part no.Inches Metric ISO BS EN Standard Size Straight Part no. 45° Part no. 90° Part no. 3/8"12mm 16mm NPT 1/2"5231AL —5251AL 5262 1/2"16mm 20mm NPT 1/2"5232AL —5252AL 5262 3/4"21mm 25mm NPT 3/4"5233AL —5253AL 5263 1"27mm 32mm NPT 1"5234AL —5254AL 5264 11/4"35mm 40mm NPT 11/4"5235AL —5255AL 5265 11/2"41mm 50mm NPT 11/2"5236AL —5256AL 5266 2"53mm 63mm NPT 2"5237AL —5257AL 5267 21/2"63mm 70mm NPT 21/2"5238AL ——5268 3"78mm 80mm NPT 3"5239AL ——5269 4"103mm 100mm NPT 4"5340AL ——5270 Dimensions (approximate) Drawing Trade size Inches Millimeters Weight Inches Metric ISO BS EN A B C A B C lbs.kg Series 5200AL Straight LT Fittings A B C 3/8"12mm 16mm 15/32"15/16" 9/16"29.4 23.8 14.3 0.07 0.03 1/2"16mm 20mm 13/8"1"9/16"34.9 25.4 14.3 0.08 0.04 3/4"21mm 25mm 121/32"11/16"9/16"42.1 27.0 14.3 0.12 0.06 1"27mm 32mm 17/8"15/16"3/4"47.6 33.3 19.1 0.21 0.09 11/4"35mm 40mm 23/32"111/16"13/16"53.2 42.9 20.6 0.34 0.15 11/2"41mm 50mm 2 23/32"17/8"13/16"69.1 47.6 20.6 0.39 0.17 2"53mm 63mm 31/4"23/16"7/8"82.6 55.6 22.2 0.60 0.27 21/2"63mm 70mm 33/4"31/8"1"95.3 79.4 25.4 1.50 0.68 3"78mm 80mm 41/2"31/4"1"114.3 82.6 25.4 1.70 0.77 4"103mm 100mm 51/2"33/8"11/8"139.7 85.7 28.6 3.00 1.36 Series 5200AL 90° LT Fittings A B C 3/8"12mm 16mm 15/32"13/8"9/16"29.4 34.9 14.3 0.09 0.04 1/2"16mm 20mm 13/8"19/16"9/16"34.9 39.7 14.3 0.13 0.06 3/4"21mm 25mm 121/32"13/4"9/16"42.1 44.5 14.3 0.17 0.07 1"27mm 32mm 17/8"23/16"3/4"47.6 55.6 19.1 0.26 0.12 11/4"35mm 40mm 23/32"23/4"13/16"53.2 69.9 20.6 0.50 0.23 11/2"41mm 50mm 223/32"215/16"13/16"69.1 74.6 20.6 0.57 0.26 2"53mm 63mm 31/4"37/16"7/8"82.6 87.3 22.2 1.00 0.45 21/2"63mm 70mm — — — — — — — — 3"78mm 80mm — — — — — — — — 4"103mm 100mm — — — — — — — — Note: • Dimensions for reference only. • Product must be installed in accordance with applicable national and local electrical codes. — We reserve the right to make technical changes or modify the contents of this document without prior notice. With re- gard to purchase orders, the agreed par- ticulars shall prevail. ABB Inc. does not ac- cept any responsibility whatsoever for potential errors or possible lack of infor- mation in this document. We reserve all rights in this document and in the subject matter and illustrations con- tained therein. Any reproduction, disclo- sure to third parties or utilization of its contents – in whole or in parts – is forbidden without prior written consent of ABB Inc. Copyright© 2018 ABB Inc. All rights reservedLet’s write the future. Together. abb.com Series 5200AL | Technical data sheet | TDS000118 A— ABB Inc. Electrification products Memphis, Tennessee USA 2 C7 - T&B # 5340AL- Straight Fitting with Locknut ⊇±∂↔≡≈ ⊂↔↔≡← ⊄≡≥∑ 〉〉 〉〉 ∧♣∑ 〉〉 ⊄≡…•±∂…≥ ⊂≡↑♥∂…≡← ⊄≡≥∑ 〉〉♦♦♦〉↔±〉…°″ ∨∫⇐°±≈♠∂↔  ∧∂↔↔∂±÷← ⇐↑≥°±θ ∉⊃⇐ ∨≥°♦←⌠ ⇐°±≈♠∂↔  ∧∂↔↔∂±÷←⇐°±≈♠∂↔ ⇑°≈∂≡← ±≈ ∧∂↔↔∂±÷← ≠°↑ ♠←≡ ♦∂↔• ⊂…•≡≈♠≥≡  ±≈  ⇐°±≈♠∂↔ ⇒ ⇐ ⊄  ∠〉⇔〉 ⇑ ⇔ ⊂↓≡…∂≥ °±÷∫∂±≡ ⊂≥≡≡♥≡ ⇐°♠↓≥∂±÷← ⊂…•≡≈♠≥≡  ⊆∂←≡↑← ⇐⇒⊄〉 ∇∠〉 ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ⇐⊄∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ∪⊄〉 ⇑⊂〉 ∨∇¬⊄⋅ √∇〉 ∨⋅   ∨∏   ∨   ∨   ∨∇ 〉 ∨∉   ∨⊆  ∨∏⊆   ∨∏⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔  ∨⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔    ∨   ∨   ∨⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔  ∨∇   ∨∇   ∨∇⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔  ∨∉⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔  ∨⊆  ∨⊆  ∨⊆⊂ ⊂…•〉  ⊂↓≥∂↔ ⇔♠…↔  ⊂≥≡≡♥≡ ⇐°♠↓≥∂±÷ ∧°↑ ⊆≡↓∂↑ ∪°↑× ∇° √±↔≡↑±≥ ⊂↔°↓ ∧°↑ ≈↓↔∂±÷ ±°±∫ ″≡↔≥≥∂… …°±≈♠∂↔← ↔° °♣≡←⌠ ↔•↑≡≈≡≈ ≠∂↔↔∂±÷←⌠ ″≡↔≥≥∂… ←ƒ←↔≡″←〉 ≥≡ ↔•↑≡≈← °± °±≡ ≡±≈⌠ ←°…×≡↔ ≡±≈ °± °↔•≡↑〉 ∧°↑ ≈↓↔∂±÷ ±°±∫″≡↔≥≥∂… …°±≈♠∂↔← ↔° ↔•↑≡≈≡≈ ≠∂↔↔∂±÷←⌠ ″≡↔≥≥∂… ←ƒ←↔≡″←〉 ∧≡″≥≡ ↔•↑≡≈← °± °±≡ ≡±≈⌠ ←°…×≡↔ ≡±≈ °± °↔•≡↑〉 ⇐⇒⊄〉 ∇∠〉 ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⇒ √∇〉 ∨∇¬⊄⋅ ⇑ √∇〉 ⇐ √∇〉 ⊄⋅⊆∨⇒⇔ ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ⇐⊄∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ∪⊄〉 ⇑⊂〉 ∨⋅∩〉 〉 〉   ∇∉⊄  〉 ∨∏ 〉 〉 〉  ∇∉⊄  〉 ∨∏∩ 〉 〉 〉  ∇∉⊄  〉 ∨〉 〉 〉   ∇∉⊂⇐  〉 ∨∩〉 〉 〉   ∇∉⊂⇐  〉 ∨ 〉 〉 〉  ∇∉⊂⇐  〉 ∨∩ 〉 〉 〉  ∇∉⊂⇐  〉 ⇐⇒⊄〉 ∇∠〉 ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ⇐⊄∇〉 ⊄∅∉√⇐⇒ √∇〉 √∇〉 ⇔ √∇〉 ⇒∩〉 ∠〉⇔〉 √∇〉 ⊄∅∉√⇐⇒ √∇〉 ⇒⇑⇐ ⊂ ∨⇔ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨∨ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨∧  〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨¬ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨⋅ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨∏   〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨   〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨ 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨∇  〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨∉  〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ∨⊆  〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 〉 ⇐⇒⊄〉 ∇∠〉 ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ⇐⊄∇〉 ⊄∅∉√⇐⇒ √∇〉 √∇〉 ⇔ √∇〉 ⇒∩〉 ∠〉⇔〉 √∇〉 ⊄∅∉√⇐⇒ √∇〉 ⇒⇑⇐⊂ ∨⇔ 〉 〉 〉   ∨∨ 〉 〉 〉   ∨∧  〉 〉 〉   ∨¬ 〉 〉 〉   ∨⋅ 〉 〉 〉   ∨∏   〉 〉 〉   ∨ 〉 〉 〉   ∨  〉 〉 〉   ∨ 〉 〉 〉   ∨∇  〉 〉 〉   ∨∇∩⌡ ⇐≥≥ ≠°↑ ∂±≠°↑″↔∂°± ∨∉  〉 〉 〉   ∨⊆  〉 〉 〉   ∨⊆∩⌡⇐≥≥ ≠°↑ ∂±≠°↑″↔∂°± ⌡ °±÷∫∂±≡ ⇒≈↓↔≡↑ ⊂↓≡…∂≥ ⊂…•≡≈♠≥≡  ⊂♦≡≈÷≡ ⇐°♠↓≥∂±÷← ⇐⇒⊄〉 ∇∠〉 ⊂√⊕∨ √∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ⇐⊄∇〉 ⊂⊄⇔〉 ∪⊄〉 ⇑⊂〉 ∨  ∨⊆  ∨⊄  ⌡⇐°±←♠≥↔ ≠…↔°↑ƒ ≠°↑ ≈≈∂↔∂°±≥ ←∂∞≡← ⊄•↑≡≈ ⊂∂∞≡ ⇒ ⇑  ⇐ ∠⇔⇒⇔ ⊂ ⇐ ⊆≡≠ ⇑ √〉⇔〉 ⊆∨ ∨♣…≡↓↔ ♦•≡↑≡ ±°↔≡≈ ƒ ∧≡″≥≡ ⇒≈↓↔≡↑← ≥≡ ⊄≡↑″∂±≥ ⇒≈↓↔≡↑← C8 - T&B # E943L - Male terminal adapter 9ɨȈǁǼljɥɁɨɽyȈɽɽȈȶǼɰŽȶƺӝ 705 Lordship Blvd. Stratford, CT 06615 Phone: 203.377.5944 Fax: ¸ɁƺȟȶʍɽӗČljƃȢȈȶǼӗČɽljljȢӣĀř:ӗČȈ˃ljљŽȶƺȃ Steel locknut with PVC seal used to provide raintight seal when fastening threaded conduit to unthreaded opening in a box or enclosure. Download Photo Download Drawing Product details :ƃɽƃȢɁǼÇʍȴƹljɨӖ 150 ĩĀ:ÇʍȴƹljɨӖ 781747001504 ĀɨȈȴƃɨʰÃƃɽljɨȈƃȢɰӖ Steel yȈȶȈɰȃӖ Zinc electro-plate ěɨƃǁljČȈ˃ljӖ 4" ĩȶȈɽĂʍƃȶɽȈɽʰӖ 5 ČɽƃȶǁƃɨǁĀƃƺȟƃǼljĂʍƃȶɽȈɽʰӖ 25 Dimensions ěɨƃǁljČȈ˃ljӖ 4" AȈȴljȶɰȈɁȶɰӖ 5-1/4 AȈȴljȶɰȈɁȶɰ9Ӗ 3/8 Certifications & Codes ĩ¸yȈȢljÇʍȴƹljɨӖ E9391 ĩÇČĀČ:Ӗ 39121311 ĩ¸ČɽƃȶǁƃɨǁӖ UL-514B C10 - Bridgeport - 4in locknut C11 - CANTEX # A53BA12 - 4IN sch. 80, with belled end C12 - Cantex #5221024 RNMC Elbow 4in. Dia., 48 in. rad. sch. 80, with belled end 1 in. End Cap Item Number:5140033 Carton Weight: 4 Lbs Carton Quantity: 50 Quantity UOM: EA Description: CANTEX 5140033 is a 1 in. End Cap designed top cap off PVC conduit either temporarily or permanently using PVC solvent cement Features: • Suitable for indoor or outdoor use • Durable non-conductive PVC will not rust or corrode • For use with Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 conduit. May also be used in EB & DB Duct applications. • UL and CSA listed • Made in USA Page 1 of 1Item Main Page - Html - Print 2/28/2020https://pvcelectrical.cantexinc.com/WebPart?ep_param=H9JEMVXJThFbJPlGV0DCx2Z...C13 - Cantex #5140033 - 1IN END CAP SA 10 ANDERSON™ HUBBELL® POWER SYSTEMS FARGO® October 2016 TERMINALS BRONZE STRAIGHT BOLT TERMINAL CABLE TO FLAT Bronze alloy terminal, with 3/8” dia. hex head clamping bolts, for connecting copper cable to copper flat. Side formed pads are standard for flush mounting. Clamping bolts have hex-stops for one-wrench installation. Tongue holes have NEMA spacing. All sizes furnished with reversible cable caps. Material: Castings—bronze alloy Clamping hardware—silicon bronze or stainless steel BRONZE SWL CATALOG NUMBER FIG. NO. COPPER CONDUCTOR RANGE DIMENSIONS INCHES (MM)APPROX. WT. EACH LBS. (KG) SMALL GROOVE LARGE GROOVE DIA. INCHES (MM) L A K T W SWL022B 2 #6 Sol.-#2 Str. #2 Sol.-2/0 Str. .162-.419 (4.11-10.64) 5-3/4 (146.04) 2-1/2 (63.5) 5/8 (15.88) 1/4 (6.35) 1-1/2 (38.1) 1.5 (.7) SWL022C 3 5-7/8 (149.22) 2-1/2 (63.5) 5/8 (15.88) 1/4 (6.35) 3 (76.2) 1.8 (.8) SWL025B 2 #4 Sol.-1/0 Str.2/0 Sol.-250 MCM .204-.575 (5.18-14.60) 6-1/8 (155.58) 2-3/4 (69.85) 5/8 (15.88) 1/4 (6.35) 1-1/2 (38.1) 1.4 (.7) SWL025C 3 6-1/8 (155.58) 2-3/4 (69.85) 5/8 (15.88) 1/4 (6.35) 3 (76.2) 2.0 (.9) SWL050B2 2 1/0 Sol.-4/0 Str. 250-500 MCM .325-.813 (8.25-20.65) 6-1/4 (158.75) 2-3/4 (69.85) 5/8 (15.88) 3/8 (9.52) 2 (50.8) 2.1 (1.0) SWL050C 3 6-1/4 (158.75) 2-3/4 (69.85) 5/8 (15.88) 5/16 (7.94) 3 (76.2) 2.4 (1.1) 45° & 90° angle connectors may be obtained by specifying desired angle. Example: SWL050CY90 Product Data & Conductor Size G2 - HPS #SWL050B2 - TERMINAL, BRONZE, 4_0 COPPERWELD TO 2-HOLE PAD Cable to Cable – TAC2Q2Q nVent ERICO Cadweld graphite molds are designed and engineered for thousands of connection styles and conductor combinations. • Forms a permanent, low resistance connection • Provides a molecular bond • nVent ERICO Cadweld Exothermic Connections are rated with the same current capacity as the conductor • Portable installation equipment with no external source of power required • Installers can be easily trained to make nVent ERICO Cadweld Exothermic Connections • Connections can be visually inspected • Meets requirements of the Buy American Act Part Number TAC2Q2Q Mold Family TA Conductor 1 4/0 Concentric Conductor 1 Outer Diameter, Nominal 0.528" Conductor 2 4/0 Concentric Conductor 2 Outer Diameter, Nominal 0.528" Split Crucible No Wear Plates No Mold Only No Welding Material 150 or 150PLUSF20, Sold Separately Handle Clamp L160, Sold Separately Price Key C Ease of Use Preferred Certifications cULus G3 - ERICO #TAC2Q2Q - 4-0 AWG TO 4-0 AWG EXOTHERMIC MOLD Part Number TAC2Q2Q Standard Packaging Quantity 1 pc UPC 78285655350 EAN-13 8711893126372 For applications such as computer room, tunnel or other low-ventilation areas, specify a smokeless nVent ERICO Cadweld Exolon mold. Add an XL prefix to the standard mold partnumber when ordering (for example, a TAC2Q2Q becomes XLTAC2Q2Q). Similarly, nVent ERICO Cadweld Exolon welding material is also designated by the XL prefix (for example, 150 becomes XL150). A gap between conductors may be required. See mold tag for more information. UL, UR, cUL, cUR, cULus and cURus are registered certification marks of UL LLC.  WARNING nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.erico.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent 's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty.  © 2020 nVent  All rights reserved nVent, nVent CADDY, nVent ERICO, nVent ERIFLEX and nVent LENTON are owned by nVent or its global affiliates. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. nVent reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. G3 - ERICO #TAC2Q2Q - 4-0 AWG TO 4-0 AWG EXOTHERMIC MOLD Cable to Cable – XB32Q2Q nVent ERICO Cadweld graphite molds are designed and engineered for thousands of connection styles and conductor combinations. • Forms a permanent, low resistance connection • Provides a molecular bond • nVent ERICO Cadweld Exothermic Connections are rated with the same current capacity as the conductor • Portable installation equipment with no external source of power required • Installers can be easily trained to make nVent ERICO Cadweld Exothermic Connections • Connections can be visually inspected • Meets requirements of the Buy American Act Part Number XB32Q2Q Mold Family XB Conductor 1 4/0 Concentric Conductor 1 Outer Diameter, Nominal 0.528" Conductor 2 4/0 Concentric Conductor 2 Outer Diameter, Nominal 0.528" Split Crucible No Wear Plates No Mold Only No Welding Material 250 or 250PLUSF20, Sold Separately Handle Clamp L163, Sold Separately Price Key 3 Ease of Use Preferred Certifications cULus G3 - ERICO #XB32Q2Q - 4-0 AWG TO 4-0 AWG EXOTHERMIC MOLD Part Number XB32Q2Q Standard Packaging Quantity 1 pc UPC 78285671232 EAN-13 0782856712329 For applications such as computer room, tunnel or other low-ventilation areas, specify a smokeless nVent ERICO Cadweld Exolon mold. Add an XL prefix to the standard mold partnumber when ordering (for example, a TAC2Q2Q becomes XLTAC2Q2Q). Similarly, nVent ERICO Cadweld Exolon welding material is also designated by the XL prefix (for example, 150 becomes XL150). A gap between conductors may be required. See mold tag for more information. UL, UR, cUL, cUR, cULus and cURus are registered certification marks of UL LLC.  WARNING nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.erico.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent 's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty.  © 2020 nVent  All rights reserved nVent, nVent CADDY, nVent ERICO, nVent ERIFLEX and nVent LENTON are owned by nVent or its global affiliates. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. nVent reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. G3 - ERICO #XB32Q2Q - 4-0 AWG TO 4-0 AWG EXOTHERMIC MOLD nVent ERICO Cadweld Plus Welding Material, F20 – 250PLUSF20 • Mixture consists mainly of copper oxide and aluminum • Primarily used in grounding and bonding applications • Integrated welding material package • Color coding by size for easy identification • Electronic ignition • No starting material required • Non-explosive • Not subject to spontaneous ignition • See specific nVent ERICO Cadweld connection details to determine welding material requirements • Meets requirements of the Buy American Act Part Number 250PLUSF20 Color Code Ring Purple Certifications cULus Qualifoudre Standard Packaging Quantity 10 pc UPC 78285651288 EAN-13 8711893032208 UL, UR, cUL, cUR, cULus and cURus are registered certification marks of UL LLC.  WARNING nVent products shall be installed and used only as indicated in nVent's product instruction sheets and training materials. Instruction sheets are available at www.erico.com and from your nVent customer service representative. Improper installation, misuse, misapplication or other failure to completely follow nVent 's instructions and warnings may cause product malfunction, property damage, serious bodily injury and death and/or void your warranty.  © 2020 nVent  All rights reserved nVent, nVent CADDY, nVent ERICO, nVent ERIFLEX and nVent LENTON are owned by nVent or its global affiliates. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. nVent reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice. G4 - ERICO #250PLUSF20 - WELD METAL SA 7 ANDERSON™ HUBBELL® POWER SYSTEMS FARGO® October 2016 CATALOG NUMBER COPPER CONDUCTOR RANGE DIMENSIONS INCHES (MM)APPROX. WT. EACH LBS. (KG)CABLE CABLE DIAMETER INCHES (MM)L H W J E* TLS22 #10 Sol.-#1 Str..102-.332 (2.59-8.43) 1-1/8 (28.58) 1-15/16 (49.21) 7/8 (22.22) 3/8 (9.52) 1/4 (6.35) .20 (.10) TLS22L #10 Sol.-#1 Str..102-.332 (2.59-8.43) 1-1/8 (28.58) 2-7/16 (61.91) 7/8 (22.22) 3/8 (9.52) 3/4 (19.05) .22 (.11) TLS32 #8 Sol.-2/0 Str..128-.419 (3.25-10.64) 1-1/2 (38.1) 2-3/8 (60.32) 1-1/8 (28.58) 1/2 (12.7) 1/2 (6.35) .30 (.14) TLS32L #8 Sol.-2/0 Str..128-.419 (3.25-10.64) 1-1/2 (38.1) 2-7/8 (73.02) 1-1/16 (26.99) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.05) .34 (.15) TLS35 #8 Sol.-2/0 Str..128-.419 (3.25-10.64) 1-1/4 (31.75) 2 (50.8) 1-1/16 (26.99) 3/8 (9.52) 1/4 (6.35) .20 (.10) TLS42 #6 Sol.-250 MCM .162-.575 (4.11-14.60) 1-1/2 (38.1) 2-5/8 (66.68) 1-1/4 (31.75) 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (6.35) .43 (.20) TLS42L #6 Sol.-250 MCM .162-.575 (4.11-14.60) 1-1/2 (38.1) 3-1/8 (79.38) 1-5/16 (33.34) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.05) .46 (.21) TLS52 #2 Sol.-350 MCM .258-.681 (6.55-17.30) 1-11/16 (42.86) 2-3/4 (69.85) 1-5/16 (33.34) 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (6.35) .50 (.23) TLS52L #2 Sol.-350 MCM .258-.681 (6.55-17.30) 1-11/16 (42.86) 3-1/4 (82.55) 1-5/16 (33.34) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.05) .54 (.24) TLS62 1/0 Sol.-500 MCM .325-.813 (8.26-20.65) 1-11/16 (42.86) 3-1/16 (77.79) 1-9/16 (39.69) 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (6.35) .50 (.23) TLS62L 1/0 Sol.-500 MCM .325-.813 (8.26-20.65) 1-11/16 (42.86) 3-9/16 (90.49) 1-1/2 (38.10) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.05) .54 (.25) TLS89 2/0 Sol.-1000 MCM .365-1.152 (9.27-29.26) 1-11/16 (42.86) 3-9/16 (90.49) 1-3/4 (44.45) 1/2 (12.7) 1/4 (6.35) .79 (.36) TLS89L 2/0 Sol.-1000 MCM .365-1.152 (9.27-29.26) 1-11/16 (42.86) 4-3/8 (111.12) 1-3/4 (44.45) 1/2 (12.7) 3/4 (19.05) .83 (.38) TERMINALS BRONZE BOLTED TAP LUG TERMINAL ONE CABLE TO FLAT BRONZE TLS * Eyebolt is of sufficient length to bolt through a maximum of 1/4” or 3/4” thickness for parts with the ‘L’ suffix. Bronze.alloy.terminal.for.connecting.a.copper.cable.directly. to.a.flat.copper.pad..Recommended.for.power.or.grounding. applications. Material:.Castings—Bronze.alloy .Eyebolt—High.strength.bronze .Hardware—Stainless.steel Note: .For.copper.cable.connection.to.aluminum.bus. bar,.specify.tin-plated.terminal.with.Belleville. spring.washer.by.adding.suffix.TPBW.to.catalog. number..Example:.TLS62LTPBW Product Data & Conductor Size G6 - HPS #TLS32 - #2 GROUND TO FLAT G7 - BURNDY #YGHC29C26 - TAP, COMP, 4-0 AWG CU TO #2 AWG CU 11-2 AAC AAC All Aluminum Conductor. Bare. APPLICATIONS Classes 1 AA and A are used primarily for overhead transmission and primary and secondary distribution, where ampacity must be maintained and a lighter conductor (compared to ACSR) is desired, and when conductor strength is not a critical factor. Classes B and C are used primarily as bus, apparatus connectors and jumpers, where additional flexibility is required. SPECIFICATIONS Southwire's AAC bare conductor meets or exceeds the following ASTM specifications: •B230 Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Electrical Purposes. •B231 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum 1350 Conductors. CONSTRUCTION Aluminum 1350-H19 wires, concentrically stranded. 1 Classes refer to stranding and are an indication of relative conductor flexibility, AA being the least flexible, C the most flexible. Thu Apr 19 11:08:16 EDT 2012 Page 1 of 3L1 - SOUTHWIRE # COWSLIP - 2000 KCMIL, AAC Code Word Size (AWG or kcmil) Stranding Diameter (ins.)Cross- Sectional Area (Sq. ins.) Weight Per 1000 ft. (lbs.) Rated Strength (lbs.) Resistance OHMS/1000 ft. Allowable Ampacity+ (Amps)No. of Wires Class Individual Wires Complete Cable DC @ 20°C AC @ 75°C Peachbell 6 7 A .0612 .184 .0206 25 563 .658 .805 103 Rose 4 7 A .0772 .232 .0328 39 881 .414 .506 138 Iris 2 7 AA, A .0974 .292 .0522 62 1350 .260 .318 185 Pansy 1 7 AA .1093 .328 .0657 78 1640 .207 .252 214 Poppy 1/0 7 AA, A .1228 .368 .0829 99 1990 .164 .200 247 Aster 2/0 7 AA, A .1379 .414 .1045 125 2510 .130 .159 286 Phlox 3/0 7 AA, A .1548 .464 .1317 157 3040 .103 .126 331 Oxlip 4/0 7 AA, A .1739 .522 .1663 198 3830 .0817 .0999 383 Sneezewort 250 7 AA .189 .567 .1964 234 4520 .0691 .0846 425 Valerian 250 19 A .1147 .574 .1963 234 4660 .0691 .0846 426 Daisy 266.8 7 AA .1952 .586 .2095 250 4830 .0648 .0793 443 Laurel 266.8 19 A .1185 .592 .2095 250 4970 .0648 .0793 444 Peony 300 19 A .1257 .628 .2358 281 5480 .0576 .0706 478 Tulip 336.4 19 A .1331 .665 .2644 315 6150 .0514 .0630 513 Daffodil 350 19 A .1357 .679 .2748 328 6390 .0494 .0605 526 Canna 397.5 19 AA, A .1446 .723 .312 373 7110 .0435 .0534 570 Goldentuft 450 19 AA .1539 .769 .3534 422 7890 .0384 .0472 616 Cosmos 477 19 AA .1584 .792 .3744 447 8360 .0362 .0445 639 Syringa 477.0 37 A .1135 .795 .3744 447 8690 .0362 .0445 639 Zinnia 500 19 AA .1622 .811 .3926 469 8760 .0346 .0425 658 Hyacinth 500 37 AA .1162 .814 .3924 469 9110 .0346 .0425 658 Dahlia 556.5 19 AA .1711 .856 .4369 522 9750 .0311 .0382 703 Mistletoe 556.5 37 AA .1226 .858 .4368 522 9940 .0311 .0382 704 Meadowsweet 600 37 AA .1273 .891 .4709 562 10700 .0228 .0355 738 Orchid 636.0 37 AA, A .1311 .918 .4995 596 11400 .0272 .0335 765 Heuchera 650 37 AA .1325 .928 .5102 609 11600 .0266 .0328 775 Verbena 700 37 AA .1375 .963 .5494 656 12500 .0247 .0305 812 Flag 700 61 A .1071 .964 .5495 656 12900 .0247 .0305 812 Violet 715.5 37 AA .1391 .973 .5623 671 12800 .0242 .0299 823 Nasturtium 715.5 61 AA .1083 .975 .5619 671 13100 .0242 .0299 823 Petunia 750.0 37 AA .1424 .997 .5893 703 13100 .0230 .0286 847 Cattail 750 61 AA .1109 .998 .5892 703 13500 .0230 .0286 847 Arbutus 795 37 AA .1466 1.026 .6245 745 13900 .0217 .0270 878 Lilac 795.0 61 A .1142 1.027 .6248 745 14300 .0217 .0270 879 Cockscomb 900 37 AA .156 1.092 .7072 844 15400 .0192 .0239 948 Snapdragon 900 61 AA .1215 1.093 .7072 844 15900 .0192 .0239 948 Magnolia 954.0 37 AA .1606 1.124 .7495 894 16400 .0181 .0226 982 AAC Thu Apr 19 11:08:16 EDT 2012 Page 2 of 3L1 - SOUTHWIRE # COWSLIP - 2000 KCMIL, AAC Goldenrod 954.0 61 A .1251 1.125 .7498 894 16900 .0181 .0226 983 Hawkweed 1000 37 AA .1644 1.151 .7854 937 17200 .0173 .0216 1010 Camellia 1000 61 AA .128 1.152 .7849 937 17700 .0713 .0216 1011 Bluebell 1033.5 37 AA .1671 1.17 .8114 969 17700 .0167 .0210 1031 Larkspur 1033.5 61 AA .1302 1.171 .8122 969 18300 .0167 .0210 1032 Marigold 1113.0 61 AA, A .1351 1.216 .8744 1043 19700 .0155 .0195 1079 Hawthorn 1192.5 61 AA, A .1398 1.258 .9363 1118 21100 .0145 .0183 1124 Narcissus 1272.0 61 AA, A .1444 1.3 .999 1192 22000 .0136 .0173 1169 Columbine 1351.5 61 AA, A .1488 1.34 1.0608 1267 23400 .0128 .0163 1212 Carnation 1431 61 AA, A .1532 1.378 1.1244 1341 24300 .0121 .0155 1253 Gladiolus 1510.5 61 A .1574 1.416 1.1869 1416 25600 .0144 .0147 1294 Coreopsis 1590.0 61 AA .1614 1.453 1.248 1490 27000 .0109 .0141 1333 Jessamine 1750.0 61 AA .1694 1.524 1.3748 1640 29700 .00988 .0129 1408 Cowslip 2000.0 91 A .1482 1.631 1.5697 1875 34200 .00864 .0115 1518 Sagebrush 2250 91 A .1572 1.73 1.7662 2130 37500 .00776 .0105 1612 Lupine 2500.0 91 A .1657 1.823 1.9623 2366 41900 .00698 .00969 1706 Bitterroot 2750 91 A .1738 1.912 2.1589 2603 46100 .00635 .00900 1793 Trillium 3000 127 A .1537 1.998 2.3564 2839 50300 .00582 .00834 1874 Bluebonnet 3500 127 A .166 2.158 2.7486 3345 58700 .00499 .00756 2024 +Conductor temperature of 75ºC, ambient temperature 25ºC, emissivity 0.5, wind 2 ft./sec. in sun. AAC Thu Apr 19 11:08:16 EDT 2012 Page 3 of 3L1 - SOUTHWIRE # COWSLIP - 2000 KCMIL, AAC Type SDV7 distribution circuit breaker family includes: Type SDV7-SE: type SDV7 non-arc- resistant with stored-energy operator Type SDV7-MA: type SDV7 non-arc- resistant with magnetic-actuator operator Type SDV7-SE-AR: type SDV7-AR arc- resistant with stored-energy operator Type SDV7-MA-AR: type SDV7-AR arc- resistant with magnetic-actuator operator. Type SDV7 enclosure types offered: Standard: non-arc-resistant enclosure Optional: arc-resistant, accessibility type 2B, tested to ANSI/IEEE C37.20.7. Stored-energy operator features: Time-proven type 3AH3 operator derived from operators introduced in 1977 (over 120,000 produced) Common operator for all ratings Design tested to ANSI/IEEE C37.09. Magnetic-actuator operator features: Design adapted from type 3AH3 stored-energy operator configuration High-voltage compartment configuration identical to stored energy version Design tested to ANSI/IEEE C37.09 Built-in fast discharge circuit for electronic controller power capacitors Manual opening handle requires very modest force for operation Electronic controller life estimated at 30 years. Other features and benefits include: Extended capacitor switching (optional) Tested for out-of-phase switching ratings (ANSI/IEEE C37.09) Large relay and control compartment Stainless steel exterior hardware Porcelain dry-type bushings with extended creep Highly reliable vacuum interrupters – MTTF over 53,000 years Pair with Siemens protective relays to match any typical application Moderate and high seismic qualification (Zones 1-4) available Meets or exceeds the latest ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards ANSI/IEEE “rain tested” enclosure (ANSI/IEEE C37.20.2). Distribution circuit breakers SDV7 non-arc-resistant SDV7-AR arc-resistant 15.5 kV, 27.6 kV and 38 kV Type SDV7-AR arc-resistant distribution circuit breaker Type SDV7 non-arc-resistant distribution circuit breaker usa.siemens.com/sdv7 M2 - SIEMENS # SVD7 - CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15KV, 3000A, OUTDOOR VACUUM Technical ratings Circuit breaker type SDV7 Rated maximum voltage Rated withstand voltages Rated short- circuit and short-time current Rated interrupting time1 Rated continuous current Rated transient recovery voltage2 Rated permissible tripping delay time Y Rated closing and latching current Lightning impulse (BIL) Power frequency uc TRV peak value t3 time to voltage uc kV, rms kV3 kV kA, rms ms/cycles A, rms kV µs sec kA, peak 15.5-20 15.5 110/142 50 20 50/3 1,200, 2,000 29.2 32 2 52 15.5-25 15.5 110/142 50 25 50/3 1,200, 2,000 29.2 32 2 65 15.5-31.54 15.5 110/142 50 31.5 50/3 1,200, 2,000, 3,000 29.2 32 2 82 15.5-404 15.5 110/142 50 40 50/3 1,200, 2,000, 3,000 29.2 32 2 104 27.6-20 27.6 150/194 60 20 50/3 1,200, 2,000 52.1 45 2 52 27.6-25 27.6 150/194 60 25 50/3 1,200, 2,000 52.1 45 2 65 38.0-204 38.0 200/258 80 20 50/3 1,200, 2,000 71.7 59 2 52 38.0-254 38.0 200/258 80 25 50/3 1,200, 2,000 71.7 59 2 65 38.0-31.54 38.0 200/258 80 31.5 50/3 1,200, 2,000, 2,500 71.7 59 2 82 38.0-404 38.0 200/258 80 40 50/3 1,200, 2,000, 2,500 71.7 59 2 104 Footnotes: 1. 83 ms/five-cycle optional for stored-energy operator. 2. TRV values are in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2009 TRV peak value uc roughly equal to historic E2 value in ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2000. Value t3, time to voltage uc is approximately 1/1.138 times T2 value in ANSI/IEEE C37.06-2000. 3. First value is full-wave impulse withstand circuit breaker open or closed. Second value is chopped-wave impulse withstand, applicable only with circuit breaker closed. 4. Magnetic-actuator availability to be announced for these ratings. Consult factory. 5. Arc-resistant only. Side viewFront view Dimensions in inches (mm) Rating A B C D E F G H I J K5 15.5 kV, 1,200 A-2,000 A 10.7 (272) 13.0 (330) 47.1 (1,197) 44.5 (1.130) 12.4 (315) 19.8 (503) 92.0-116.0 (2,337)-(2,945) 36.1 (918) 31.3 (794) 42.7 (1,084) 10.3 (260) 15.5 kV, 3,000 A 12.3 (312) 16.0 (406) 56.5 (1,435) 52.8 (1,340) 15.9 (403) 21.0 (534) 96.0-120.0 (2,438)-(3,048) 44.2 (1,123) 39.4 (1,001) 52.0 (1,321) 11.4 (290) 27.6 kV, 1,200 A-2,000 A 12.3 (312) 16.0 (406) 56.5 (1,435) 49.8 (1,265) 14.4 (366) 21.2 (538) 96.0-120.0 (2,438)-(3,048) 44.2 (1,123) 39.4 (1,001) 52.0 (1,321) 11.4 (290) 38.0 kV, 1,200 A, 2,000 A, 2, 500 A 13.4 (340) 19.5 (495) 67.8 (1,723) 63.0 (1,600) 20.4 (518) 22.2 (563) 120.5-144.5 (3,060)-(3,670) 55.6 (1,413) 50.9 (1,294) 63.1 (1,604) 16.7 (424) BA C K G I E F J H D Rear Front Front RearK C Published by Siemens Industry, Inc. 2018 Siemens Industry 7000 Siemens Road Wendell, North Carolina 27591 For more information, including service and parts, please contact our Customer Support Center. Phone: 1-800-333-7421 usa.siemens.com/sdv7 Order No. EMMS-T40008-02-4A00 ©2018 Siemens Industry, Inc. The technical data presented in this document is based on an actual case or on as designed parameters, and therefore should not be relied upon for any specific application and does not constitute a performance guarantee for any projects. Actual results are dependent on variable conditions. Accordingly, Siemens does not make representations, warranties, or assurances as to the accuracy, currency or completeness of the content contained herein. If requested, we will provide specific technical data or specifications with respect to any customer‘s particular applications. Our company is constantly involved in engineering and development. For that reason, we reserve the right to modify, at any time, the technology and product specifications contained herein. M2 - SIEMENS # SVD7 - CIRCUIT BREAKER, 15KV, 3000A, OUTDOOR VACUUM Page 13 | January 2017 Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – PVI-LP Main Gasket Secondary Gasket RTV Sealant Machined Aluminum End Terminal Radial Seal End Cap Polymer Housing Factory Torqued Sealing Bolt Threaded for 1/2 inch bolt (terminal hardware) Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – EVP EVP, Station Class Overview – The EVP Polymer Housed Station Arrester by HPS and Ohio Brass represents the absolute latest in surge arrester technology. Based on proven PVN technology, our EVP line maintains our proprietary ESPTM weathershed material and protective levels. However, it has an even more robust sealing system to reduce moisture ingress to an unprecedented minimum. EVP arresters also feature a redesigned housing profile for maximum material utilization, and even make ordering easier by using an intelligent numbering system. Construction: • Optimized wrap pattern and end hardware • Even more effective sealing system • Aluminum Top Cap • Tri-pod base (standard 8.75” to 10” BC) Slotted At-a-Glance: • The latest in surge arrester technology • Utilizes proprietary ESPTM weathershed material • More robust sealing system reduces moisture ingress Our EVP Arresters Feature: • 25% Recycled Packaging Material • 15% Less Production Mass Compared to Previous Designs • 50% Recyclable Packaging Sealing Cap ESP™ Rubber Alloy Housing Silicone Dielecric Compound MOV Block Tripod Base Fiberglass Epoxy Interweave Contact Disc Cross-Section View of Typical EVP Arrester Detailed View of Sealing M3 - HPS #EVP000800-3001 - SURGE ARRESTER 7.65kV MCOV STATION CLASS Page 14 | January 2017 EVP Electrical Characteristics Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – EVP Standard Arrester Catalog Number Duty Cycle Rating (kV rms) MCOV Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage ( kV rms) Maximum 0.5µs Discharge Voltage (kV) @ 10 kA Maximum Switching Surge Protective Level (kV) * TOV Capability (No Prior Duty) Maximum Discharge Voltage using an 8/20 Current Wave (kV) 1 sec (kV rms) 10 sec (kV rms)1.5kA 3kA 5kA 10kA 20kA 40kA EVP000300 3 2.55 10.5 6.0 3.6 3.5 6.4 6.7 7.1 7.6 8.2 9.3 EVP000500 6 5.1 18.6 12.0 7.3 6.9 12.8 13.5 14.1 15.2 16.4 18.7 EVP000800 9 7.65 27.0 18.0 10.9 10.4 19.2 20.2 21.2 22.7 24.6 28.0 EVP000900 10 8.4 29.4 19.8 11.9 11.4 21.1 22.2 23.3 25.0 27.0 30.8 EVP001000 12 10.2 35.1 24.0 14.5 13.9 25.6 26.9 28.2 30.3 32.8 37.4 EVP001300 15 12.7 43.4 29.9 18.0 17.3 31.9 33.5 35.2 37.7 40.8 46.5 EVP001500 18 15.3 51.6 36.1 21.7 20.8 38.5 40.4 42.4 45.5 49.1 56.1 EVP001700 21 17 57.8 40.1 24.2 23.1 42.7 44.9 47.1 50.5 54.6 62.3 EVP001900 24 19.5 65.7 45.9 27.7 26.5 49.0 51.5 54.0 57.9 62.6 71.4 EVP002200 27 22 73.6 51.8 31.3 29.9 55.3 58.1 60.9 65.4 70.7 80.6 EVP002400 30 24.4 81.2 57.5 34.7 33.2 61.3 64.5 67.6 72.5 78.4 89.4 EVP002900 36 29 97.0 68.6 41.4 39.6 73.2 76.9 80.7 86.5 93.6 107.0 EVP003100 39 31.5 105.0 74.4 44.8 42.9 79.3 83.4 87.4 93.8 101.0 116.0 EVP003600 45 36.5 121.0 86.0 51.9 49.6 91.8 96.4 101.0 108.0 117.0 134.0 EVP003900 48 39 129.0 91.9 55.4 53.0 98.0 103.0 108.0 116.0 125.0 143.0 EVP004200 54 42 145.0 104.0 62.5 59.8 111.0 116.0 122.0 131.0 141.0 161.0 EVP004800 60 48 160.0 115.0 69.0 66.0 123.0 129.0 135.0 145.0 157.0 179.0 EVP005700 72 57 192.0 137.0 82.8 79.3 147.0 154.0 161.0 173.0 187.0 214.0 EVP007000 90 70 242.0 172.0 104.0 99.3 184.0 193.0 202.0 217.0 234.0 267.0 EVP007400 90 74 245.0 174.0 105.0 101.0 186.0 195.0 205.0 220.0 238.0 271.0 EVP007600 96 76 257.0 184.0 111.0 106.0 196.0 206.0 216.0 232.0 251.0 286.0 EVP008400 108 84 289.0 207.0 125.0 120.0 221.0 232.0 244.0 261.0 283.0 322.0 EVP008800 108 88 289.0 207.0 125.0 120.0 221.0 232.0 244.0 261.0 283.0 322.0 EVP009800 120 98 322.0 241.0 139.0 133.0 246.0 259.0 271.0 291.0 315.0 359.0 EVP010600 132 106 350.0 262.0 152.0 145.0 268.0 282.0 296.0 317.0 343.0 391.0 EVP011500 144 115 382.0 286.0 166.0 159.0 293.0 308.0 323.0 346.0 375.0 427.0 EVP013100 168 131 447.0 334.0 194.0 185.0 342.0 360.0 377.0 405.0 438.0 499.0 EVP014000 172 140 462.0 344.0 199.0 191.0 352.0 370.0 388.0 416.0 450.0 513.0 EVP014400 180 144 480.0 357.0 207.0 198.0 366.0 385.0 403.0 433.0 468.0 534.0 EVP015200 192 152 510.0 381.0 221.0 211.0 391.0 411.0 430.0 462.0 499.0 569.0 EVP018000 228 180 605.0 453.0 262.0 251.0 464.0 487.0 511.0 548.0 593.0 676.0 * Discharge voltages are based on a 500A surge of 45 µs time to crest through 88 kV MCOV and 1,000A surge of 45 µs time through 180 kV MCOV. M3 - HPS #EVP000800-3001 - SURGE ARRESTER 7.65kV MCOV STATION CLASS Page 15 | January 2017 Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – EVP Standard Arrester Catalog Number Duty Cycle Rating (kV rms) MCOV Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (kV rms) Height Dimension (Inches) Leakage Distance (Inches) Recommended Minimum Clearance (Inches) Net Weight (Pounds) Ph - Ph Ph - Gd EVP000300 3.0 2.55 9.9 19.6 9.0 4.5 13 EVP000500 6.0 5.1 9.9 19.6 9.0 4.5 13 EVP000800 9.0 7.65 11.7 30.1 9.0 4.5 15 EVP000900 10.0 8.4 11.7 30.1 9.0 4.5 15 EVP001000 12.0 10.2 11.7 30.1 9.0 4.6 15 EVP001300 15.0 12.7 13.5 35.4 9.7 5.4 17 EVP001500 18.0 15.3 13.5 35.4 10.6 6.1 17 EVP001700 21.0 17 17.2 40.5 11.2 6.7 22 EVP001900 24.0 19.5 17.2 40.5 12.1 7.4 22 EVP002200 27.0 22 17.2 40.5 12.9 8.2 22 EVP002400 30.0 24.4 17.2 40.5 13.8 8.9 22 EVP002900 36.0 29 20.9 50.9 15.4 10.3 27 EVP003100 39.0 31.5 20.9 50.9 16.2 11.1 27 EVP003600 45.0 36.5 24.5 61.5 17.9 12.6 31 EVP003900 48.0 39 24.5 61.5 18.8 13.3 31 EVP004200 54.0 42 24.5 61.5 20.5 14.9 31 EVP004800 60.0 48 28.2 71.9 22.1 16.2 36 EVP005700 72.0 57 31.9 82.4 25.4 19.2 41 EVP007000 90.0 70 46.3 123.0 30.5 23.7 59 EVP007400 90.0 74 46.3 123.0 30.8 24.0 59 EVP007600 96.0 76 46.3 123.0 32.2 25.2 59 EVP008400 108.0 84 46.3 123.0 35.6 28.2 59 EVP008800 108.0 88 46.3 123.0 35.6 28.2 59 EVP009800 120.0 98 53.7 143.9 48.6 36.0 73 EVP010600 132.0 106 53.7 143.9 51.6 38.7 73 EVP011500 144.0 115 61.0 164.8 55.0 41.7 82 EVP013100 168.0 131 72.5 184.5 61.7 47.7 97 EVP014000 172.0 140 83.5 215.8 74.4 60.5 120 EVP014400 180.0 144 83.5 215.8 76.3 62.4 120 EVP015200 192.0 152 83.5 215.8 79.7 65.8 120 EVP018000 228.0 180 94.5 247.2 89.7 75.7 133 Arrester MCOV Drop (A) (inches)Diameter (B) (inches) 98.0 - 131.0 9.0 16.5 140.0 - 180.0 14.5 27.9 Grading Ring Diameters EVP Physical Characteristics A (DROP)B (DIA) HEIGHT .56 WIDE SLOT 3 PLACES @ 120° APART 10.0 B.C. 8.75 B.C. 7.0 (DIA) BASE MOUNTING INFORMATIONFIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 Figure 1 A (DROP) B (DIA) Height .56 WIDE SLOT 3 PLACES @ 120° APART 10.0 B.C. 8.75 B.C. 7.0 DIA BASE MOUNTING INFORMATIONFIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 Base Mounting Information Figure 2 A (DROP) B (DIA) HEIGHT .56 WIDE SLOT 3 PLACES @ 120° APART 10.0 B.C. 8.75 B.C. 7.0 (DIA) BASE MOUNTING INFORMATIONFIGURE 1 FIGURE 2 Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – EVP M3 - HPS #EVP000800-3001 - SURGE ARRESTER 7.65kV MCOV STATION CLASS Page 16 | January 2017 X ->0(standard) 1 2 (under- hung) 3 9 (Multi Rated) Top Cap Cap Tripod Tripod Cap Bottom Tripod Cap Cap Tripod Tripod EVP Part Number Selection EVP X YYY 0 0 - 3001 Products – Polymer Housed Surge Arresters – EVP Step 1: Configuration • 3001 Line: 4-Hole NEMA pad with (2) Single Eye Bolts Ground: Single Eye Bolt Step 4: Hardware * For applications that require leakage distance, height or terminal size requirements not listed, please contact your Hubbell Power Systems Representative at 1.573.682.5521. Step 3: Housing Leakage Distance 0 – Standard Leakage Distance 1 - High Leakage Distance 2 - Extra High Leakage Distance MCOV YYY MCOV YYY 2.55 003 48 048 5.1 005 57 057 7.65 008 70 070 8.4 009 74 074 10.2 010 76 076 12.7 013 84 084 15.3 015 88 088 17 017 98 098 19.5 019 106 106 22 022 115 115 24.4 024 131 131 29 029 140 140 31.5 031 144 144 36.5 036 152 152 39 039 180 180 42 042 Step 2: EVP Part Number Table AREAS AFFEATEDBY LASTEST ECY N__ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ __ TOOL/EQUIP PRCS PROCPKG/LABELINSP/TEST GAUGESSUPPLIERF.A.I.S.P.C. "0" ... Small Top, Tripod Base "1" ... Small To p, Small Base "2" ... Tripod To p, Small Base "3" ... Tripod Top, Tripod Base (vertical mointing only) (underhung) AREAS AFFEATEDBY LASTEST ECY N__ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ __ TOOL/EQUIP PRCS PROCPKG/LABELINSP/TEST GAUGESSUPPLIER F.A.I.S.P.C. "0" ... Small Top, Tripod Base "1" ... Small Top, Small Base "2" ... Tripod Top, Small Base "3" ... Tripod Top, Tripod Base (vertical mointing only) (underhung) AREAS AFFEATEDBY LASTEST ECY N__ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ __ TOOL/EQUIP PRCS PROCPKG/LABELINSP/TEST GAUGESSUPPLIER F.A.I.S.P.C. "0" ... Small Top, Tripod Base "1" ... Small To p, Small Base "2" ... Tripod To p, Small Base "3" ... Tripod Top, Tripod Base (vertical mointing only) (underhung) AREAS AFFEATEDBY LASTEST ECY N__ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ __ TOOL/EQUIP PRCS PROCPKG/LABELINSP/TEST GAUGESSUPPLIER F.A.I.S.P.C. "0" ... Small Top, Tripod Base "1" ... Small To p, Small Base "2" ... Tripod To p, Small Base "3" ... Tripod Top, Tripod Base (vertical mointing only) (underhung) MCOV Height (in) Creep (in)003 - 005 008 - 010 013 - 015 017 - 024 029 - 031 036 - 042 048 057 070 - 088 098 - 106 115 131 140 - 152 180 0 -------------9.9 19.6 1 0 ------------11.7 30.1 2 1 0 -----------13.5 35.4 -2 1 0 ----------17.2 40.5 --2 1 0 ---------20.9 50.9 ---2 1 0 --------24.5 61.5 ----2 1 0 -------28.2 71.9 -----2 1 0 ------31.9 82.4 ------2 1 0 -----46.3 123.0 -------2 1 0 ----53.7 144.0 --------2 1 0 ---61.0 165.0 ---------2 1 0 --72.5 184.0 ----------2 1 0 -83.5 216.0 -----------2 1 0 94.5 247.0 ------------2 1 111.1 288.0 -------------2 127.7 330.0 For EVP0 & EVP2, standard housing configurations (upright & underhung): • 3002 Line: Single Eye Bolt Ground: Single Eye Bolt -3001 Hardware Code -3002 Hardware Code 301XXX-3011 -3001 Hardware Code -3002 Hardware Code 301XXX-3011 * See page 36 for hardware details For Hubbell internal use only (0-Standard) M3 - HPS #EVP000800-3001 - SURGE ARRESTER 7.65kV MCOV STATION CLASS ©2013 Chatsworth Products, Inc.  All rights reserved. CPI, CPI Passive Cooling, GlobalFrame, MegaFrame, Saf-T-Grip, Seismic Frame, SlimFrame, TeraFrame, Cube-iT Plus, Evolution, OnTrac, Velocity and QuadraRack are federally registered trademarks of Chatsworth Products.  eConnect and Simply Efficient are trademarks of Chatsworth Products. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. 6/13 800-834-4969 in U.S. & Canada • www.chatsworth.com Product Cut Sheet FILLER PANEL Spaces - in (mm)U 01 1.72 (43.7)1 02 3.47 (88.1)2 03 5.22 (132.6) 3 04 6.97 (177.0)4 05 8.72 (221.5)5 06 10.47 (265.9)6 07 12.22 (310.4)7 08 13.97 (354.8)8 09 15.72 (399.3)9 10 17.47 (443.7)10 11 19.22 (488.2)11 12 20.97 (532.6)12 Color 1 Gray 2 Computer Beige 5 Clear 7 Black E Glacier White Thickness - in (mm)Width 24 3/16 (4.763)19” 25 3/16 (4.763)23” 26 1/8 (3.18)19” 27 1/8 (3.18)23” For airflow control and/or equipment mounting, fill empty spaces between mounted equipment. Filler Panels 300 Filler Panels 300 XX -X XX R1 - CHATSWORTH #30026-104 - FILLER PLATE 19IN 4RU R2 - ELECTROSWITCH 74202LH - CONTROL SWITCH R3 - TE CONNECTIVITY # 2-1520228-3 - CUTOUT SWITCH, 1 HOLE MOUNTING TOOL, HANDLE TOGGLE SWITCH R3 - TE CONNECTIVITY # 2-1520228-3 - CUTOUT SWITCH, 1 HOLE MOUNTING TOOL, HANDLE TOGGLE SWITCH R3 - TE CONNECTIVITY # 2-1520228-3 - CUTOUT SWITCH, 1 HOLE MOUNTING TOOL, HANDLE TOGGLE SWITCH R3 - TE CONNECTIVITY # 2-1520228-3 - CUTOUT SWITCH, 1 HOLE MOUNTING TOOL, HANDLE TOGGLE SWITCH   R4 - ELECTROSWITCH - 010D-2T26BD - SELECTOR SWITCH ESCUTHCHEON R4 - ELECTROSWITCH - 24201B - SELECTOR SWITCH, 2POpdf R5 - SATEC PM172E - BUS TIE METER R5 - SATEC PM172E - BUS TIE METER R5 - SATEC PM172E - BUS TIE METER R6 - ABB 129A514G01 - FT-1 TEST SWITCH R7 - SCHWEITZER # 0351A0H2X3E52X1 - SEL-351A Front-Rear DWG R7 - SCHWEITZER # 0351A0H2X3E52X1 - SEL-351A Protection System Configuration Change to full widthFT Switch Configuration Configure FT Details Selection Guide Downloads ABB Test Equipment ABB Group Tuesday, December 10, 2019 Configure FT-1 Configure FT-19R Configure FT-19RS Configure FT-19R By Style No. SEARCH FT-19R ABB Test Equipment Arrangement: Contact Now Glenn Goldfarb Bharat Chopra Service: Sales: Qty: Cart is empty Contact Now Style No: Code No: Position CPosition BPosition A FT-1X Extended Test Switch Cover (Front View) FT-19R (Front View) CoverTerminalsTerminal Depth Position C Position B FT-1 Switches Other FeaturesFinishMaterial Flexitest Switch Assemblies Panel Height Position A Style No: FT-19R http://spine.abb.com/ftswitch/FT19R.aspx 1 of 1 12/10/2019, 9:22 AMR8 - FT-19R # FR2H014001000NX08 - 014 001 BLANK ANSI 70 gGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone (905) 294-6222www.ge.com/indsys/pmINSTRUCTIONSTYPE ET-16 and ET-17INDICATING LAMPSManual Part Number: GEH-3500FCopyright © 2000 GE Power ManagementGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone: (905) 294-6222Fax: (905) 201-2098E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.comInternet: www.ge.com/indsys/pmgGE Power ManagementManufactured under an ISO9002 Registered SystemR9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps2CONTENTSPAGE NO.Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 3Application................................................................................................................................................................ 3Features.................................................................................................................................................................... 3Ratings...................................................................................................................................................................... 4Connections............................................................................................................................................................. 4Recommended Panel Assembly............................................................................................................................. 4Table 1: ET-16 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 4Table 2: ET-16 – for dim-bright application........................................................................................................... 4Table 3: ET-16 – For LEDs....................................................................................................................................... 5Table 4: ET-17 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 5Table 5: ET-16 Special 127B8177 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 6: ET-17 Special 128B1654 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 7: Color Cap................................................................................................................................................... 7Ordering table 8: COLOR CAP................................................................................................................................7TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATION................................................................................... 7These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible contingency tobe met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particularproblems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the GeneralElectric Company (USA)To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards; however, no suchassurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps11Figure 4 (0165A7955[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR NEON INDICATING LAMP TYPE ET-17R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps10Figure 3 (0165A7859[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMPGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps3INTRODUCTIONThe ET-16 (incandescent and LEDs) and ET-17 (neon) indicating lamps consist of a common receptacle, plug intype resistors and lamps, escutcheon, and color cap. They are available for mounting on switchboard panels up toand including ¼ inch thickness.APPLICATIONThese lamps can be used whenever a panel mounted signal or indicating lamp is desired.The ET-16 is available for either one brilliance or dim bright operation when incandescent lamps are used. ET-16lamps are also available with Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). The incandescent type can be easily upgraded to theLED type. It only requires acquiring the appropriate color LED and lens cap and inserting into the lamp receptacle.The ET-17 can be used when extra long life is a factor and brilliance is not. It also can be used when low currentis desired.FEATURES1. The simple “push-twist” type plug has been adopted for both the bulb and the resistor. This wasaccomplished by incorporating a bayonet base on both components.2. A common receptacle for both the ET-16 and ET-17 coupled with the plug-in resistor and bulb makes iteasy to change on the panel without disassembling.3. The resistor is in series with the bulb, and the ohmic value for the different circuit voltages is designed at80% of the rated bulb voltage to give it longer life. Changing voltages is easily accomplished by changingthe series resistor (see listed tables for the proper resistor).4. A short circuit plug is available when a series resistor is not required or if an external resistor is to be used.5. The ET-16 uses GE Catalog No. 1819 for the 24 DC lamp and GE Catalog Number 1835 for the balanceof the ratings. For LED types, long life LEDs (100,000 hours) are specified. Additional features are asfollows: reduced heat, resistance to shock and vibration, improved safety, lower current, cost savings, andno cold filament inrush current. The LED lamps come in red, green, and amber colors. White is not anoption because a white light LED is not available. ET-17 uses GE Catalog Number B1A.6. Terminals are readily available. They are designed for either AMP “FASTON” type connectors, solder, orscrews.7. Nine basic color caps designed for maximum visibility are available for ET-16 incandescent types. FiveTranslucent caps: red, green, yellow, white; and four transparent caps: amber, red, green, blue, and clear.For ET-16 LED types, only the transparent lens caps are recommended. This is because the transparentlens allows more LED light to pass through than the translucent lens cap used on incandescent lamps.The available colors are as follows: red, green, amber, yellow smoke, clear and blue.ET-17: Because of the special properties of neon, only amber, transparent red, and clear lenses aresuitable.The color caps have a knurled OUTSIDE DIAMETER FOR EASY REMOVAL.8. The ET-16 is also available for dim bright applications.9. When special voltage or resistance is required other than those listed, a special lamp may be ordered withthe proper design, or designated series resistor.10. A two-inch insulating washer is supplied with each indicating light. It should be mounted on the inside ofthe panel as illustrated in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. The function of this washer is to provide additional insulationbetween the terminal and ground (panel) if a surge were to be induced on one of the potential leads.If a bulb other than those listed above is required, the lamp will be furnished less the bulb.Listed tables give some of the specials made available.R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps4RATINGSResistors ET-16: 12.5 WattsET-17: 1 WattBULBDESIGNVOLTAGEDESIGN AMPS CANDLE POWER AVERAGE LIFE(HOURS)1819280.04 AApprox. 0.3425001835550.05 AApprox. 1.15000B1A105-1250.3 mA-15,000CONNECTIONSSee Figure 1A and 1B for typical tell-tale and dim-bright connections.RECOMMENDED PANEL ASSEMBLYThread the pal nut against the shoulder of the receptacle. Install the two-inch insulating washer on the front of thereceptacle against the pal nut. Insert the receptacle through the panel and thread the escutcheon nut againstpanel. Install the color cap and hand tighten (do not force). Turn the escutcheon nut back up against the color cap,then back off ½ to ¾ turn (¾ turn recommended) to give at least 1/64 inch clearance but not more than 1/32 inchclearance between the color cap and escutcheon nut (for up to 3/16 inch panel). For the ¼-inch panel, the colorcap will be flush with the escutcheon nut. Tighten the pal nut against panel to 10 to 12 inch-pounds of torque.TABLE 1: ET-16 – INDICATING LAMPCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A7844RatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(includes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline24 V DC48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC22 V44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V28 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B6708G10116B6708G20116B6708G30116B6708G40116B6708G50116B6708G6123456102002000510019004800181918350116B6709G1SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P10165A7859TABLE 2: ET-16 – FOR DIM-BRIGHT APPLICATIONCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A9217Ohmic ValueRatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(inlcudes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.Total TapBulb(GECatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B8108G20116B8108G30116B8108G40116B8108G50116B8108G612345450255060002450570050170044001600420018350116B6709G3SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P20165A9216GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps9Figure 2 (0165A9216[4]): OUTLINE AND PANE DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMP WITH TAPRESISTOR FOR DIM BRIGHT OPERATIONSR9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps8Figure 1 (0246A3685[1]): TYPICAL TELL-TALE AND DIM-BRIGHT CONNECTIONGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps5TABLE 3: ET-16 – FOR LEDsReceptacle with Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp by VoltageNo.3 - TransparentColor Lens CapRatedVoltageMin. Max. Catalog No.RatedVoltageLampColorCat. No.DigitsTransp.Cap ColorCat. No.Digits24 DC 22 28 116B6708G41 24 DCRedGreenAmberR92G92A9248 DC 44 56 116B6708G42 48 DCRedGreenAmberR52G52A52125 DC250 DC110220140280116B6708G43116B6708G44125 DC250 DCRedGreenAmberR53G53A5370 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC559510519576130140260116B6708G47116B6708G45116B6708G48116B6708G4670 AC120 AC130 AC240 ACRedGreenAmberR53G53A53RedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearNoneR4G4A4Y4S4C4N4Example: Using Table 3 to specify a complete ET-16 LED catalog number for a 24 V DC, Red LED Lamp, redTransparent Color CapReceptacle and Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp Color by VoltageLens Cap by ColorCatalog Number: 116B6708G41 R92 R4TABLE 4: ET-17 – INDICATING LAMPResistor 0165A7956VoltageRangeAC/DCCat. No.*(includes Lamp, color gap,and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle ColorCap Carton Outline110-139140-219220-299300-374375-449450-6000116B6734G10116B6734G20116B6734G30116B6734G40116B6734G50116B6734G6123456200 K560 K750 K1 M1.2 M1.6 MB1A0116B6709G1seeOrderingTable 70165A9257P30165A7955 Specify color cap from Table 6 or 7R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps6TABLE 5: ET-16 SPECIAL 127B8177INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PT NO. LISTED BELOWRESISTORGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. ValueBULBGE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1234567897017140220321252771401300116B6709G-10165A78447891021112913750 50 2500 4300 200 3300 5900 2500 2300 1835756NONE183518191835183518351835** See Ordering Table 60165A9257P-10165A7859** 756 Bulb Furnished by CustomerTABLE 6: ET-17 SPECIAL 128B1654INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PART NUMBER LISTED BELOWRESISTORBULBGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. Value GE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1 210 to 250V AC/DC156 KNE51H **2 67 to 120V AC0116B6709GR-10165A7956880 KNE51 orB1ASee OrderingTable 70165A92570165A7955** NE51H BULB Furnished by CustomerGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps7TABLE 7: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6708GNONENONE0116B6708G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6708G*RRED 208A3768P20116B6708G*GGREEN 208A3768P30116B6708G*YYELLOW 208A3768P40116B6708G*WWHITE 208A3768P50116B6708G*BBLUE 208A3768P60116B6708G*AAMBER 208A3768P70116B6708G*DGREEN 208A3768P80116B6708G*ERED 208A3768P9ORDERING TABLE 8: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6734G*NONENONE0116B6734G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6734G*ERED 208A3768P90116B6734G*AAMBER 208A3768P7HOW TO ORDER:Order by the complete Catalog Number and specify color cap. To order renewal parts for ET-16 LEDs or forIncandescent ET16 conversion to LEDs, use the following table:TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATIONReceptacle: 116B6709G1Resistor 165A7844PRatedVoltagePart No. Ohmic ValueLampColorLED Lamp286A5442PGE Part No.LampMarkingLens Cap286A5443PLens Color24 DC 110RedGreenAmberR92G92A921819L2R1819L2G1819L2A48 DC 2200RedGreenAmberR52G52A521835L2R1835L2G1835L2A125 DC250 DC3420005100RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3A70 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC75136750190023004800RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3ARedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearR4G4A4Y4S4C4R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps6TABLE 5: ET-16 SPECIAL 127B8177INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PT NO. LISTED BELOWRESISTORGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. ValueBULBGE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1234567897017140220321252771401300116B6709G-10165A78447891021112913750 50 2500 4300 200 3300 5900 2500 2300 1835756NONE183518191835183518351835** See Ordering Table 60165A9257P-10165A7859** 756 Bulb Furnished by CustomerTABLE 6: ET-17 SPECIAL 128B1654INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PART NUMBER LISTED BELOWRESISTORBULBGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. Value GE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1 210 to 250V AC/DC156 KNE51H **2 67 to 120V AC0116B6709GR-10165A7956880 KNE51 orB1ASee OrderingTable 70165A92570165A7955** NE51H BULB Furnished by CustomerGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps7TABLE 7: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6708GNONENONE0116B6708G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6708G*RRED 208A3768P20116B6708G*GGREEN 208A3768P30116B6708G*YYELLOW 208A3768P40116B6708G*WWHITE 208A3768P50116B6708G*BBLUE 208A3768P60116B6708G*AAMBER 208A3768P70116B6708G*DGREEN 208A3768P80116B6708G*ERED 208A3768P9ORDERING TABLE 8: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6734G*NONENONE0116B6734G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6734G*ERED 208A3768P90116B6734G*AAMBER 208A3768P7HOW TO ORDER:Order by the complete Catalog Number and specify color cap. To order renewal parts for ET-16 LEDs or forIncandescent ET16 conversion to LEDs, use the following table:TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATIONReceptacle: 116B6709G1Resistor 165A7844PRatedVoltagePart No. Ohmic ValueLampColorLED Lamp286A5442PGE Part No.LampMarkingLens Cap286A5443PLens Color24 DC 110RedGreenAmberR92G92A921819L2R1819L2G1819L2A48 DC 2200RedGreenAmberR52G52A521835L2R1835L2G1835L2A125 DC250 DC3420005100RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3A70 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC75136750190023004800RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3ARedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearR4G4A4Y4S4C4R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps8Figure 1 (0246A3685[1]): TYPICAL TELL-TALE AND DIM-BRIGHT CONNECTIONGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps5TABLE 3: ET-16 – FOR LEDsReceptacle with Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp by VoltageNo.3 - TransparentColor Lens CapRatedVoltageMin. Max. Catalog No.RatedVoltageLampColorCat. No.DigitsTransp.Cap ColorCat. No.Digits24 DC 22 28 116B6708G41 24 DCRedGreenAmberR92G92A9248 DC 44 56 116B6708G42 48 DCRedGreenAmberR52G52A52125 DC250 DC110220140280116B6708G43116B6708G44125 DC250 DCRedGreenAmberR53G53A5370 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC559510519576130140260116B6708G47116B6708G45116B6708G48116B6708G4670 AC120 AC130 AC240 ACRedGreenAmberR53G53A53RedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearNoneR4G4A4Y4S4C4N4Example: Using Table 3 to specify a complete ET-16 LED catalog number for a 24 V DC, Red LED Lamp, redTransparent Color CapReceptacle and Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp Color by VoltageLens Cap by ColorCatalog Number: 116B6708G41 R92 R4TABLE 4: ET-17 – INDICATING LAMPResistor 0165A7956VoltageRangeAC/DCCat. No.*(includes Lamp, color gap,and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle ColorCap Carton Outline110-139140-219220-299300-374375-449450-6000116B6734G10116B6734G20116B6734G30116B6734G40116B6734G50116B6734G6123456200 K560 K750 K1 M1.2 M1.6 MB1A0116B6709G1seeOrderingTable 70165A9257P30165A7955 Specify color cap from Table 6 or 7R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps4RATINGSResistors ET-16: 12.5 WattsET-17: 1 WattBULBDESIGNVOLTAGEDESIGN AMPS CANDLE POWER AVERAGE LIFE(HOURS)1819280.04 AApprox. 0.3425001835550.05 AApprox. 1.15000B1A105-1250.3 mA-15,000CONNECTIONSSee Figure 1A and 1B for typical tell-tale and dim-bright connections.RECOMMENDED PANEL ASSEMBLYThread the pal nut against the shoulder of the receptacle. Install the two-inch insulating washer on the front of thereceptacle against the pal nut. Insert the receptacle through the panel and thread the escutcheon nut againstpanel. Install the color cap and hand tighten (do not force). Turn the escutcheon nut back up against the color cap,then back off ½ to ¾ turn (¾ turn recommended) to give at least 1/64 inch clearance but not more than 1/32 inchclearance between the color cap and escutcheon nut (for up to 3/16 inch panel). For the ¼-inch panel, the colorcap will be flush with the escutcheon nut. Tighten the pal nut against panel to 10 to 12 inch-pounds of torque.TABLE 1: ET-16 – INDICATING LAMPCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A7844RatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(includes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline24 V DC48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC22 V44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V28 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B6708G10116B6708G20116B6708G30116B6708G40116B6708G50116B6708G6123456102002000510019004800181918350116B6709G1SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P10165A7859TABLE 2: ET-16 – FOR DIM-BRIGHT APPLICATIONCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A9217Ohmic ValueRatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(inlcudes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.Total TapBulb(GECatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B8108G20116B8108G30116B8108G40116B8108G50116B8108G612345450255060002450570050170044001600420018350116B6709G3SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P20165A9216GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps9Figure 2 (0165A9216[4]): OUTLINE AND PANE DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMP WITH TAPRESISTOR FOR DIM BRIGHT OPERATIONSR9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps10Figure 3 (0165A7859[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMPGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps3INTRODUCTIONThe ET-16 (incandescent and LEDs) and ET-17 (neon) indicating lamps consist of a common receptacle, plug intype resistors and lamps, escutcheon, and color cap. They are available for mounting on switchboard panels up toand including ¼ inch thickness.APPLICATIONThese lamps can be used whenever a panel mounted signal or indicating lamp is desired.The ET-16 is available for either one brilliance or dim bright operation when incandescent lamps are used. ET-16lamps are also available with Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). The incandescent type can be easily upgraded to theLED type. It only requires acquiring the appropriate color LED and lens cap and inserting into the lamp receptacle.The ET-17 can be used when extra long life is a factor and brilliance is not. It also can be used when low currentis desired.FEATURES1. The simple “push-twist” type plug has been adopted for both the bulb and the resistor. This wasaccomplished by incorporating a bayonet base on both components.2. A common receptacle for both the ET-16 and ET-17 coupled with the plug-in resistor and bulb makes iteasy to change on the panel without disassembling.3. The resistor is in series with the bulb, and the ohmic value for the different circuit voltages is designed at80% of the rated bulb voltage to give it longer life. Changing voltages is easily accomplished by changingthe series resistor (see listed tables for the proper resistor).4. A short circuit plug is available when a series resistor is not required or if an external resistor is to be used.5. The ET-16 uses GE Catalog No. 1819 for the 24 DC lamp and GE Catalog Number 1835 for the balanceof the ratings. For LED types, long life LEDs (100,000 hours) are specified. Additional features are asfollows: reduced heat, resistance to shock and vibration, improved safety, lower current, cost savings, andno cold filament inrush current. The LED lamps come in red, green, and amber colors. White is not anoption because a white light LED is not available. ET-17 uses GE Catalog Number B1A.6. Terminals are readily available. They are designed for either AMP “FASTON” type connectors, solder, orscrews.7. Nine basic color caps designed for maximum visibility are available for ET-16 incandescent types. FiveTranslucent caps: red, green, yellow, white; and four transparent caps: amber, red, green, blue, and clear.For ET-16 LED types, only the transparent lens caps are recommended. This is because the transparentlens allows more LED light to pass through than the translucent lens cap used on incandescent lamps.The available colors are as follows: red, green, amber, yellow smoke, clear and blue.ET-17: Because of the special properties of neon, only amber, transparent red, and clear lenses aresuitable.The color caps have a knurled OUTSIDE DIAMETER FOR EASY REMOVAL.8. The ET-16 is also available for dim bright applications.9. When special voltage or resistance is required other than those listed, a special lamp may be ordered withthe proper design, or designated series resistor.10. A two-inch insulating washer is supplied with each indicating light. It should be mounted on the inside ofthe panel as illustrated in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. The function of this washer is to provide additional insulationbetween the terminal and ground (panel) if a surge were to be induced on one of the potential leads.If a bulb other than those listed above is required, the lamp will be furnished less the bulb.Listed tables give some of the specials made available.R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps2CONTENTSPAGE NO.Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 3Application................................................................................................................................................................ 3Features.................................................................................................................................................................... 3Ratings...................................................................................................................................................................... 4Connections............................................................................................................................................................. 4Recommended Panel Assembly............................................................................................................................. 4Table 1: ET-16 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 4Table 2: ET-16 – for dim-bright application........................................................................................................... 4Table 3: ET-16 – For LEDs....................................................................................................................................... 5Table 4: ET-17 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 5Table 5: ET-16 Special 127B8177 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 6: ET-17 Special 128B1654 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 7: Color Cap................................................................................................................................................... 7Ordering table 8: COLOR CAP................................................................................................................................7TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATION................................................................................... 7These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible contingency tobe met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particularproblems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the GeneralElectric Company (USA)To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards; however, no suchassurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps11Figure 4 (0165A7955[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR NEON INDICATING LAMP TYPE ET-17R9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR gGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone (905) 294-6222www.ge.com/indsys/pmINSTRUCTIONSTYPE ET-16 and ET-17INDICATING LAMPSManual Part Number: GEH-3500FCopyright © 2000 GE Power ManagementGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone: (905) 294-6222Fax: (905) 201-2098E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.comInternet: www.ge.com/indsys/pmgGE Power ManagementManufactured under an ISO9002 Registered SystemR9 - GE # 116B6708G42G52G4 - GREEN LED INDICATOR gGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone (905) 294-6222www.ge.com/indsys/pmINSTRUCTIONSTYPE ET-16 and ET-17INDICATING LAMPSManual Part Number: GEH-3500FCopyright © 2000 GE Power ManagementGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone: (905) 294-6222Fax: (905) 201-2098E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.comInternet: www.ge.com/indsys/pmgGE Power ManagementManufactured under an ISO9002 Registered SystemR10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps2CONTENTSPAGE NO.Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 3Application................................................................................................................................................................ 3Features.................................................................................................................................................................... 3Ratings...................................................................................................................................................................... 4Connections............................................................................................................................................................. 4Recommended Panel Assembly............................................................................................................................. 4Table 1: ET-16 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 4Table 2: ET-16 – for dim-bright application........................................................................................................... 4Table 3: ET-16 – For LEDs....................................................................................................................................... 5Table 4: ET-17 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 5Table 5: ET-16 Special 127B8177 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 6: ET-17 Special 128B1654 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 7: Color Cap................................................................................................................................................... 7Ordering table 8: COLOR CAP................................................................................................................................7TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATION................................................................................... 7These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible contingency tobe met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particularproblems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the GeneralElectric Company (USA)To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards; however, no suchassurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps11Figure 4 (0165A7955[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR NEON INDICATING LAMP TYPE ET-17R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps10Figure 3 (0165A7859[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMPGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps3INTRODUCTIONThe ET-16 (incandescent and LEDs) and ET-17 (neon) indicating lamps consist of a common receptacle, plug intype resistors and lamps, escutcheon, and color cap. They are available for mounting on switchboard panels up toand including ¼ inch thickness.APPLICATIONThese lamps can be used whenever a panel mounted signal or indicating lamp is desired.The ET-16 is available for either one brilliance or dim bright operation when incandescent lamps are used. ET-16lamps are also available with Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). The incandescent type can be easily upgraded to theLED type. It only requires acquiring the appropriate color LED and lens cap and inserting into the lamp receptacle.The ET-17 can be used when extra long life is a factor and brilliance is not. It also can be used when low currentis desired.FEATURES1. The simple “push-twist” type plug has been adopted for both the bulb and the resistor. This wasaccomplished by incorporating a bayonet base on both components.2. A common receptacle for both the ET-16 and ET-17 coupled with the plug-in resistor and bulb makes iteasy to change on the panel without disassembling.3. The resistor is in series with the bulb, and the ohmic value for the different circuit voltages is designed at80% of the rated bulb voltage to give it longer life. Changing voltages is easily accomplished by changingthe series resistor (see listed tables for the proper resistor).4. A short circuit plug is available when a series resistor is not required or if an external resistor is to be used.5. The ET-16 uses GE Catalog No. 1819 for the 24 DC lamp and GE Catalog Number 1835 for the balanceof the ratings. For LED types, long life LEDs (100,000 hours) are specified. Additional features are asfollows: reduced heat, resistance to shock and vibration, improved safety, lower current, cost savings, andno cold filament inrush current. The LED lamps come in red, green, and amber colors. White is not anoption because a white light LED is not available. ET-17 uses GE Catalog Number B1A.6. Terminals are readily available. They are designed for either AMP “FASTON” type connectors, solder, orscrews.7. Nine basic color caps designed for maximum visibility are available for ET-16 incandescent types. FiveTranslucent caps: red, green, yellow, white; and four transparent caps: amber, red, green, blue, and clear.For ET-16 LED types, only the transparent lens caps are recommended. This is because the transparentlens allows more LED light to pass through than the translucent lens cap used on incandescent lamps.The available colors are as follows: red, green, amber, yellow smoke, clear and blue.ET-17: Because of the special properties of neon, only amber, transparent red, and clear lenses aresuitable.The color caps have a knurled OUTSIDE DIAMETER FOR EASY REMOVAL.8. The ET-16 is also available for dim bright applications.9. When special voltage or resistance is required other than those listed, a special lamp may be ordered withthe proper design, or designated series resistor.10. A two-inch insulating washer is supplied with each indicating light. It should be mounted on the inside ofthe panel as illustrated in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. The function of this washer is to provide additional insulationbetween the terminal and ground (panel) if a surge were to be induced on one of the potential leads.If a bulb other than those listed above is required, the lamp will be furnished less the bulb.Listed tables give some of the specials made available.R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps4RATINGSResistors ET-16: 12.5 WattsET-17: 1 WattBULBDESIGNVOLTAGEDESIGN AMPS CANDLE POWER AVERAGE LIFE(HOURS)1819280.04 AApprox. 0.3425001835550.05 AApprox. 1.15000B1A105-1250.3 mA-15,000CONNECTIONSSee Figure 1A and 1B for typical tell-tale and dim-bright connections.RECOMMENDED PANEL ASSEMBLYThread the pal nut against the shoulder of the receptacle. Install the two-inch insulating washer on the front of thereceptacle against the pal nut. Insert the receptacle through the panel and thread the escutcheon nut againstpanel. Install the color cap and hand tighten (do not force). Turn the escutcheon nut back up against the color cap,then back off ½ to ¾ turn (¾ turn recommended) to give at least 1/64 inch clearance but not more than 1/32 inchclearance between the color cap and escutcheon nut (for up to 3/16 inch panel). For the ¼-inch panel, the colorcap will be flush with the escutcheon nut. Tighten the pal nut against panel to 10 to 12 inch-pounds of torque.TABLE 1: ET-16 – INDICATING LAMPCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A7844RatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(includes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline24 V DC48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC22 V44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V28 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B6708G10116B6708G20116B6708G30116B6708G40116B6708G50116B6708G6123456102002000510019004800181918350116B6709G1SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P10165A7859TABLE 2: ET-16 – FOR DIM-BRIGHT APPLICATIONCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A9217Ohmic ValueRatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(inlcudes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.Total TapBulb(GECatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B8108G20116B8108G30116B8108G40116B8108G50116B8108G612345450255060002450570050170044001600420018350116B6709G3SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P20165A9216GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps9Figure 2 (0165A9216[4]): OUTLINE AND PANE DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMP WITH TAPRESISTOR FOR DIM BRIGHT OPERATIONSR10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps8Figure 1 (0246A3685[1]): TYPICAL TELL-TALE AND DIM-BRIGHT CONNECTIONGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps5TABLE 3: ET-16 – FOR LEDsReceptacle with Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp by VoltageNo.3 - TransparentColor Lens CapRatedVoltageMin. Max. Catalog No.RatedVoltageLampColorCat. No.DigitsTransp.Cap ColorCat. No.Digits24 DC 22 28 116B6708G41 24 DCRedGreenAmberR92G92A9248 DC 44 56 116B6708G42 48 DCRedGreenAmberR52G52A52125 DC250 DC110220140280116B6708G43116B6708G44125 DC250 DCRedGreenAmberR53G53A5370 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC559510519576130140260116B6708G47116B6708G45116B6708G48116B6708G4670 AC120 AC130 AC240 ACRedGreenAmberR53G53A53RedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearNoneR4G4A4Y4S4C4N4Example: Using Table 3 to specify a complete ET-16 LED catalog number for a 24 V DC, Red LED Lamp, redTransparent Color CapReceptacle and Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp Color by VoltageLens Cap by ColorCatalog Number: 116B6708G41 R92 R4TABLE 4: ET-17 – INDICATING LAMPResistor 0165A7956VoltageRangeAC/DCCat. No.*(includes Lamp, color gap,and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle ColorCap Carton Outline110-139140-219220-299300-374375-449450-6000116B6734G10116B6734G20116B6734G30116B6734G40116B6734G50116B6734G6123456200 K560 K750 K1 M1.2 M1.6 MB1A0116B6709G1seeOrderingTable 70165A9257P30165A7955 Specify color cap from Table 6 or 7R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps6TABLE 5: ET-16 SPECIAL 127B8177INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PT NO. LISTED BELOWRESISTORGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. ValueBULBGE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1234567897017140220321252771401300116B6709G-10165A78447891021112913750 50 2500 4300 200 3300 5900 2500 2300 1835756NONE183518191835183518351835** See Ordering Table 60165A9257P-10165A7859** 756 Bulb Furnished by CustomerTABLE 6: ET-17 SPECIAL 128B1654INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PART NUMBER LISTED BELOWRESISTORBULBGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. Value GE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1 210 to 250V AC/DC156 KNE51H **2 67 to 120V AC0116B6709GR-10165A7956880 KNE51 orB1ASee OrderingTable 70165A92570165A7955** NE51H BULB Furnished by CustomerGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps7TABLE 7: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6708GNONENONE0116B6708G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6708G*RRED 208A3768P20116B6708G*GGREEN 208A3768P30116B6708G*YYELLOW 208A3768P40116B6708G*WWHITE 208A3768P50116B6708G*BBLUE 208A3768P60116B6708G*AAMBER 208A3768P70116B6708G*DGREEN 208A3768P80116B6708G*ERED 208A3768P9ORDERING TABLE 8: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6734G*NONENONE0116B6734G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6734G*ERED 208A3768P90116B6734G*AAMBER 208A3768P7HOW TO ORDER:Order by the complete Catalog Number and specify color cap. To order renewal parts for ET-16 LEDs or forIncandescent ET16 conversion to LEDs, use the following table:TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATIONReceptacle: 116B6709G1Resistor 165A7844PRatedVoltagePart No. Ohmic ValueLampColorLED Lamp286A5442PGE Part No.LampMarkingLens Cap286A5443PLens Color24 DC 110RedGreenAmberR92G92A921819L2R1819L2G1819L2A48 DC 2200RedGreenAmberR52G52A521835L2R1835L2G1835L2A125 DC250 DC3420005100RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3A70 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC75136750190023004800RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3ARedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearR4G4A4Y4S4C4R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps6TABLE 5: ET-16 SPECIAL 127B8177INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PT NO. LISTED BELOWRESISTORGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. ValueBULBGE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1234567897017140220321252771401300116B6709G-10165A78447891021112913750 50 2500 4300 200 3300 5900 2500 2300 1835756NONE183518191835183518351835** See Ordering Table 60165A9257P-10165A7859** 756 Bulb Furnished by CustomerTABLE 6: ET-17 SPECIAL 128B1654INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE1 REQD of GR. or PART NUMBER LISTED BELOWRESISTORBULBGroup No* VoltsReceptacle DRG. No. Part No. Value GE Cat. No.ColorCapCarton Online1 210 to 250V AC/DC156 KNE51H **2 67 to 120V AC0116B6709GR-10165A7956880 KNE51 orB1ASee OrderingTable 70165A92570165A7955** NE51H BULB Furnished by CustomerGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps7TABLE 7: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6708GNONENONE0116B6708G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6708G*RRED 208A3768P20116B6708G*GGREEN 208A3768P30116B6708G*YYELLOW 208A3768P40116B6708G*WWHITE 208A3768P50116B6708G*BBLUE 208A3768P60116B6708G*AAMBER 208A3768P70116B6708G*DGREEN 208A3768P80116B6708G*ERED 208A3768P9ORDERING TABLE 8: COLOR CAPCOLOR CAPCAT. NO.COLORCAT. NO.0116B6734G*NONENONE0116B6734G*CCLEAR 208A3768P10116B6734G*ERED 208A3768P90116B6734G*AAMBER 208A3768P7HOW TO ORDER:Order by the complete Catalog Number and specify color cap. To order renewal parts for ET-16 LEDs or forIncandescent ET16 conversion to LEDs, use the following table:TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATIONReceptacle: 116B6709G1Resistor 165A7844PRatedVoltagePart No. Ohmic ValueLampColorLED Lamp286A5442PGE Part No.LampMarkingLens Cap286A5443PLens Color24 DC 110RedGreenAmberR92G92A921819L2R1819L2G1819L2A48 DC 2200RedGreenAmberR52G52A521835L2R1835L2G1835L2A125 DC250 DC3420005100RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3A70 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC75136750190023004800RedGreenAmberR53G53A531835L3R1835L3G1835L3ARedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearR4G4A4Y4S4C4R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps8Figure 1 (0246A3685[1]): TYPICAL TELL-TALE AND DIM-BRIGHT CONNECTIONGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps5TABLE 3: ET-16 – FOR LEDsReceptacle with Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp by VoltageNo.3 - TransparentColor Lens CapRatedVoltageMin. Max. Catalog No.RatedVoltageLampColorCat. No.DigitsTransp.Cap ColorCat. No.Digits24 DC 22 28 116B6708G41 24 DCRedGreenAmberR92G92A9248 DC 44 56 116B6708G42 48 DCRedGreenAmberR52G52A52125 DC250 DC110220140280116B6708G43116B6708G44125 DC250 DCRedGreenAmberR53G53A5370 AC120 AC130 AC240 AC559510519576130140260116B6708G47116B6708G45116B6708G48116B6708G4670 AC120 AC130 AC240 ACRedGreenAmberR53G53A53RedGreenAmberYellowSmokeClearNoneR4G4A4Y4S4C4N4Example: Using Table 3 to specify a complete ET-16 LED catalog number for a 24 V DC, Red LED Lamp, redTransparent Color CapReceptacle and Resistor by VoltageLED Lamp Color by VoltageLens Cap by ColorCatalog Number: 116B6708G41 R92 R4TABLE 4: ET-17 – INDICATING LAMPResistor 0165A7956VoltageRangeAC/DCCat. No.*(includes Lamp, color gap,and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle ColorCap Carton Outline110-139140-219220-299300-374375-449450-6000116B6734G10116B6734G20116B6734G30116B6734G40116B6734G50116B6734G6123456200 K560 K750 K1 M1.2 M1.6 MB1A0116B6709G1seeOrderingTable 70165A9257P30165A7955 Specify color cap from Table 6 or 7R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps4RATINGSResistors ET-16: 12.5 WattsET-17: 1 WattBULBDESIGNVOLTAGEDESIGN AMPS CANDLE POWER AVERAGE LIFE(HOURS)1819280.04 AApprox. 0.3425001835550.05 AApprox. 1.15000B1A105-1250.3 mA-15,000CONNECTIONSSee Figure 1A and 1B for typical tell-tale and dim-bright connections.RECOMMENDED PANEL ASSEMBLYThread the pal nut against the shoulder of the receptacle. Install the two-inch insulating washer on the front of thereceptacle against the pal nut. Insert the receptacle through the panel and thread the escutcheon nut againstpanel. Install the color cap and hand tighten (do not force). Turn the escutcheon nut back up against the color cap,then back off ½ to ¾ turn (¾ turn recommended) to give at least 1/64 inch clearance but not more than 1/32 inchclearance between the color cap and escutcheon nut (for up to 3/16 inch panel). For the ¼-inch panel, the colorcap will be flush with the escutcheon nut. Tighten the pal nut against panel to 10 to 12 inch-pounds of torque.TABLE 1: ET-16 – INDICATING LAMPCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A7844RatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(includes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.OhmicValueBulb(GE CatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline24 V DC48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC22 V44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V28 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B6708G10116B6708G20116B6708G30116B6708G40116B6708G50116B6708G6123456102002000510019004800181918350116B6709G1SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P10165A7859TABLE 2: ET-16 – FOR DIM-BRIGHT APPLICATIONCIRCUIT VOLTAGEResistor 0165A9217Ohmic ValueRatedvoltsMIN.voltsMAX.voltsCATALOG NUMBER(inlcudes lamp, colorcap, and resistor)PartNo.Total TapBulb(GECatalogNumber)receptacle Colorcap carton outline48 V DC125 V DC250 V DC120 V AC240 V AC44 V110 V220 V95 V195 V56 V140 V280 V130 V260 V0116B8108G20116B8108G30116B8108G40116B8108G50116B8108G612345450255060002450570050170044001600420018350116B6709G3SeeorderingTable 60165A9257P20165A9216GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps9Figure 2 (0165A9216[4]): OUTLINE AND PANE DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMP WITH TAPRESISTOR FOR DIM BRIGHT OPERATIONSR10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps10Figure 3 (0165A7859[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR TYPE ET-16 INDICATING LAMPGE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps3INTRODUCTIONThe ET-16 (incandescent and LEDs) and ET-17 (neon) indicating lamps consist of a common receptacle, plug intype resistors and lamps, escutcheon, and color cap. They are available for mounting on switchboard panels up toand including ¼ inch thickness.APPLICATIONThese lamps can be used whenever a panel mounted signal or indicating lamp is desired.The ET-16 is available for either one brilliance or dim bright operation when incandescent lamps are used. ET-16lamps are also available with Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs). The incandescent type can be easily upgraded to theLED type. It only requires acquiring the appropriate color LED and lens cap and inserting into the lamp receptacle.The ET-17 can be used when extra long life is a factor and brilliance is not. It also can be used when low currentis desired.FEATURES1. The simple “push-twist” type plug has been adopted for both the bulb and the resistor. This wasaccomplished by incorporating a bayonet base on both components.2. A common receptacle for both the ET-16 and ET-17 coupled with the plug-in resistor and bulb makes iteasy to change on the panel without disassembling.3. The resistor is in series with the bulb, and the ohmic value for the different circuit voltages is designed at80% of the rated bulb voltage to give it longer life. Changing voltages is easily accomplished by changingthe series resistor (see listed tables for the proper resistor).4. A short circuit plug is available when a series resistor is not required or if an external resistor is to be used.5. The ET-16 uses GE Catalog No. 1819 for the 24 DC lamp and GE Catalog Number 1835 for the balanceof the ratings. For LED types, long life LEDs (100,000 hours) are specified. Additional features are asfollows: reduced heat, resistance to shock and vibration, improved safety, lower current, cost savings, andno cold filament inrush current. The LED lamps come in red, green, and amber colors. White is not anoption because a white light LED is not available. ET-17 uses GE Catalog Number B1A.6. Terminals are readily available. They are designed for either AMP “FASTON” type connectors, solder, orscrews.7. Nine basic color caps designed for maximum visibility are available for ET-16 incandescent types. FiveTranslucent caps: red, green, yellow, white; and four transparent caps: amber, red, green, blue, and clear.For ET-16 LED types, only the transparent lens caps are recommended. This is because the transparentlens allows more LED light to pass through than the translucent lens cap used on incandescent lamps.The available colors are as follows: red, green, amber, yellow smoke, clear and blue.ET-17: Because of the special properties of neon, only amber, transparent red, and clear lenses aresuitable.The color caps have a knurled OUTSIDE DIAMETER FOR EASY REMOVAL.8. The ET-16 is also available for dim bright applications.9. When special voltage or resistance is required other than those listed, a special lamp may be ordered withthe proper design, or designated series resistor.10. A two-inch insulating washer is supplied with each indicating light. It should be mounted on the inside ofthe panel as illustrated in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. The function of this washer is to provide additional insulationbetween the terminal and ground (panel) if a surge were to be induced on one of the potential leads.If a bulb other than those listed above is required, the lamp will be furnished less the bulb.Listed tables give some of the specials made available.R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR GEH-3500FGE Power ManagementType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps2CONTENTSPAGE NO.Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................. 3Application................................................................................................................................................................ 3Features.................................................................................................................................................................... 3Ratings...................................................................................................................................................................... 4Connections............................................................................................................................................................. 4Recommended Panel Assembly............................................................................................................................. 4Table 1: ET-16 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 4Table 2: ET-16 – for dim-bright application........................................................................................................... 4Table 3: ET-16 – For LEDs....................................................................................................................................... 5Table 4: ET-17 – Indicating Lamp........................................................................................................................... 5Table 5: ET-16 Special 127B8177 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 6: ET-17 Special 128B1654 INDICATING LAMP COMPLETE..................................................................... 6Table 7: Color Cap................................................................................................................................................... 7Ordering table 8: COLOR CAP................................................................................................................................7TABLE 9: ET-16 LEDs RENEWAL PARTS INFORMATION................................................................................... 7These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment nor provide for every possible contingency tobe met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particularproblems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the GeneralElectric Company (USA)To the extent required the products described herein meet applicable ANSI, IEEE and NEMA standards; however, no suchassurance is given with respect to local codes and ordinances because they vary greatly.GE Power ManagementGEH-3500FType ET-16 and ET-17 Indicating Lamps11Figure 4 (0165A7955[6]): OUTLINE AND PANEL DRILLING FOR NEON INDICATING LAMP TYPE ET-17R10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR gGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone (905) 294-6222www.ge.com/indsys/pmINSTRUCTIONSTYPE ET-16 and ET-17INDICATING LAMPSManual Part Number: GEH-3500FCopyright © 2000 GE Power ManagementGE Power Management215 Anderson AvenueMarkham, OntarioL6E 1B3 CanadaTelephone: (905) 294-6222Fax: (905) 201-2098E-mail: info.pm@indsys.ge.comInternet: www.ge.com/indsys/pmgGE Power ManagementManufactured under an ISO9002 Registered SystemR10 - GE # 116B6708G42R52R4 - RED LED INDICATOR 1 Product Data Sheet www.marathonsp.com 15XX SC Replace XX with 02, 04, 06, 08 or 12 for number of poles TERMINAL BLOCK Wire Range • #10 - #22 AWG Copper Solid Electrical Ratings • Amps - 30 Amps (unprepared wire) - 75 Amps (when wired with crimp type ring, spade or fork terminal) • 600 Volts AC/DC (UL 1059 Class C, User Group - General Industrial) • Short Circuit Current Rated for 10,000 Amps • Factory & Field Wiring Agency Compliance • UL Recognized, UL 1059 Terminal Block Standard, File No. XCFR2.E62806 • CSA - certifed to C22.2 No. 158, File No. LR19766 • CE compliant to IEC 60947-7-1 • RoHS Compliant Material Information • Connector: Brass, nickel plated • Insulator base: - Phenolic - Flammability rating of insulator base: UL 94 V-0 - Insulator base temperature rating: -40°C to 150°C (UL RTI) • Terminal Screws: Plated Brass • SC Pins: Plated Brass - 2 pins included in 1502SC ; 4 pins included for 1504SC - 1512SC • SC Bar: Plated Brass • Marking Strips: Vinyl (White) • Anchor screws: Steel, zinc plated R11 - MARATHON #1504SC - TERMINAL 4-POLE SHORTING www.marathonsp.com 2 PDS 0202 REV-D 3/2/18 Product Data Sheet Termination Specifications Wire Range/ Terminal Type Torque Max Lug Width #10 - 22 AWG 20 in-lbs N/A Listed Lug, Ring, Fork Ter- minals 20 in-lbs .50” Installation & Accessories • Mounting - For use with #10 fastener - Mounting torque to be determined in end use application not to exceed 20 in lbs • Cover - Clear cover: Thermoplastic, UL Recognized QMFZ2 - order CC 15XX (XX representing number of poles). • Printed Marker Strips - Consult factory for custom printed applications STYLE 01 A B C D Example R11 - MARATHON #1504SC - TERMINAL 4-POLE SHORTING www.marathonsp.com 3 PDS 0202 REV-D 3/2/18 Product Data Sheet Drawing Catalog ## of Poles A B 1502 2 2.00 1.62 1504 4 3.25 2.88 1506 6 4.50 4.12 1508 8 5.75 5.38 1512 12 8.25 7.88 R11 - MARATHON #1504SC - TERMINAL 4-POLE SHORTING Product Data Sheet 5/8” Line to Line Spacing Wire Range (with Unprepared wire): #10 - #16 AWG Copper Wire Range will vary with Lug size See tables below for wire sizes. Electrical Ratings: • 30A (unprepared wire) (Based on NEC Table 310-16, 75°C columns) • 75A (when wired with crimp type ring, spade or fork terminal) (Based on NEC Table 310-16, 75°C columns) • 600 Volts AC/DC (UL 1059 Class C, User Group - General Industrial) • Short Circuit Current Rated for 10,000 Amps. • Factory and Field Wiring Mechanical Ratings: • Maximum insulator base temperature: 150°C (302°F) UL RTI • Storage and transportation temperature range: -35°C to 125°C (-31°F to 257°F) • Flammability rating of insulator base: UL 94 V-0 • Use outside these ratings needs to be judged in the end-use application. 15XX STD Replace XX with 02, 04, 06, 08 or 12 for number of poles 1500 Series 30 Amps, 600 Volts AC/DC (Unprepared Wire) or 75 Amps, 600 Volts AC/DC when wired with Listed crimp type ring, spade or fork terminal Standard Connector R12 - MARATHON #1512STD - TERMINAL 12-POLE SHORTING Materials: • Connector: Brass, nickel plated • Insulator base: phenolic • Screws: Brass, nickel plated, 10-32 • Marking Strip: Vinyl (white) • Marking strip anchor screws: Steel, zinc plated Agency Approvals: • UL Recognized, UL 1059 Terminal Block Standard, File No. XCFR2.E62806 • CSA Certified, CSA C22.2 No. 158, File No. LR19766 • CE compliant to IEC 60947-7-1 • RoHS Compliant Wire Approvals (with unprepared wire): Copper Wire Stranding Classes - Number of Strands Wire Size Torque Solid Class B Class C 10 AWG 20 in. lbs 1 7 19 12 20 in. lbs 1 7 19 14 20 in. lbs 1 7 19 16 20 in. lbs 1 7 19 • Panel mountable: #10 fastener, torque to 25-30 in. lbs. Accessories: • MCJ (Multi-Circuit Jumper) Bar Available: Only sold loose and the marking strip must be removed to assemble MCJ bar on part. • Clear cover: Thermoplastic, UL Recognized QMFZ2 - order CC 15XX (XX representing number of poles). See Data Sheet CC 15XX • Sems Pressure Saddle Screw with External Lock Washer (SPSE) • Printing Available on Marking Strip: Consult factory for custom printed applications R12 - MARATHON #1512STD - TERMINAL 12-POLE SHORTING Catalog # # of Poles A B 1504 4 3.25 2.88 1506 6 4.50 4.12 1508 8 5.75 5.38 1512 12 8.25 7.88 WWW.MARATHONSP.COM 1-419-352-8441 PDS 0199 REV A 11/07/07 R12 - MARATHON #1512STD - TERMINAL 12-POLE SHORTING 7 Class H & K Fuse Holders - 250 Volt Fuse HoldersSpecifications: •Are Approved for 10,000 Amp Withstand Rating •Patented Cool-Clip® Design •UL Listed File No. IZLT2.E35113 •CSA Certified File No. LR21455 • 30 & 60 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated 100 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated, with reject pin 200 Amp: •Clip, One Piece Aluminum, Tin Plated 400 & 600 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated Base Wire Fuse Std. Reinforced Poles Amp Materials Range Size Fuses F30A1S RF30A1S 1 F30A2S RF30A2S 2 #10-#22 AWG CU F30A3S RF30A3S 3 F30A1SP RF30A1SP 1 F30A2SP RF30A2SP 2 30 #10-#14 AWG CU 9/16” DIA BY 2” F30A3SP RF30A3SP 3 F30A1B RF30A1B 1 F30A2B RF30A2B 2 Thermoplastic #6-#14 AWG CU A2Y F30A3B RF30A3B 3 CRN F60A1SQ* RF60A1SQ* 1 NLN F60A2SQ* RF60A2SQ* 2 #10-#22 AWG CU NON F60A3SQ* RF60A3SQ* 3 60 13/16” DIA BY 3” NRN F60A1B RF60A1B 1 OT F60A2B RF60A2B 2 #2-#14 AWG CU OTN F60A3B RF60A3B 3 #2-#12 AWG AL RLN RF100A1B 1 #2/0-#14 AWG CU RF RF100A2B 2 100 Phenolic #2/0-#12 AWG AL 1” DIA BY 5 7/8” RF100A3B 3 F200A1BE SAME 1 200 Polyester 250 kcmil - 1 1/2” DIA BY F200A3BE 3 #6 AWG CU AL 7 1/8” RF400A1B 1 400 (2) 350 kcmil - 2 13/32” DIA BY RF400A3B 3 Phenolic #6 AWG CU AL 8 5/8” F600A1B N/A 1 600 (2) 500 kcmil - 2 29/32” DIA BY F600A3B 3 #4 AWG CU AL 10 3/8” Catalog#: *UL Recognized File No. IZLT2.E35113 Contact Factory for Stud Options - see pages 13-15 for dimensional information R13 - MARATHON # F30A2S - FUSE BLOCK 2-POLE 30A 600V 0713 BU-SB13738 Page 1 of 4 Data Sheet # 1030 NON/NOS, 600/250Vac Class K5 & H NON (250V) 1⁄8-600A, General Purpose Fuses Description:Basic protection 250V NON Class K5 and H general purpose, non-current-limiting, one-time fuses. Catalog Symbol:NON-(amp) Ratings: Volts — 250Vac — 125Vdc (1⁄8-100A) Amps — 1⁄8-600A IR — 50kA Vac RMS Sym. ( 1⁄8-60A) — 10kA Vac RMS Sym. (65-600A) — 50kA Vdc (1⁄8-60A) — 10kA Vdc (65-100A) Agency Information: CE, UL Listed, Class K5 (1⁄8-60A), Std. 248-9, Class H (65-600A), Std. 248-6 (125Vdc 1⁄8-100A), UL Guide JDDZ, File E4274 CSA Certified, Class 1421-01, File 53787 (1⁄8-12A, 65-600A)† † For CSA Certified 15-60A, see PON Data Sheet # 4126. Catalog Numbers (amps) NON-1⁄8 NON-3 NON-12 NON-65 NON-200 NON-1⁄2 NON-32⁄10 NON-15 NON-70 NON-225 NON-3⁄4 NON-4 NON-20 NON-75 NON-250 NON-8⁄10 NON-5 NON-25 NON-80 NON-300 NON-1 NON-6 NON-30 NON-90 NON-350 NON-11⁄4 NON-61⁄4 NON-35 NON-100 NON-400 NON-11⁄2 NON-7 NON-40 NON-110 NON-450 NON-16⁄10 NON-8 NON-45 NON-125 NON-500 NON-2 NON-9 NON-50 NON-150 NON-600 NON-21⁄2 NON-10 NON-60 NON-175 Carton Quantity and Weight Amp Rating Carton Qty. 1⁄8-30 10 35–60 10 65–100 5 110–200 1 225–400 1 450–600 1 Dimensions – in Features: • Protect lighting, heating and other circuits not subject to temporary surges and where available short-circuit currents are relatively low • NON one-time fuses do not have any appreciable degree of time- delay and thus should not be specified in circuits where large transients or motor overloads occur. Use Bussmann advanced protection FUSETRON™ FRN-R or ultimate protection Low-Peak™ LPN-RK dual-element, time-delay fuses. • For general purpose circuits, size at amp rating of circuit • For motor circuits, size at 300% to 400% according to the NEC ® motor ampacity tables 430.247 to 430.250, per 430.6(A)(1) Recommended Fuse Blocks Fuse Amps 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 0-30 H25030-1 H25030-2 H25030-3 35-60 H25060-1 H25060-2 H25060-3 70-100 HM25100-1CR HM25100-2CR HM25100-3CR 110-200 HM25200-1CR HM25200-2CR HM25200-3CR 225-400 HM25400-1CR HM25400-2CR HM25400-3CR 450-600 HM25600-1CR HM25600-2CR HM25600-3CR For additional information on 250 volt fuse blocks, see Data Sheet # 1112 (H250) and product brochure # 3192 (HM Se- ries). Fuse Reducers For Class R Fuses Equipment Desired Fuse Catalog Numbers Fuse Clips (Case) Size (Pairs) 250V 60A 30A NO.263 100A 30A NO.213 60A NO.216 200A 60A NO.226 200A 100A NO.2621 400A 100A NO.2641 200A NO.2642 For additional information on Class K5 & H fuse reducers, see Data Sheet # 1118. 0.56" (± 0.008) 2" (0.031) 0.81" (± 0.008) 3"(0.031) 1.06" 5.88" (± 0.062) 1/8 to 30A 35 to 60A 70 to 100A All Diameters ± 0.008 2.06" 2.59" 8.63" (± 0.094) 10.38" ( 0.094) 225 to 400A 450 to 600A 1.56" 7.13" (± 0.062) 110 to 200A R14 - BUSSMAN # NON-5 - FUSE CLASS NON 5A 0713 BU-SB13738 Page 2 of 4 Data Sheet # 1030 NON/NOS, 600/250Vac Class K5 & H Time-Current Curves - Average Melt 201001,00010,000300 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 CURRENT IN AMPSTIME IN SECONDS60A100A200A30A400AAMP RATING600A15A35A20ANON (250V) 1⁄8-600A, General Purpose Fuses R14 - BUSSMAN # NON-5 - FUSE CLASS NON 5A 0713 BU-SB13738 Page 3 of 4 Data Sheet # 1030 NON/NOS, 600/250Vac Class K5 & H The only controlled copy of this Data Sheet is the electronic read-only version located on the Cooper Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Cooper Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Cooper Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications. NOS (600V), 1-600A, General Purpose Fuses Description:Basic protection 600V NOS Class K5 and H general purpose, non-current-limiting, one-time fuses. Catalog Symbol:NOS-(amp) Ratings: Volts — 600Vac Amps — 1-600A IR — 50kA Vac RMS Sym. (1-60A) — 10kA Vac RMS Sym. (70-600A) Agency Information: CE, UL Listed, Class K5 (1-60A), Std. 248-9, Class H (70-600A), Std. 248-6, UL Guide JDDZ, File E4273 CSA Certified, Class 1421-01, File 53787 Catalog Numbers (amps) NOS-1 NOS-9 NOS-40 NOS-100 NON-300 NOS-2 NOS-10 NOS-45 NOS-110 NOS-350 NOS-3 NOS-12 NOS-50 NOS-125 NOS-400 NOS-4 NOS-15 NOS-60 NOS-150 NOS-450 NOS-5 NOS-20 NOS-70 NOS-175 NOS-500 NOS-6 NOS-25 NOS-75 NOS-200 NOS-600 NOS-7 NOS-30 NOS-80 NOS-225 NOS-8 NOS-35 NOS-90 NOS-250 NOS 600V Carton Quantity and Weight Amp Rating Carton Qty. 1–30 10 35–60 10 70–100 5 110–200 1 225–400 1 450–600 1 Dimensions – in Features: • Protect lighting, heating and other circuits not subject to temporary surges and where available short-circuit currents are relatively low • NOS one-time fuses do not have any appreciable degree of time- delay and thus should not be specified in circuits where large transients or motor overloads occur. Use Bussmann advanced protection FUSETRON™ LPS-R or ultimate protection Low-Peak™ LPS-RK dual-element, time-delay fuses. • For general purpose circuits, size at amp rating of circuit • For motor circuits, size at 300% to 400% according to the NEC ® motor ampacity tables 430.247 to 430.250, per 430.6(A)(1) Recommended Fuse Blocks Fuse Amps 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 0-30 H60030-1 H60030-2 H60030-3 35-60 H60060-1 H60060-2 H60060-3 70-100 HM60100-1CR HM60100-2CR HM60100-3CR 110-200 HM60200-1CR HM60200-2CR HM60200-3CR 225-400 HM60400-1CR HM60400-2CR HM60400-3CR 450-600 HM60600-1CR HM60600-2CR HM60600-3CR For additional information on 600 volt fuse blocks, see Data Sheet # 1112 (H) and product brochure # 3192 (HM Series). Fuse Reducers For Class R Fuses Equipment Desired Fuse Catalog Numbers Fuse Clips (Case) Size (Pairs) 250V 60A 30A NO.663 100A 30A NO.216 60A NO.616 200A 60A NO.626 200A 100A NO.2621 400A 100A NO.2641 200A NO.2642 For additional information on Class R fuse reducers, see Data Sheet # 1118. 0.81" (± 0.008) 5" (± 0.031) 1.06" (± 0.008) 5.5" (± 0.031) 1 to 30A 35 to 60A 1.34" 7.9" (± 0.062) 70 to 100A 3.13" 13.38" ( 0.094) 450 to 600A 2.59" 11.63" (± 0.094) 225 to 400A 1.84" 9.63" (± 0.062) 110 to 200A All Diameters ± 0.008 R14 - BUSSMAN # NON-5 - FUSE CLASS NON 5A 0713 BU-SB13738 Page 4 of 4 Data Sheet # 1030 NON/NOS Class K5 & H, 600/250Vac NOS (600V), 1-600A, General Purpose Fuses Time-Current Curves - Average Melt 201001,00010,000300 100 10 1 0.10.08 0.06 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 CURRENT IN AMPSTIME IN SECONDS60A100A200A30A400AAMP RATING600A15A35A20A The only controlled copy of this Data Sheet is the electronic read-only version located on the Cooper Bussmann Network Drive. All other copies of this document are by definition uncontrolled. This bulletin is intended to clearly present comprehensive product data and provide technical information that will help the end user with design applications. Cooper Bussmann reserves the right, without notice, to change design or construction of any products and to discontinue or limit distribution of any products. Cooper Bussmann also reserves the right to change or update, without notice, any technical information contained in this bulletin. Once a product has been selected, it should be tested by the user in all possible applications. R14 - BUSSMAN # NON-5 - FUSE CLASS NON 5A 7 Class H & K Fuse Holders - 250 Volt Fuse HoldersSpecifications: •Are Approved for 10,000 Amp Withstand Rating •Patented Cool-Clip® Design •UL Listed File No. IZLT2.E35113 •CSA Certified File No. LR21455 • 30 & 60 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated 100 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated, with reject pin 200 Amp: •Clip, One Piece Aluminum, Tin Plated 400 & 600 Amp: •Clip, Copper Alloy, Tin Plated Base Wire Fuse Std. Reinforced Poles Amp Materials Range Size Fuses F30A1S RF30A1S 1 F30A2S RF30A2S 2 #10-#22 AWG CU F30A3S RF30A3S 3 F30A1SP RF30A1SP 1 F30A2SP RF30A2SP 2 30 #10-#14 AWG CU 9/16” DIA BY 2” F30A3SP RF30A3SP 3 F30A1B RF30A1B 1 F30A2B RF30A2B 2 Thermoplastic #6-#14 AWG CU A2Y F30A3B RF30A3B 3 CRN F60A1SQ* RF60A1SQ* 1 NLN F60A2SQ* RF60A2SQ* 2 #10-#22 AWG CU NON F60A3SQ* RF60A3SQ* 3 60 13/16” DIA BY 3” NRN F60A1B RF60A1B 1 OT F60A2B RF60A2B 2 #2-#14 AWG CU OTN F60A3B RF60A3B 3 #2-#12 AWG AL RLN RF100A1B 1 #2/0-#14 AWG CU RF RF100A2B 2 100 Phenolic #2/0-#12 AWG AL 1” DIA BY 5 7/8” RF100A3B 3 F200A1BE SAME 1 200 Polyester 250 kcmil - 1 1/2” DIA BY F200A3BE 3 #6 AWG CU AL 7 1/8” RF400A1B 1 400 (2) 350 kcmil - 2 13/32” DIA BY RF400A3B 3 Phenolic #6 AWG CU AL 8 5/8” F600A1B N/A 1 600 (2) 500 kcmil - 2 29/32” DIA BY F600A3B 3 #4 AWG CU AL 10 3/8” Catalog#: *UL Recognized File No. IZLT2.E35113 Contact Factory for Stud Options - see pages 13-15 for dimensional information R15 - MARATHON # F30A2S - FUSE BLOCK 3-POLE 30A 600V ©2013 Chatsworth Products, Inc.  All rights reserved. CPI, CPI Passive Cooling, GlobalFrame, MegaFrame, Saf-T-Grip, Seismic Frame, SlimFrame, TeraFrame, Cube-iT Plus, Evolution, OnTrac, Velocity and QuadraRack are federally registered trademarks of Chatsworth Products.  eConnect and Simply Efficient are trademarks of Chatsworth Products. All other trademarks belong to their respective companies. 6/13 800-834-4969 in U.S. & Canada • www.chatsworth.com Product Cut Sheet FILLER PANEL Spaces - in (mm)U 01 1.72 (43.7)1 02 3.47 (88.1)2 03 5.22 (132.6) 3 04 6.97 (177.0)4 05 8.72 (221.5)5 06 10.47 (265.9)6 07 12.22 (310.4)7 08 13.97 (354.8)8 09 15.72 (399.3)9 10 17.47 (443.7)10 11 19.22 (488.2)11 12 20.97 (532.6)12 Color 1 Gray 2 Computer Beige 5 Clear 7 Black E Glacier White Thickness - in (mm)Width 24 3/16 (4.763)19” 25 3/16 (4.763)23” 26 1/8 (3.18)19” 27 1/8 (3.18)23” For airflow control and/or equipment mounting, fill empty spaces between mounted equipment. Filler Panels 300 Filler Panels 300 XX -X XX R16 - CHATSWORTH #30026-105 - FILLER PLATE 19IN 5RU Southwire Company, LLC | One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA 30119 | www.southwire.com Copyright © 2017 Southwire Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved Images not to scale. See Table for Dimensions 5 2 1 51 CU 600V XLPE XHHW-2 CPE Control Cable Type TC-ER Type TC-ER Control Cable 600Volt Copper Conductors, Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Insulation XHHW-2 Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Jacket, Control Cable Conductor Identification Method 1 Table 2 ™ SPEC 45053_PSS DIVISION DATE: 06/29/2018 Rev:2.0.07C SPEC 45053 CONSTRUCTION: 1. Conductor: 7 strands class B compressed bare copper per ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 2. Insulation: Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) XHHW-2, 30 Mils thick for all cable sizes 3. Filler: Polypropylene filler on cables with 5 or less conductors 4. Binder: Polyester flat thread binder tape applied for cables with more than 5 conductors 5. Overall Jacket: Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Jacket APPLICATIONS AND FEATURES: Southwire’s 600 Volt Type TC-ER control cables are suited for use in wet and dry areas, conduits, ducts, troughs, trays, direct burial, aerial supported by a messenger, and where superior electrical properties are desired. These cables are capable of op- erating continuously at the conductor temperature not in excess of 90°C for normal operation in wet and dry locations, 130°C for emergency overload, and 250°C for short circuit conditions. For uses in Class I, II, and III, Division 2 hazardous locations per NEC Article 501 and 502. Constructions with 3 or more conductors are listed for exposed runs (TC-ER) per NEC 336.10. Sunlight resistant. SPECIFICATIONS: • ASTM B3 - Soft or annealed copper • ASTM B8 - Concentric-lay-strandard copper • UL 44 - Thermoset Insulated wires and cables • UL 1277 - Electrical Power and Control Cable • UL 1685 - Flame Test • UL 1581 - Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords • IEEE 1202/FT4 - Vertical Tray Flame Test (70,000 Btu/hr) • ICEA S-73-532 - Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension and Instrumentation Cables • ICEA S-58-679 - Control Cable Conductor Identification Method 1 Table 2 • ICEA S-95-658 NEMA WC70 - Power cables rated 2000 volts or less for the distribution of electrical energy SAMPLE PRINT LEGEND: SOUTHWIRE EXXXXX #P# (UL) [#AWG Or #kcmil] CU XHHW-2 XLPE/CPE 600V Type TC-ER For CT USE SUN. RES. For DIRECT BURIAL FT4 YEAR (NESC) [SEQUENTIAL FEET MARKS] ITEM W1, W2 - SOUTHWIRE - MUTLICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE Southwire Company, LLC | One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA 30119 | www.southwire.com Copyright © 2017 Southwire Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved Measurements and Electrical Data #14 AWG Stock Code Cond. Number Dia. Over Cond. (1) Jacket Thickness Approx. OD (5) Copper Weight Approx. Weight Min Bend- ing Radius DC Resis. @ 250C AC Resis @ 900C Allowable Ampacities* 60/75/900C inches mils inches lbs./MFT lbs./MFT inches Ω/MFT Ω/MFT Amps 890674 2 0.070 45 0.349 26 67 1.4 2.630 3.288 15/15/15 890675 3 0.070 45 0.370 38 85 1.5 2.630 3.288 15/15/15 890676 4 0.070 45 0.403 51 106 1.6 2.630 3.288 14/15/15 890677 5 0.070 45 0.440 64 128 1.8 2.630 3.288 14/15/15 TBA 6 0.070 45 0.479 77 151 1.9 2.630 3.288 14/15/15 890678 7 0.070 45 0.479 90 165 1.9 2.630 3.288 12/15/15 TBA 8 0.070 45 0.519 102 188 2.1 2.630 3.288 12/15/15 890679 9 0.070 60 0.588 115 229 2.4 2.630 3.288 12/15/15 TBA 10 0.070 60 0.638 128 258 2.6 2.630 3.288 9/11/12 550407 12 0.070 60 0.659 154 293 2.6 2.630 3.288 9/11/12 TBA 15 0.070 60 0.730 192 359 2.9 2.630 3.288 9/11/12 890680 19 0.070 60 0.768 243 428 3.1 2.630 3.288 9/11/12 TBA 20 0.070 60 0.808 256 457 3.2 2.630 3.288 9/11/12 TBA 25 0.070 80 0.937 320 598 3.7 2.630 3.288 8/9/11 TBA 30 0.070 80 0.991 384 693 4.0 2.630 3.288 8/9/11 TBA 37 0.070 80 1.067 474 828 5.3 2.630 3.288 7/8/10 All dimensions are nominal and subject to normal manufacturing tolerance. * Ampacities are based on Table 310.15 (B)(16) of the NEC, 2014 Edition. Ampacities of insulated conductors rated up to and including 2000 Volts, based on ambient temperature of 30ºC (86ºF) Measurements and Electrical Data #16 AWG Stock Code Cond. Number Dia. Over Cond. (1) Jacket Thickness Approx. OD (5) Copper Weight Approx. Weight Min Bend- ing Radius DC Resis. @ 250C AC Resis @ 900C Allowable Ampacities* 60/75/900C inches mils inches lbs./MFT lbs./MFT inches Ω/MFT Ω/MFT Amps TBA 2 0.056 45 0.323 16 53 1.3 4.180 5.226 10/10/10 TBA 3 0.056 45 0.341 24 66 1.4 4.180 5.226 10/10/10 TBA 4 0.056 45 0.371 32 81 1.5 4.180 5.226 10/10/10 TBA 5 0.056 45 0.404 40 97 1.6 4.180 5.226 10/10/10 TBA 6 0.056 45 0.439 48 113 1.8 4.180 5.226 10/10/10 TBA 7 0.056 45 0.439 56 123 1.8 4.180 5.226 9/10/10 TBA 8 0.056 45 0.475 64 140 1.9 4.180 5.226 9/10/10 TBA 9 0.056 45 0.510 72 158 2.0 4.180 5.226 9/10/10 TBA 10 0.056 60 0.585 81 195 2.3 4.180 5.226 6/7/9 TBA 12 0.056 60 0.604 97 219 2.4 4.180 5.226 6/7/9 TBA 15 0.056 60 0.668 121 267 2.7 4.180 5.226 6/7/9 TBA 19 0.056 60 0.702 153 315 2.8 4.180 5.226 6/7/9 TBA 20 0.056 60 0.738 161 337 3.0 4.180 5.226 6/7/9 TBA 25 0.056 60 0.818 201 412 3.3 4.180 5.226 6/7/8 TBA 30 0.056 80 0.905 242 512 3.6 4.180 5.226 6/7/8 TBA 37 0.056 80 0.974 298 608 3.9 4.180 5.226 5/6/7 SPEC 45053_PSS DIVISION DATE: 06/29/2018 Rev:2.0.07C SPEC 45053 ITEM W1, W2 - SOUTHWIRE - MUTLICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE Southwire Company, LLC | One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA 30119 | www.southwire.com Copyright © 2017 Southwire Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved Measurements and Electrical Data #10 AWG Stock Code Cond. Number Dia. Over Cond. (1) Jacket Thickness Approx. OD (5) Copper Weight Approx. Weight Min Bend- ing Radius DC Resis. @ 250C AC Resis @ 900C Allowable Ampacities* 60/75/900C inches mils inches lbs./MFT lbs./MFT inches Ω/MFT Ω/MFT Amps 550419 2 0.111 45 0.431 65 122 1.7 1.040 1.300 30/30/30 890685 3 0.111 45 0.459 97 162 1.8 1.040 1.300 30/30/30 890686 4 0.111 45 0.502 130 206 2.0 1.040 1.300 24/28/30 550420 5 0.111 60 0.581 162 268 2.3 1.040 1.300 24/28/30 TBA 6 0.111 60 0.632 194 316 2.5 1.040 1.300 24/28/30 550421 7 0.111 60 0.632 227 350 2.5 1.040 1.300 21/24/28 TBA 8 0.111 60 0.685 259 400 2.7 1.040 1.300 21/24/28 890687 9 0.111 60 0.736 291 451 2.9 1.040 1.300 21/24/28 TBA 10 0.111 60 0.803 324 507 3.2 1.040 1.300 15/17/20 890688 12 0.111 60 0.830 389 585 3.3 1.040 1.300 15/17/20 TBA 15 0.111 80 0.964 486 760 3.9 1.040 1.300 15/17/20 TBA 19 0.111 80 1.014 615 917 5.1 1.040 1.300 15/17/20 TBA 20 0.111 80 1.067 648 975 5.3 1.040 1.300 15/17/20 TBA 25 0.111 80 1.184 810 1203 5.9 1.040 1.300 13/15/18 TBA 30 0.111 80 1.254 971 1409 6.3 1.040 1.300 13/15/18 TBA 37 0.111 80 1.355 1198 1702 6.8 1.040 1.300 12/14/16 All dimensions are nominal and subject to normal manufacturing tolerance. * Ampacities are based on Table 310.15 (B)(16) of the NEC, 2014 Edition. Ampacities of insulated conductors rated up to and including 2000 Volts, based on ambient temperature of 30ºC (86ºF) Measurements and Electrical Data #12 AWG Stock Code Cond. Number Dia. Over Cond. (1) Jacket Thickness Approx. OD (5) Copper Weight Approx. Weight Min Bend- ing Radius DC Resis. @ 250C AC Resis @ 900C Allowable Ampacities* 60/75/900C inches mils inches lbs./MFT lbs./MFT inches Ω/MFT Ω/MFT Amps 550411 2 0.087 45 0.384 41 89 1.5 1.660 2.075 20/20/20 890681 3 0.087 45 0.408 61 115 1.6 1.660 2.075 20/20/20 890682 4 0.087 45 0.445 81 145 1.8 1.660 2.075 16/20/20 890683 5 0.087 45 0.487 102 176 1.9 1.660 2.075 16/20/20 TBA 6 0.087 45 0.532 122 208 2.1 1.660 2.075 16/20/20 550412 7 0.087 45 0.532 143 230 2.1 1.660 2.075 14/17/20 TBA 8 0.087 60 0.607 163 281 2.4 1.660 2.075 14/17/20 550413 9 0.087 60 0.651 183 316 2.6 1.660 2.075 14/17/20 TBA 10 0.087 60 0.709 204 356 2.8 1.660 2.075 10/12/15 890684 12 0.087 60 0.732 244 407 2.9 1.660 2.075 10/12/15 TBA 15 0.087 60 0.813 305 501 3.3 1.660 2.075 10/12/15 TBA 19 0.087 80 0.896 387 638 3.6 1.660 2.075 10/12/15 TBA 20 0.087 80 0.942 407 680 3.8 1.660 2.075 10/12/15 550416 25 0.087 80 1.043 509 834 5.2 1.660 2.075 9/11/13 TBA 30 0.087 80 1.104 611 972 5.5 1.660 2.075 9/11/13 TBA 37 0.087 80 1.191 753 1169 6.0 1.660 2.075 8/10/12 SPEC 45053_PSS DIVISION DATE: 06/29/2018 Rev:2.0.07C SPEC 45053 ITEM W1, W2 - SOUTHWIRE - MUTLICONDUCTOR CONTROL CABLE Category 5e Cables APPLICATIONS Digital Surveillance Camera MJPG and MPEG4, RS422 extension, Video, Multi-media, and voice circuits, ISDN, 100Mbps ANSI X3T9.5, 100VG-Anylan, 10 Base-T (IEEE 802.3), Token Ring (IEEE 805.5); 100 Base-T (Fast Ethernet); 1000 Base-T (Gigabit Ethernet) CONSTRUCTION A.) CONDUCTOR 24 AWG Solid bare copper. B.) INSULATION FEP on plenum rated cables 335UP; Polypropylene or Polyethylene on non-plenum cables. C.) COLOR CODE Orange & White/Orange L. - Green & White/Green L. -- Blue & White/Blue L. -- Brown & White/Brown L. D.) SHIELDING Unshielded E.) ASSEMBLY Four twisted pairs, cabled and jacketed overall. COMPLIANCE A.) FLAME TEST UL 1685 / UL 1666 335UP: NFPA 262 B.) CABLE TYPE According to table C.) VOLTAGE 300V D.) TEMPERATURE 75C E.) SUITABLE USE: Where Category 5e cable is specified. General purpose communication circuits to NEC Article 800. FEATURES & OPTIONS:Available in 1000ft or 500 ft packages, reels, or pull-boxes where practicable. Optional: other colors, jackets with extruded stripes, and composite cables for multiple services, jacketed, armored, or armored and jacketed. Armored versions ar cataloged with Armored Low Voltage Cables "Home Automation: Cat 5e + CATV Coax options - are cataloged with Combo Cables "CCTP" Cat 5e + Power Pair options -- are cataloged with Como Cables "Media Control" Control Cable + Cat 5e options - call factory for Cable Type AWG #COND STRANDED /SOLID BC/ TD SHIELD UL/NEC SPEC# Link Horizontal Cat 5e 24 4/PR SOL BC N/S CM SPEC 70474 96262 Cat 5e 24 4/PR SOL BC N/S CMR SPEC 70470 96263 Cat 5e 24 4/PR SOL BC SHIELD CMR SPEC 70655 96273 Cat 5e 24 4/PR SOL BC N/S CMP SPEC 70465 966956 Cat 5e 24 4/PR SOL BC N/S None SPEC 70694 H90558-1 96263 24/4PR SOL BC N/S CMR H90558-1 24/4PR SOL BC N/S --PE JKT (Non-UL) 96273 24/4PR SOL BC Shielded CMR Plenum 966956 24/4PR SOL BC N/S CMP PE Jacket - for Outdoor Use - DIRECT BURIAL 96262 24/4PR SOL BC N/S CM Riser Stock #DESCRIPTION Low Voltage Cables Catalog W3 - SOUTHWIRE # 96263 SPEC 70470 96263 - ETHERNET CABLE CAT 5E 3/C CU 600V EPR XHHW-2 CPE Control Cable Color Method 1 Table 1 With Tinned Ground Type TC-ER Control Cable 600Volt Copper Conductors, Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) Insulation XHHW-2 Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Jacket with 1 Tinned CU Ground, Control Cable Conductor Identification Method 1 Table 1 Image not to scale. See Table 1 for dimensions. CONSTRUCTION: 1.Conductor:7 strands class B compressed tinned copper per ASTM B33 and ASTM B8 2.Insulation:Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) XHHW-2, 30 Mils thick for all cable sizes 3.Grounding Conductor:Class B compressed stranded tinned copper per ASTM B33 and ASTM B8 4.Overall Jacket:Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Jacket APPLICATIONS AND FEATURES: Southwire’s 600 Volt Type TC-ER control cables are suited for use in wet and dry areas, conduits, ducts, troughs, trays, direct burial, aerial supported by a messenger, and where superior electrical properties are desired. These cables are capable of operating continuously at the conductor temperature not in excess of 90°C for normal operation in wet and dry locations, 130°C for emergency overload, and 250°C for short circuit conditions. For uses in Class I, II, and III, Division 2 hazardous locations per NEC Article 501 and 502. Constructions with 3 or more conductors are listed for exposed runs (TC-ER) per NEC 336.10. SPECIFICATIONS: •ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors •ASTM B33 Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire •UL 44 Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables •UL 1277 Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables •UL 1685 FT4 Vertical-Tray Fire Propagation and Smoke Release Test •ICEA S-58-679 Control Cable Conductor Identification Method 1 Table 1 •ICEA S-73-532 Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension and Instrumentation Cables •ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC70) Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy •IEEE 1202 FT4 Flame Test (70,000) BTU/hr Vertical Tray Test SAMPLE PRINT LEGEND: SOUTHWIRE EXXXXX #P# (UL) [#AWG Or #kcmil] CU XHHW-2 EPR/CPE 600V Type TC-ER For CT USE SUN. RES. For DIRECT BURIAL FT4 YEAR (NESC) [SEQUENTIAL FEET MARKS] Southwire Company, LLC | One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA 30119 | www.southwire.com Copyright © 2020 Southwire Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved SPEC 45107 DATE: 02/11/2020 15:57 UTC Rev: 3.0.00C SPEC 45107 W4 - SOUTHWIRE # SPEC 45107 - 3-C W-GND CABLE Table 1 – Physical and Electrical Data Cond. Size Cond. Number Diameter Over Cond. Insul. Thickness Ground Jacket Thickness Approx. OD Copper Weight Approx. Weight DC Resistance AC Resistance @ 90°C Min Bending Radius Allowable Ampacity At 60°C * Allowable Ampacity 75°C * Allowable Ampacity 90°C * AWG No. inch mil No. x AWG mil inch lb /1000ft lb /1000ft Ω /1000ft Ω /1000ft inch Amp Amp Amp 14 AWG 14 3 0.070 30 1 x 14 45 0.370 51 101 2.630 3.288 1.5 15 15 15 12 AWG 12 3 0.087 30 1 x 12 45 0.408 81 139 1.660 2.075 1.6 20 20 20 10 AWG 10 3 0.111 30 1 x 10 45 0.459 130 198 1.040 1.300 1.8 30 30 30 All dimensions are nominal and subject to normal manufacturing tolerances ◊ Cable marked with this symbol is a standard stock item † Ampacities are based on Table 310.15 (B)(16) of the NEC, 2017 Edition. Ampacities of insulated conductors rated up to and including 2000 Volts, based on ambient temperature of 30°C (86°F) Southwire Company, LLC | One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA 30119 | www.southwire.com Copyright © 2020 Southwire Company, LLC. All Rights Reserved SPEC 45107 DATE: 02/11/2020 15:57 UTC Rev: 3.0.00C SPEC 45107 W4 - SOUTHWIRE # SPEC 45107 - 3-C W-GND CABLE